GREENWICH

UNITARY
DEVELOPMENT
PLAN
Adopted 20 July 2006
Published by Designed and Produced by Copyright
Greenwich Council Cook Hammond & Kell Maps in this publication are reproduced
Whittington House with permission from Ordnance Survey

Produced by 764-768 Holloway Road with permission of the Controller of Her

Greenwich Strategic Planning London N19 3JQ Majesty's Stationery Office. Greenwich

Peggy Middleton House Council licence 100019695 (2007).

50 Woolwich New Road Unauthorised reproduction infringes

London SE18 6HQ Crown copyright and may lead to

prosecution or civil proceedings.
FOREWORD BY THE LEADER OF THE COUNCIL
These are exciting times for Greenwich.
Record inward investment, secured by Greenwich Council and our partners, is transforming the face
of our borough. Step by step, we are reversing years of economic decline brought about by the
demise of our traditional industries. As a result, the visible signs of regeneration lie all around us –
in every part of our borough.
Over the last year, we have made every effort to ensure that our priorities mirror your priorities.
Around 35,000 residents seized the opportunity to tell us their vision for a future Greenwich at one
of our Great Get Together consultation events.
We have listened to what you told us. We are seeking to meet your aspirations with an ambitious
plan that takes advantage of the once in a lifetime opportunity record amounts of inward investment
have given us.
You told us that transport was one of your main priorities.We agree.That’s why we are committed
to securing new transport links that will open up job opportunities across the capital and attract
new businesses to our borough.
The North Greenwich stop on the Jubilee line has shown just how much of a catalyst transport
links can be in terms of regeneration. It has become the most successful station on the Jubilee line
extension and together with new and improved local bus services, our existing rail services and a
commuter river service, it is helping our borough to become south east London’s transport hub.
This unique position will soon be strengthened even further.Work is well underway on a new DLR
station in Woolwich that will open in 2009. A Crossrail station in Abbey Wood will follow just a few
years later.
Our attempts to persuade people of the overwhelming economic case for opening a further
Crossrail station in Woolwich continue apace. Like the thousands of local residents and businesses
who supported our campaign, we understand that we cannot afford to miss out on the wider
benefits this development would bring.
You also told us that access to high quality and affordable housing is one of the biggest challenges
we face today. Again we agree. That’s why we will continue to build on our proud record of
substantial housing developments; delivering thousands of new and affordable homes on the
Greenwich Peninsula, Woolwich Arsenal, Kidbrooke and across the borough.
Not only have many of these developments brought former wasteland back into use, they have
provided us with an opportunity to negotiate benefits such as schools and new health facilities that
will benefit the whole of our community.
And finally you told us that you wanted to see new life breathed into our three town centres. We
agree. That’s why we have launched ambitious plans to build three new local service centers in
Eltham, Woolwich and Greenwich. As well as acting as a catalyst for wider regeneration projects in
each area, they will ensure that you can access a range of modern, first class services in your
neighbourhood.
All of this is part of our long-term vision to help us create a truly sustainable community within the
Thames Gateway. It is set out in this, our new Unitary Development Plan (UDP), which is our
development blueprint for the future.

FOREWORD
As I stated, none of this could have been possible without the many local people, community
organisations and businesses who have fed in their views.Your input has helped us to identify areas
for future development opportunities, in particular where new homes should be built and how we
can continue to protect our open spaces and the natural environment.
Together we can continue to ensure that Greenwich remains a great place in which we can all be
proud to live, work, learn and visit.

FOREWORD
 CONTENTS
Introduction...........................................................................................................................................................i

PART ONE
Vision .....................................................................................................................................................................1
The Council’s Strategy for Land Use and Development..........................................................................1
Borough Profile ...................................................................................................................................................4
Policy Context.....................................................................................................................................................7
Strategic Planning Policies ..............................................................................................................................14

PART TWO
1. COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES......................................................................................21
C1 Community Services ...............................................................................................................32
C2 Loss of Community Facilities ................................................................................................32
C3 Major Residential Developments .........................................................................................33
C4 Doctors Surgeries, Dentists etc...........................................................................................33
C5 Nursery Provision....................................................................................................................34

2. JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY .......................................................................................................35

J1 Defined Industrial Areas .........................................................................................................39
J2 Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries....................................................................41
J3 Charlton Business Park ..........................................................................................................41
J4 Town Centres ...........................................................................................................................42
J5 Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations ........................................42
J6 Industrial and Business Developments ...............................................................................43
J7 B1 Uses.......................................................................................................................................44
J8 B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale Uses....................................................44
J9 Cultural and Creative Industries..........................................................................................45
J10 ‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries ....................................................................................................46
J11 Home Working .........................................................................................................................46
J12 Work/Live Units .......................................................................................................................46
J13 Quality Jobs ...............................................................................................................................47
J14 Training and Business Support..............................................................................................48
J15 Community Benefits................................................................................................................48
J16 Accessibility ...............................................................................................................................49

3. HOUSING .........................................................................................................................................................51
H1 New Housing ............................................................................................................................54
H2 Preventing the Loss of Housing............................................................................................55
H3 Effective Use of Dwellings......................................................................................................55

CONTENTS
 H4 Kidbrooke Development Area..............................................................................................56
H5/H6 Conversions...............................................................................................................................57
H7 Housing Design.........................................................................................................................58
H8/H9 Density........................................................................................................................................59
H10 Backland and Infill Development..........................................................................................60
H11 Amenity Space and Gardens .................................................................................................61
H12 Children’s Play Areas ...............................................................................................................61
H13 Housing Improvement ............................................................................................................62
H14 Affordable Housing..................................................................................................................62
H15 Housing Mix...............................................................................................................................64
H16 Non Self-Contained Shared or Bedsitter Accommodation ..........................................65
H17 Lifetime Homes ........................................................................................................................65
H18 Sheltered Housing....................................................................................................................67
H19/H20 Wheelchair Standard Housing........................................................................................67-68
H21 Supported Housing..................................................................................................................68
H22 Travellers and Romany People..............................................................................................69

4. OPEN SPACES ..................................................................................................................................................71

O1-O4 Metropolitan Open Land .................................................................................................73-75
O5 Green Chain..............................................................................................................................76
O6 Green Belt..................................................................................................................................76
O7 Community Open Space........................................................................................................77
O8 Other Open Spaces.................................................................................................................77
O9 Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ..................................................................................77
O10 Community Benefits................................................................................................................79
O11 Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields .........................................................................................80
O12 Park Facilities.............................................................................................................................81
O13 Floodlighting ..............................................................................................................................81
O14 Allotments..................................................................................................................................82
O15-O17 Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways........................................................................82-83
O18/O19 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance........................................................................83
O20 Green Corridors......................................................................................................................84
O21 River Corridors ........................................................................................................................84
O22 Species Protection ...................................................................................................................84
O23 Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites ..............................................................................85
O24/O25 Management of Wildlife Sites................................................................................................85

5. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION............................................................................................................93
E1-E4 Pollution................................................................................................................................94-95
E5 Light Pollution ...........................................................................................................................95
E6/E7 Air Pollution ..............................................................................................................................96
E8 Energy Efficiency.......................................................................................................................97
E9 Renewable Energy....................................................................................................................98

CONTENTS
 E10 Hazardous Materials................................................................................................................99
E11 Contaminated Land .................................................................................................................99
E12 Site Servicing...........................................................................................................................100
E13 Electromagnetic Fields..........................................................................................................100
E14 Waste Reduction, Reuse, Recovery and Disposal .........................................................102
E15 Minimise Waste at Source ...................................................................................................102
E16 Waste Inert Material.............................................................................................................103
E17 Drainage and Flood Protection..........................................................................................103
E18 Development in Fluvial Flood Risk Areas ........................................................................104
E19 Safeguarding Existing Tidal and Fluvial Defences............................................................104

6. DESIGN & CONSERVATION ....................................................................................................................107

D1/D2 Urban Design..................................................................................................................109-110
D3 Ecological Factors ..................................................................................................................111
D4 Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment ..............................................111
D5 Parking and Access Arrangements.....................................................................................112
D6 Access for People with Disabilities ...................................................................................112
D7 Safety and Security in the Environment ...........................................................................113
D8 Trees..........................................................................................................................................113
D9/D10 Residential Extensions ..........................................................................................................114
D11 Telecommunications Development ...................................................................................114
D12 Satellite Antennae ..................................................................................................................115
D13 Shopfronts and Signs.............................................................................................................116
D14 Street Furniture......................................................................................................................116
D15 Advertisements ......................................................................................................................117
D16/D17 Conservation Areas......................................................................................................117, 118
D18 Preservation of Listed Building...........................................................................................118
D19 External or Internal Alterations or Additions to Listed Buildings.............................118
D20 Setting and Proportions of a Listed Building ..................................................................118
D21 Changes of Use of Listed Buildings...................................................................................120
D22 Buildings at Risk .....................................................................................................................120
D23 Local List of Buildings of Architectural or Historic Interest ......................................120
D24 Historic Landscapes ..............................................................................................................120
D25/D26 Strategic Views........................................................................................................................121
D27 Local Views ..............................................................................................................................123
D28 High Buildings .........................................................................................................................124
D29 Areas of Special Character..................................................................................................125
D30/D31 Archaeology ............................................................................................................................125
D32 Environmental Improvements.............................................................................................127
D33 Temporary Use of Vacant Land Awaiting Development ..............................................127

7. MOVEMENT ...................................................................................................................................................129
M1 Development and Transport - General Principles.........................................................131

CONTENTS
 M2 Transport Assessment ..........................................................................................................131
M3 Travel Plans ..............................................................................................................................132
M4 Extension of the Public Transport Network ..........................................................132-133
M5 Major New Transport Developments...............................................................................133
M6 Accessible Public Transport.................................................................................................133
M7 Use of the River.....................................................................................................................133
M8 Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes................................................................................134
M9 Bus Priority..............................................................................................................................135
M10 Waterfront Transit .................................................................................................................135
M11 Transport Interchanges.........................................................................................................136
M12 Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities .........................................136
M13 Accessibility .............................................................................................................................137
M14 Heliports and Airports .........................................................................................................137
M15 Safeguarded Schemes............................................................................................................138
M16 General Criteria for Road Schemes .................................................................................139
M17 Road Hierarchy ......................................................................................................................139
M18 Environmental Areas .............................................................................................................140
M19 New Housing Developments - Traffic Calming Measures ...........................................140
M20 Specific Improvements..........................................................................................................141
M21 Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres..............141
M22 Relocation of High Traffic Generators..............................................................................141
M23-M27 Car Parking Standards..................................................................................................142-143
M28 Community Benefits..............................................................................................................144
M29 Services Areas.........................................................................................................................144
M30 Off-Street Public Parking .....................................................................................................145
M31 Parking Strategies...................................................................................................................145
M32 Cycling ......................................................................................................................................146
M33 Pedestrians...............................................................................................................................148
M34 People with Disabilities - Access in Public Areas...........................................................148
M35 Restriction on Road Freight................................................................................................149
M36 Rail Freight...............................................................................................................................150
M37 Water Borne Freight ............................................................................................................150
M38 Areas of High Freight Accessibility....................................................................................150
M39 Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment ..............................................................150
M40-42 Coaches....................................................................................................................................151

8. TOWN CENTRES.........................................................................................................................................155
Woolwich Town Centre
TC1 Royal Arsenal ..........................................................................................................................158
TC2 Primary Shopping Centre ....................................................................................................159
TC3 Other Key Uses .....................................................................................................................159
TC4 ‘Island Site’ ...............................................................................................................................159

CONTENTS
 TC5 Pedestrian and Cycle Access...............................................................................................160
TC6 Public Transport Links...........................................................................................................160
Greenwich Town Centre
TC7 World Heritage Site..............................................................................................................160
TC8 Historic Town Centre...........................................................................................................161
TC9 The Multi-functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre ...............................................161
TC10 Shopping and ‘Food & Drink’ Uses ...................................................................................162
TC11 Market Development............................................................................................................162
TC12 Traffic Management and Transport Links .........................................................................163
Eltham Town Centre
TC13 Focus for South Greenwich................................................................................................163
TC14 Shopping, Leisure and Tourism ...........................................................................................163
TC15 Traffic Management, Streetscape and Environmental Quality.....................................164
General Policies
TC16 Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach..................................................164
TC17 Protected Core and Fringe Shopping Frontages ...........................................................166
TC18 Non-retail (A1) Uses in Core and Fringe Frontages....................................................166
TC19 Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises..167
TC20 Arts, Cultural and Entertainment Facilities .....................................................................167
TC21 Use of Premises Above Shops............................................................................................168
TC22 Town Centre Living...............................................................................................................168
TC23 Environmental Protection....................................................................................................169
TC24 Civic Spaces.............................................................................................................................169
TC25-TC26 Site Access, Servicing and Parking .....................................................................................170
TC27 Markets and Car Boot Sales ...............................................................................................170
TC28 Hot Food Takeaway Outlets including Drive Through Restaurants..........................171
TC29 Retail Facilities in Petrol Stations.......................................................................................172

9. TOURISM ....................................................................................................................................................177
T1 Location and Criteria ...................................................................................................178-179
T2 Small Hotels, Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses.......................179
T3 Diversification .........................................................................................................................180
T4 Camping and Caravanning ...................................................................................................180

10. WATERFRONT ..............................................................................................................................................183

W1 Development Principles .......................................................................................................188
W2 Thameside Policy Area .........................................................................................................188
W3 Mixed Use Areas ....................................................................................................................189
W4 Thamesmead ...........................................................................................................................190
W5 Safeguarded Wharves............................................................................................................190
W6 Floating Vessels........................................................................................................................191
W7 Support Facilities for Water-based Uses..........................................................................191

CONTENTS
11. IMPLEMENTATION ......................................................................................................................................193
IM1 Monitoring and Review ........................................................................................................194
IM2 Resources ................................................................................................................................195
IM3 Partnership ..............................................................................................................................195
IM4 Consultation and Community Liaison..............................................................................196
IM5 Enforcement............................................................................................................................197

SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES

Community Needs and Services ...............................................................................................................204
Jobs............................................................................................................................................................205-207
Housing.............................................................................................................................................................208
Open Space.............................................................................................................................................209-211
Movement................................................................................................................................................212-213
Mixed Uses..............................................................................................................................................214-221

APPENDICES
1. Legislative Background..........................................................................................................223
2. Glossary and Abbreviations.................................................................................................225

CONTENTS
MAPS
1. Greenwich in the South East..................................................................................................iv
2. Greenwich in the London Context .......................................................................................v
3. Ward Boundaries........................................................................................................................v
4. Key Sub-regional Diagram .......................................................................................................vi
5. Public Open Space Deficiency Areas ..................................................................................78
6. Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites..............................................................................86
7. Flooding & Attenuation Areas.............................................................................................105
8. Conservation Areas...............................................................................................................119
9. Local Views ..............................................................................................................................122
10. Areas of Archeological Potential........................................................................................126
11. Cycle Network.......................................................................................................................147
12. Waterfront Area.....................................................................................................................184

TABLES
C1 Groups Most Disadvantaged by the Built Environment...........................................22-25
C2 Key Policies for Disadvantaged Groups .......................................................................27-28
O1 Types of Publicly Accessible Open Space...........................................................................79
O2 Sites of Nature Conservation Importance..................................................................88-92
M1 Cycle Parking Standards.......................................................................................................152
M2 Retail Car Parking Standards ..............................................................................................153
TC1 Town Centre Hierarchy .......................................................................................................156
TC2 District & Local Centre Shopping Frontages .........................................................173-174
TC3 Premises in Neighbourhood Parades.......................................................................175-176
IM1 Targets & Indicators for UDP Monitoring ..............................................................198-201

CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PLANNING IN THE
LONDON BOROUGH OF GREENWICH
Change occurs all the time, and these changes are shaped by the way we live and shape subsequent
needs, decisions and activities.This in turn affects how we in Greenwich Borough, use land. Our need
for buildings such as factories, housing and shops, and for services such as health and leisure facilities,
are influenced by changing technology, people moving in to and out of the borough and by changing
lifestyles. As a community we have to decide how best the land can be used to meet a wide range
of wants and needs.
Planning aims to manage land-use change by being aware of what is happening of influence to the
Borough, and guiding development in the interests of the community. This is done through both
positive and control planning.
• Positive planning helps to work out what type of environment we want to live in, looks at how
individual uses of land affects people and places on a wider scale and helps protect our built and
natural heritage.
• Control Planning works through the granting of planning permission.This is used to permit good
developments or new uses of land and buildings and prevent ones that may be harmful to the
public interest.
The system of planning in Britain is designed so that, at the Borough level, positive planning and
planning control work with each other through the Greenwich Unitary Development Plan.This sets
out the vision for use of land in the Borough, and also provides the main guidance for making
decisions on individual planning proposals.

The Purpose of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP)

Local Councils have a duty to prepare a Development Plan by law. The Greenwich Unitary
Development Plan does this for the Borough of Greenwich and is intended to cover the period
2001 - 2011 (or 2016 for Part 1 of the Plan). It is a legal document with the following purposes:
- To provide a framework of acceptable uses within the Borough, defining the areas where
development is not desired or where it needs to be carefully directed and;
- To provide a detailed basis for the control of development.

Understanding the Plan

The Greenwich UDP is made up of a Written Statement and a Proposals Map.

Written Statement
As required by legislation and in accordance with (Central Government) Planning Policy Guidance
Note 12: Development Plans, Greenwich UDP is in two parts:
• Part 1 outlines the Vision for Greenwich, from the Greenwich Strategy (2003).

INTRODUCTION i
 It contains a strategy for land use and development based on three key themes on which the UDP
is based: Equality and Social Inclusion, Sustainable Development and Regeneration.
It contains a profile of the Borough, alongside details of the achievements of the previous UDP and
future opportunities in this UDP.
Key to part I are the strategic land use policies for the Borough, upon which the detailed policies in
Part II are based.
Part II is developed from Part I and is broken down into sections such as Open Spaces, Town
Centres and Movement. Each of the sections contain a number of policies, each with a policy
number and indicated by a coloured background.
Each policy is followed by a reason that outlines the key factors involved in its determination.
Part II also contains a schedule of proposals for individual sites in the Borough, which are listed under
such topic headings as Jobs and Mixed Uses.

Proposals Map
The Main Proposals Map covers the whole Borough, whilst Inset Maps A-C cover the town centres
of Eltham, Greenwich and Woolwich.
The Map shows individual sites of proposed developments and areas within the Borough which have
been designated for particular uses, or for conservation.

Using the Plan

The plan can be read as a document on planning in Greenwich, or used for reference purposes on
particular topics or development proposals.
If you are interested in a particular issue, such as cycling you can either use the Contents Page at
the front of the plan, or look up the most relevant topic chapter, which in this case would be
Movement.
If you are interested in a particular site or building or want an indication of how the Council would
respond to a site proposal, the Proposals Map will indicate if there are any designations or scheduled
proposals for the site. Designations can be identified using the map’s key and site schedules can be
identified by a letter and number with corresponding details contained in Part II of the Written
Statement. A policy relating to a designation can be found in the Plan by looking it up in the
Contents Page.
It is important to remember that many policies in Part II will apply to all types of development and
need to be taken into consideration.

Reviewing the Plan

The review of the 1994 Adopted UDP was carried out over a number of years. The Council
published the First Deposit Draft UDP (February 2002) and the Second Deposit Draft UDP (April
2004) for public consultation. A Public Inquiry was held between January and April 2005, where an
independent Inspector examined unresolved objections.The Inspector’s Report on Objections was
published by the Council in November 2005. In response to the Inspector’s Report, the Council
published Modifications (January 2006) and a Further Modification (April 2006) for public
consultation. The Council adopted the Replacement Unitary Development Plan on 20 July 2006,

ii INTRODUCTION
when it replaced the 1994 Unitary Development Plan.The Replacement UDP (2006) together with
the London Plan (2004), forms the Development Plan for the Borough.
Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004, UDPs usually retain ‘development plan
status’ for a period of three years. During this period, the Council will bring forward Local
Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local Development
Scheme (LDS - a project plan outlining the content and production of planning policy documents).
The LDS is available on the Council website at www.greenwich.gov.uk).The UDP is also available on
the Council website, in all local libraries in the Borough and from the Development Planning
Reception, First Floor, Peggy Middleton House, 50 Woolwich New Road, London SE18 6HQ or by
telephoning 020 8921 5190.

INTRODUCTION iii
Map 1: Greenwich in the South East

Leicestershire

Cambridgeshire
Northants Suffolk
Warwickshire

Beds

Essex
Hertfordshire
Oxfordshire
Bucks
London
Greater London

Berkshire

Kent
Surrey

Hampshire
W. Sussex E. Sussex
FRANCE

Isle of Wight
© Crown copyright

English Channel

Greenwich

iv INTRODUCTION
 Map 2: Greenwich in London Context

Enfield

Barnet Redbridge
Haringey Waltham Havering
Forest
Harrow
Hackney Barking
Camden Islington
Brent Newham
Tower
Hamlets
© Crown copyright

Hillingdon Westminster City

Kensington
Ealing & Chelsea
Hammersmith Southwark Greenwich
& Fulham Bexley

Lambeth

Hounslow Lewisham
Wandsworth
Ricmond
upon Thames

Merton
Kingston Bromley
upon
Thames
Croydon
Sutton

Map 3: Ward Boundaries

Thamesmead
Moorings

Peninsula
Woolwich
Riverside

Abbey
Plumstead Wood
Charlton Glyndon
Blackheath Woolwich
Greenwich Westcombe Common
West
© Crown copyright

Kidbrooke
with
Shooters Hill
Hornfair

Eltham
Eltham
West
North

Middle Park
and Sutcliffe
Eltham
South

Coldharbour
and New Eltham

INTRODUCTION v
vi
HACKNEY
Stratford BARKING

M 25
Barking HAVERING

Jubilee Line
TOWER NEWHAM
HAMLETS
A13
Rail Lines
3rd Blackwall Thames Gateway
crossing Bridge
Greenwich Waterfront Thamesmead
Transit
Canary Wharf London City Airport
Map 4: Key Sub-regional Diagram

Proposed Thames
Crossing Greenwich
Peninsula
Woolwich
A206
Thames Gateway

A1
02
GREENWICH

5
Greenwich

A20

INTRODUCTION
Metropolitan BEXLEY
Green Belt

Lewisham Bexleyheath
A2
Metropolitan
Open Land Eltham

LEWISHAM
Strategic Centre DARTFORD
A 20

Proposed Crossrail
25
M

Proposed DLR
Woolwich Extension

Bromley

BROMLEY

© Crown copyright
PART
ONE
 1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 The Greenwich Unitary Development Plan (UDP) is the revised statutory development plan for
the whole of the Borough of Greenwich setting out policies for the period to 2011 and in some
instances to 2016.

2. VISION
2.1 The Greenwich Strategy (2003) sets out the Council’s vision for Greenwich in 2010.These are the
things most important to Greenwich and its communities and contribute to Greenwich being a
place where people live, work, visit and learn now and in the future.
a. We will reduce discrimination and improve opportunity.
b. Greenwich will make a major contribution to London’s economy.
c. Our residents will have sufficient skills to get jobs.
d. We will have improved educational achievement.
e. Local people will be able to get good quality housing.
f. We will live in a clean and well cared for environment.
g. We will make best use of natural resources in Greenwich.
h. Effective and co-ordinated public transport will serve all our communities.
i. Greenwich will be a world tourist destination.
j. Crime will be reduced and there will be a strong sense of community.
k. We will support vulnerable and disadvantaged people and encourage independent living
l. There will be high quality and accessible health and social care services for all our residents.
m. We will play a vital part in the diverse cultural life of London with visual, digital and performing
arts, sports and recreation.
2.2 The role of the UDP is to set out clearly the land use implications of this vision for Greenwich.
Government guidance is that UDPs should not contain policies for matters other than land use and
should not duplicate provisions in other legislation.

3. THE COUNCIL’S STRATEGY FOR

LAND USE AND DEVELOPMENT
3.1 The Council’s strategy for development and the use of land develops that vision around three main
themes that form the basis of the plan. It also reflects Government Guidance and the other
strategies of the Council.These are:
a. Equality and social inclusion;
b. Sustainable development; and
c. Regeneration
3.2 These themes run throughout the plan and are reflected in its policies and proposals. Although
identified as three themes they are not independent but are closely integrated with each other.

PART ONE 1
 E Q UA L I T Y A N D S O C I A L I N C L U S I O N
3.3 Developing an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major part of Government policy.
Equality and social inclusion can be promoted by providing and accessing opportunities for all
residents but especially those experiencing social and economic disadvantage or discrimination.
Through the Greenwich Equality Policy, the Council is committed to “promoting equality of
opportunity, good community relations, and to tackling all forms of discrimination in Greenwich
through the Council as service provider and community leader”. It also explicitly states that no
individuals or groups in the Borough should be disadvantaged by reason of ethnicity, race, colour and
national origin, gender, disability, sexual orientation, age, or religious belief. Through implementation
of the Policy, the Council will improve its awareness and understanding of the needs of different
groups in the borough through effective community profiling, consultation, liaison and involvement.
3.4 To help residents from all communities to grasp opportunities it will be necessary to make provision
for the following:-
• Affordable housing in mixed-use residential areas
• Safe and sustainable travel
• The creation of an accessible environment including new jobs and training for job seekers
• Making shops, health, community, education services and recreation accessible to all. Developing
an inclusive society and mixed communities is a major policy theme of the government.

S U S TA I N A B L E D E V E L O P M E N T
3.5 Sustainable development is not just concerned with the environment but also needs to encompass
social and economic considerations. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development
(2005) states that sustainable development is the core principle underpinning planning. It is generally
acknowledged that the planning system has a vital role to play in ensuring that land use and other
resources are used more sustainably. A more sustainable environment is promoted throughout the
plan, by including policies to encourage:
• High quality urban design;
• Mixed-use development in town centres;
• A sustainable transport strategy which integrates land use and transport and promotes greater
use of public transport, walking and cycling which is accessible to all;
• Preservation of the best of the Borough’s heritage;
• Conservation of the Borough’s open spaces and natural environment; and
• Development of buildings that are environmentally efficient to build and run.
3.6 Another aspect of sustainable development is ensuring that as much new development as possible
takes place on ‘brownfield’ land.The Government’s current target is to achieve at least 60% of new
build on recycled land. Historically development has largely been concentrated on ‘brownfield’ sites
in the Borough, and has significantly exceeded that target. However, the ability to concentrate
development on recycled land does often come with a cost because of the need in many instances
to deal with contamination, cover significant restoration costs, additional building costs and off-site
works.
3.7 Sustainable development also involves recognising the relationship between the physical
environment in its contribution to peoples’ well-being.The UDP will take account of health impacts

2 PART ONE
 proposals as a mechanism for ensuring that major developments promote public health within the
Borough.

R E G E N E R AT I O N
3.8 Regeneration needs to be sustainable and incorporate issues of equality that contribute towards a
more cohesive and inclusive society. Thus the needs of residents living in, or experiencing, poverty
and facing unemployment as well as those of other disadvantaged groups need to be considered
alongside those of business and economic efficiency. Regeneration also needs to take account of
existing inequalities in health, community and education provision, by targeting initiatives and renewal
at areas of greatest need. Regeneration should also take account of the impact of any growth in jobs
and/or housing on demand for health, community and education services locally. Regeneration and
town planning are most obviously connected when considering physical change, although the
multiple problems encompassed by the term regeneration requires a partnership approach with all
relevant stakeholders. Regeneration in the Borough needs to be considered in the context of the
Government’s desire to regenerate the Thames Gateway area to the east and south east of London.
3.9 The Council through its land use policies seeks to continue to revitalise older rundown parts of the
Borough especially those on the waterfront and in South Greenwich. It will also draw on the
opportunities open to Greenwich as part of a world centre of international trade, business and
tourism, to retain and enhance economic activity and promote sustainable economic and
employment growth. Care will be taken to relate such regeneration to existing health, community
and education provision, the needs of the local community and to improvements in the transport
infrastructure, especially the public transport network.Tourism will be promoted as a useful element
in the regeneration of the Borough’s economy through visitor management and/or environmental
management to promote and safeguard communities and negate any adverse effect upon local
communities.
3.10 The above sets out how the UDP aims to integrate the three themes of equality and social inclusion,
sustainability and regeneration into the land use planning process.The next paragraph sets out how
the strategy will be implemented while section 6 develops these themes in more detail by setting
out the strategic policies.

I M P L E M E N T I N G T H E S T R AT E G Y
3.11 The strategy will be implemented in a number of ways, but particularly through the following
mechanisms:
a. The full use of the Council’s statutory powers to guide and control development;
b. The preparation of strategies, planning briefs, guidance and advice notes and area plans to
illustrate and promote development opportunities that meet socially inclusive health, community
and environmental needs;
c. In partnership with the private sector to obtain the optimum benefit possible for the Borough,
for example, through the use of legal agreements;
d. In joining with other London Boroughs, other public bodies and agencies in responding to issues
and pursuing initiatives of a Londonwide nature;
e. The full use of financial resources, including Central Government, European and other grants,
mechanisms such as the Lottery and Single Regeneration Budget [SRB] and negotiated
contributions through Planning Obligations;

PART ONE 3
 f. Through other strategies of the council and the necessary partnerships which are formed to aid
their implementation;
g. By entering into dialogue with the community and voluntary sectors to ensure that local
knowledge and aspirations are reflected in planning activities and by encouraging community
organisations, self-help groups and cooperatives to participate in the implementation of the
strategy.The Greenwich Strategy is an important voice to feed community needs and aspirations
into the UDP.

4. BOROUGH PROFILE
4.1 The Borough has an area of 5,044 hectares and is the twelfth largest Borough in London. The
Borough population is 228,100 (Office for National Statistics, 2005 mid year estimate).

THE ENVIRONMENT
4.2 The Borough of Greenwich has inherited an environment which in many areas is of high quality and
is a considerable asset. It is important that such areas are conserved and enhanced. Recognition of
Maritime Greenwich through the inscription of the town centre and neighbouring environs as a
World Heritage Site of international importance indicates the quality of heritage and architecture.
Conversely there are areas in the Borough where the environment is of low quality and in need of
improvement. The UDP to be successful must not only distinguish these different areas and have
appropriate policies but must also seek to ensure that environmental considerations are central to
all development/land use decisions.
4.3 The physical structure of the Borough is marked by a 13 kilometre frontage to the River Thames,
the former marshy river flood plain, the steep slope of the river cliff or escarpment which rises to
a plateau stretching from Blackheath to Plumstead and Bostall Heath. This plateau in turn rises to
Shooters Hill, the highest point in the Borough (and London - 129 metres).To the south and west
the land slopes away to the Ravensbourne and its tributaries before rising again to the southern
boundary.The Ravensbourne marks the Borough’s western edge and joins The Thames at Deptford
Creek. On this basic structure an ecological heritage has developed reflected in different landscapes.
Perhaps the most important feature is Oxleas Wood, an ancient woodland of great ecological merit
and significance. But the Borough is also rich in other woods and commons and almost a quarter
of its area is in some type of open space use.
4.4 The interaction between people and the environment has produced a mosaic of built environments,
land uses and economic activities that are of significant cultural and heritage value. It is this inter
relationship between the physical fabric and local communities that provides the unique character
of the place. These relationships must be built upon and improved as they constitute the basic
resource on which the Borough must work and the basis for future planning activity.
4.5 The north of the Borough, near the river, has a contrasting mix of the older developed areas of the
Borough where communities have grown in association with the river and riverside industries and
contemporary waterfront developments. The urban fabric is generally tight knit with streets of
terraced housing interwoven with other commercial uses. Open spaces, except for Greenwich Park,
have been until recently, limited. Interspersed with the older areas are a number of relatively recent
developments of housing and industrial estates. The main town centres are Woolwich and
Greenwich.To the east is the community of Thamesmead, partly in Greenwich and partly in Bexley,
which was started in the late 60’s and is still being developed. It is broadly residential but has its own
town centre, open spaces and employment locations and is designed around the lakes and canals

4 PART ONE
 needed to drain the area. Modern developments are particularly focused on the Peninsula with its
tube station, Millennium village, Millennium Dome and new open spaces.
4.6 On steep cliffs of the ‘river cliff ’ there are interesting residential environments with streets of close
packed terraced houses with fine views over the river. In places open spaces have remained, for
example, Maryon Wilson Park and again the area has seen a number of comparatively recent
residential developments. Beyond the ‘cliff edge’ the Borough starts to take on a more suburban style
with more detached and semi detached housing in communities that developed in relation to the
provision of the railways in the early part of the century.This area also has many fine open spaces
that help to provide a much looser, lower density character for the area.The main town centre for
this part of the Borough is Eltham.
4.7 Within the broad pattern described above there are many smaller areas with their own particular
mix of diversity and identity. There are areas of great architectural merit and importance, for
example, the Old Royal Naval College, the Royal Arsenal and Charlton House; and areas of a distinct
style, such as the Progress Estate. However, there are also areas where the relationship between
environment and land use should be improved, for example, residential areas where heavy goods
traffic has an adverse impact.

P O P U L AT I O N S T R U C T U R E A N D T R E N D S
4.8 Population projections for the Borough show the total number of residents increasing from 217,805
in 2001 to 231,956 in 2006, 241,047 in 2011 and 246,616 in 2016. [Greater London Authority 2003
population projections Scenario 8.1].This is in contrast to a decline in population in the 1960’s and
1970’s, and reflects amongst other things the recent and future house building in the Borough.
4.9 The proportion of children under five requiring primary childcare and educational facilities is
projected to remain stable, at 7% of the population in 2001, 2011 and 2021 but with a numerical
increase of nearly 1700 children (2001-2021).
4.10 The proportion of older people (over 60) in the Borough will decrease from 17% in 2001 to 15%
of the total population both in 2006 and 2011, but then increase to 17% in 2021. The number of
people over 85 years of age will fall from 10% of the over 60 population in 2001 and 2011, to 8%
in 2021.
4.11 The other marked change is that by 2021 the proportion of 20-40 year olds will have declined from
34% to 30% whilst the proportion of 40-60 year olds will have increased from 23 % to 27%.
4.12 The wards that will see the greatest increase in population are West Greenwich, Peninsula and
Thamesmead Moorings, reflecting permitted and proposed developments in the Waterfont area
including Greenwich Peninsula.
4.13 Greenwich’s population comprises a rich mix of ethnicity, culture and language. The 2001 Census
recorded that 23% of the population was from a minority ethnic group (defined as all groups other
than ‘white’), with Black or Black British and African being the largest groups.The majority of ethnic
minority communities are in the north of the Borough.
4.14 The 2001 Census recorded 92,800 households in the Borough, an increase of 8,100 from 1991,
expected to grow to over 103,000 by 2011. Pensioner-only households comprise 14% of the total
households in the Borough, with almost all of these one-person pensioner households. This is a
decrease from 24% in 1991. Single person households account for 21,000 of the total, 20,400 are
households with a married couple (including those with dependent and non-dependent children),
13,100 are lone-parent households and 4,700 households contain co-habiting couples (2001
Census).

PART ONE 5
4.15 Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived
Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation, ODPM 2004).Ten out
of the Borough’s seventeen wards, primarily in the north of the Borough, contain areas within the
most deprived 10% in England. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of economic
and social problems. Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation, including a lack
of green space, leading to the need to improve social, economic and environmental conditions and
to facilitate neighbourhood renewal.

L O C AT I O N
4.16 The London Borough of Greenwich has many locational advantages being close to Central London
and having an extensive river frontage. It is part of the East London regeneration area and close to
Docklands and the city airport, as well as being on the route between Central London and the
Channel Tunnel and Channel Ports.The Borough has a key location on the navigations and terminals
that comprise the Port of London. City airport and the channel tunnel are specifically opening up
new international/pan European markets. This position should be advantageous for attracting new
investment. This will, of course, depend to a large extent on continuing investment in transport
infrastructure such as an extension of the Docklands Light Railway into the heart of Woolwich town
centre and the Waterfront Transit scheme.

PA S T AC H I E V E M E N T S
4.17 The strategies formed within the previous Plan period have come to fruition, resulting in:
• The population growing by nearly 8,000 between 1991 and 2001;
• Households growing by around 8,100 between 1991 and 2001;
• 7,100 more dwellings between 1991 and 2001;
• The refocusing of development opportunities into east and south east London;
• The re-emergence of the river itself and riverside land as a key focus for a wide range of new
uses, and their successful melding with existing riverside uses;
• New developments along the Waterfront;
• Significant developments at Deptford Creek and the Peninsula;
• The inscription of Maritime Greenwich as a World Heritage Site;
• The designation of two new conservation areas;
• New uses for the Old Royal Naval College;
• The Millennium Dome;
• The extension of the Docklands Light Railway to Greenwich and the Jubilee Line to North
Greenwich;
• A new riverside park in Woolwich Town Centre;
• The expansion of Thamesmead Town Centre;
• New residential development in Thamesmead; and
• The amount of derelict land reduced by 100 hectares.

6 PART ONE
 F U T U R E O P P O RT U N I T I E S
4.18 The Plan period for the current plan is likely to see the following come to fruition:
• Population growing by around 29,000 between 2001 and 2016;
• Household numbers growing to over 103,000 by 2011;
• Construction of approximately 10,000 new homes by 2010;
• Significant development in West Greenwich / Deptford Creekside providing new homes,
business space, community and educational facilities, including redevelopment of the New
Haddo estate;
• Substantial progress in the build-out of the Meridian Delta Limited Masterplan for Greenwich
Peninsula, including transformation of the Dome into an international class sports arena, leisure
facility and function centre, plus the completion of Greenwich Millennium Village;
• Continued re-use and development of the former Royal Arsenal site in Woolwich and its listed
buildings for a mix of uses, recognising its major tourism potential and including new linkages to
enhance the commercial redevelopment of Woolwich;
• Development at Warren Lane and MacBean Street to enhance the retail core of Woolwich,
provide new leisure facilities, and open up a significant stretch of the Thames to the public with
a riverside walk;
• Continued development of Thamesmead, including Tripcock Point where approximately 2,000
new dwellings will be provided;
• The regeneration of South Greenwich, including a mixed-use residential-led development at
Kidbrooke providing 4,400 dwellings including 1,900 replacement affordable units and open
spaces, shopping and transport facilities.This will transform housing and the local infrastructure
and tackle crime and exclusion and promote opportunity;
• The provision of a number of new Thames Crossings. These will include a Docklands Light
Railway extension from London City Airport, to Woolwich Arsenal, the Thames Gateway Bridge
(across Gallion’s Reach), the Blackwall-Silvertown Crossing and part of the Crossrail train
network from north Kent beyond London; and
• The provision of Waterfront Transit.

5. POLICY CONTEXT
EUROPEAN
5.1 The South East of England, including the Borough of Greenwich, does not exist on a social or
economic island. Increasingly the country is influenced by decisions made on a European basis by
the EU, multinational businesses and European organisations. In particular 1992 heralded the start
of the single European Market with its consequent impact on firms, trading patterns and investment.
The EU will be involved in planning and environmental issues through the European Spatial
Development Perspective, which will provide a framework reference document for Regional
Planning Guidance on European issues.The introduction of the European Spatial Planning Policy will
contribute to the objectives of sustainable development and employment. The rising European
influence and competitiveness requires the Borough (as well as the rest of Britain) to increase its
attractiveness to business by improving environmental quality, business skills and labour skills to
enable it to compete more effectively across Europe.

PART ONE 7
 N AT I O N A L
5.2 The last ten years there has been an increasing awareness of environmental issues as part of the
rising “green consciousness”, intense development pressures in the South East and mounting
concern about transport. There has been particular concern regarding levels of public transport
investment and a growing recognition that partnership was a necessary mechanism to resolve many
of the planning issues facing society. Many of these issues have now worked through into national
planning guidance as expressed in the Government’s Planning Policy Guidance (PPG) Notes,
Planning Policy Statements (PPS) and Circulars. In particular the principles of sustainability are now
incorporated into planning guidance.
5.3 The 1992 United Nations Earth Summit in Rio sought to minimise our negative impacts on the
environment whilst continuing to improve our quality of life.‘Agenda 21’ was the resulting document
of actions required to work towards sustainable development, and provided a framework by which
countries could develop their strategies. Greenwich Local Agenda 21 focuses the National Strategy
and seeks to integrate environmental concerns prevalent in the Borough with social and economic
issues
5.4 Currently there are 16 PPGs and 9 PPSs on a variety of topics. A number of the PPGs are currently
being revised and replaced by PPSs. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that the
planning system should facilitate and promote sustainable and inclusive patterns of development.
Properly used, the planning system can help to secure economy, efficiency and amenity in the
development and use of land.The planning system should work towards ensuring that development
and growth are sustainable. Development plans are intended to provide a firm basis for rational and
consistent decisions on planning applications and appeals. They provide a means for coordinating
development, including the provision of infrastructure, whilst taking account of the interests of
conservation, and protecting the local environment. They should provide a statement of the
authority’s policies and proposals for the use of land in its area, thus providing residents, amenity
bodies, developers and business interests with a measure of certainty about what types of
developments will and will not be permitted.
5.5 PPG12 ‘Development Plans’ (1999), provides a strategic overview of the role and importance of
development plans within the planning system. It outlines key issues on plan contents and
procedures and stresses the importance that the Government attaches to the need for plans to be
prepared and updated quickly and efficiently.
5.6 PPG12 also indicates that plans need to be clear, succinct and easily understood. Development plans
should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and use of
land. The main function of Part One of a UDP is to state in broad terms the general policies and
proposals of strategic importance for the development and use of land in the area, taking account
of national and regional policies. It should concentrate on providing a strategic framework within
which detailed policies can be framed in Part Two of the UDP.
5.7 Part Two of the UDP sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals
for the development and use of land which will guide its day to day planning decisions. Policies in
UDP’s may include those which relate to the whole or part of the plan area, setting out the criteria
which will be used to judge whether planning applications should be allowed, and those related to
individual sites. PPG12 states that “By identifying sites for development, an authority can demonstrate
in a positive way how the vision and strategy in the plan will be implemented in practical terms.”
5.8 Under the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004, the UDP will retain ‘development plan
status’ for a period of at least three years. During the three-year period, the Council will bring
forward Local Development Documents to replace parts of the UDP in accordance with the Local
Development Scheme

8 PART ONE
 REGIONAL
5.9 The South East region is one of the most densely populated, highly congested, economically active,
development pressured regions within the Country and these regional factors are all exemplified in
the Capital. London remains the focus of the region although competition from the rest of the South
East as a potential location for services and industries is ever increasing particularly as a result of
substantial infrastructure investment, for example, the M25. A key feature of the region is that
economic growth is not spread evenly through the region but has favoured the west over the east.
This east/west imbalance is also reflected in London.The result has been that some areas suffer from
high unemployment and lack regeneration, for example Inner London, whilst other areas experience
“overheating” from too much growth/development, for example along the M4. The region as a
whole is faced by a number of other issues such as the lack of affordable housing, the need for public
transport investment, pressure on urban open spaces and countryside and a need to improve and
enhance the environmental quality of the region.
5.10 The Draft South East Plan was published in March 2006 (Regional Spatial Strategy for the South
East excluding London).The vision set out in guidance is to:
a. Encourage a dynamic and robust economy;
b. Ensure a higher quality of environment and quality of life;
c. Provide opportunity and equity for the Region’s population to reduce social exclusion; and
d. Provide a more sustainable pattern of development with better management of natural assets.
The focus of the Draft South East Plan is on enabling urban renaissance, promoting regeneration
and renewal, concentrating development in urban areas, promoting a prosperous and multi-purpose
countryside, reducing travel demand and promoting wider choices in travel options, thereby
reducing use of and reliance on the private car. It also provides the wider spatial framework for
Thames Gateway, which is a regional and national priority for regeneration (see below).

T H A M E S G AT E WAY
5.11 The Thames Gateway is the name given to the area that extends 43 miles long by 20 miles across
from Lewisham and Tower Hamlets in London to Tilbury in Essex and the Isle of Sheppey in Kent.
Within London Thames Gateway encompasses an area on either side of the River Thames
extending eastward from Deptford and the Royal Docks but also extending up the Lea Valley to
Stratford.The area has been identified by Government as the main area for development growth in
the South East. The Thames Gateway Planning Framework (RPG9a - 1995) is supplementary
guidance to RPG9 and identifies Thames Gateway as a major potential focus for growth and
development. Objectives for the Gateway include:
a. Improving economic performance within Europe
b. Maximise opportunities for new economic activity, created by improved transport connections
to Europe
c. Reinforce and strengthen existing economic and community strengths
d. Encourage sustainable patterns of development, making full use of existing infrastructure, and of
vacant and under used sites
e. Safeguard and enhance environmental assets.
5.12 The Thames Gateway is also one of the national growth areas in the Government’s Sustainable
Communities Plan (2003). Up to £446 million will be made available in the Thames Gateway to

PART ONE 9
 create models of well designed, vibrant urban living, marrying homes with jobs, quality public services
and infrastructure.The Deputy Prime Minister announced in his July 2002 statement, echoed in the
Communities Plan, that there was potential for 200,000 homes to be provided in London and the
growth areas by 2016, in additional to current plans. The Plan also proposes regenerating existing
deprived communities through access to 300,000 new jobs in the Gateway by 2031.

T H E M AYO R A N D T H E A S S E M B LY
5.13 The Greater London Authority Act 1999 created the Greater London Assembly and the Mayor of
London.The Mayor is directly elected and has a number of statutory duties including to engage with
the Assembly and the people of London.The London Assembly is a scrutinising body to provide a
check and a balance on the Mayor, including reviewing the Mayor’s draft strategies. The Mayor is
responsible for strategic planning in London, including producing, and implementing a number of
strategies covering Spatial Development, Transport, Economic Development, Culture, Air Quality,
Noise, Waste Management and Biodiversity. The Government Office for London has the
responsibility, on behalf of the Secretary of State, to ensure that the Mayoral strategies are prepared
having regard to national and regional guidance.The London Boroughs, in preparing their UDPs must
be in general conformity with the Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy (SDS). The Planning and
Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 has given the London Plan ‘development plan’ status.The London
Plan (2004), together with the UDP (2006), forms the Development Plan for the Borough.
5.14 Government Circular 1/2000 clarifies that the Mayor must be consulted on a range of development
proposals.These include those in regionally identified Strategic Views and affecting Strategic Wharves
on the Thames. Under the Town and Country Planning (Mayor of London) Order 2000, the Mayor
may direct the Council to refuse a planning application that conflicts with the Spatial Development
Strategy or is ‘otherwise contrary to good strategic planning in Greater London’. (Government
Office for London)
5.15 The Spatial Development Strategy, called the London Plan, only deals with matters of strategic
importance to London, but covers issues beyond those considered the mainstream of the current
statutory planning system. Circular 1/2000 states that the London Plan should cover a range of
issues including sustainable development, London as a world city, economic regeneration, social
inclusion, the built and natural environment, the treatment of town centres and the river Thames.
Although it has a formal end date of 2020, it interacts with strategies of differing timescales and is
subject to ongoing monitoring and review.
5.16 The London Plan (2004) , reaffirms the Mayor’s vision to develop London as an exemplary
sustainable world city.This will be based on economic growth, social inclusion and improvements in
environmental management and the use of resources. The Plan has six objectives, which are
summarised as follows:-

10 PART ONE
5.17 Objective 1:- To accommodate London’s growth within its boundaries without encroaching on open spaces
• Maximising capacity, densities and growth in line with public transport capacity in order to
achieve an urban renaissance
• Enable London and the Opportunity Areas to accommodate more jobs, new development and
regeneration in the East London Priority Area and strengthen the role of suburban town centres
• Promote co-ordination of area-based regeneration initiatives, con-ordinated services and
improved access in suburban areas, protecting and enhancing designated open spaces
5.18 Objective 2:- To make London a better city for people to live in
• Enhance the design of buildings and public spaces, build more accessible housing and address the
needs of the breadth of London’s population
• Advance the standards of local services including education, health, cleanliness, public safety and
develop London’s cultural assets
5.19 Objective 3:- To make London a more prosperous city with strong and diverse economic growth
• Create a spatial framework to realise the Mayor’s Economic Development Strategy, consolidate
the infrastructural base, attract industries, tourism and create opportunities to stimulate the right
economic growth locations
• Develop a broad economic base, release identified surplus employment land, foster dynamic
growth sectors whilst encouraging research and development
5.20 Objective 4:- To promote social inclusion and tackle deprivation and discrimination
• Tackle unemployment, concentrated deprivation and homelessness by broadening access to
education, advice and training services
• Encourage local participation in the development process, community benefits, prevent
discrimination and provide a spatial framework for education, health and other social and
community services
5.21 Objective 5:- To improve London’s accessibility
• Provide a land-use framework for implementing the Mayor’s transport strategy, provide
transport-related services and infrastructure, reduce the need to travel and by encouraging
development to locate near to public transport
• Improve transport links between London and major transport interchanges, employment
opportunities, promote safe and networked access by modes other than the private car and
encourage the sustainable movement of freight
5.22 Objective 6:- To make London a more attractive, well-designed and green city
• Integrate Spatial Development with the Mayor’s Environmental Strategies, considering issues
such as the consumption of energy and waste, thriving biodiversity, improving air quality and
assessing flood risk
• Promote green industries, the sustainable use of resources, urban design, historic conservation,
recycled land, use of London’s waterways and the protection of open spaces
5.23 East London is the Mayor’s priority area for development, regeneration and infrastructure
improvement. During the London Plan period, there are expected to be 104,000 additional homes
and 249,000 jobs created in this sub-region. The London Plan identifies locations where this new
growth will predominately be provided: Areas of Intensification including Kidbrooke and Woolwich,
and Opportunity Areas including Creekside, Greenwich Peninsula and Thamesmead.The Council will

PART ONE 11
 work with the Mayor and sub-regional partnerships to help develop a coherent Sub-Regional
Development Framework for East London.

RIVER THAMES
5.24 The River Thames is one of London’s most important natural features.The river and its environs are
a vital ecological, leisure and tourist resource while the river is also used for the transport of freight
and passengers. Many stretches of the river have undergone significant change in recent years while
there continues to be strong development pressures along much of its length. The London Plan,
through strategy aimed at London’s waterways (the Blue Ribbon Network), deals specifically with
the River Thames and the Thames Policy Area between Hampton and Crayford Ness. It thus
encompasses the whole of Greenwich’s waterfront and requires high standards of design and
development for all schemes fronting the River Thames and Deptford Creek.The London Plan also
provides the policy context for the safeguarding of a number of named wharves on the River, six of
which are located in the Borough.

O T H E R C R O S S - B O R O U G H S T R AT E G I E S
5.25 There are also a number of other strategies which relate to all or parts of the Borough, including
the Thames Estuary Management Plan and Local Environment Agency Plan (LEAP) Action Plans.

BOROUGH OF GREENWICH
5.26 The social, economic and environmental issues facing the Borough are addressed through a variety
of strategies, plans and initiatives. The Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these
strategies, plans and initiatives.The Council and its partners will contribute to securing its objectives
at many levels, jointly and through individual services. It is a strategic document setting out the vision
for the Borough for 2010 (see Section 2 above) and identifying medium and long term aims for the
borough, pinpointing the challenges and targeting the actions necessary to deliver real
improvements. It provides the context for locally based bids for resources from Central
Government, Europe, the National Lottery, charities and the private sector.The key themes for the
Greenwich Strategy are the areas of well being - social, environmental and economic.The Strategy
was completed and issued by the Greenwich Partnership in late 2003, following public consultation.
The Partnership, which is made up of the Council, other public, private, community and voluntary
sector agencies, will jointly monitor progress annually against the Strategy’s vision and actions.
5.27 The Local Government Act 1999 gives local authorities a duty of Best Value under which they are
required to produce Best Value Performance Plans showing their record in delivering services and
their plans for improving them. Authorities will have to review the performance of all their services,
including planning, over a five-year period. Each service is considered against:
• Challenge, why and how a service is being provided;
• Compare the performance with others;
• Consult local people and businesses about the quality of the service; and
• Use fair and open Competition to procure the service.

12 PART ONE
 To facilitate Best Value a comprehensive sets of targets and indicators have been set out in Chapter
11: Implementation.These will form the basis for monitoring the implementation of the Plan policies
in the Annual Monitoring Report.
5.28 Other strategies that are considered by policies throughout this plan, contain their own detailed
objectives, but will draw upon the land use policies contained here to implement projects requiring
physical development. Strategies adopted or in preparation by the Council include:
• Air Quality Action Plan (2002);
• Annual Corporate and Performance Plans;
• Business and Enterprise Framework 2004-08;
• Children & Young People’s Plan 2006-08;
• Contaminated Land Inspection Strategy (2002);
• Corporate Equality Plan 2003-2006;
• Creating Safer Greenwich: Crime & Disorder Strategy;
• Cultural Strategy for Greenwich: Making Culture Matter (2004);
• Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich 2002-07;
• Education Development Plan 2002-07;
• Energy Strategy (2002);
• Green Space Strategy (2006);
• Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan;
• Greenwich Equality Policy, 2003;
• Greenwich Municipal Waste Management Strategy;
• Health Improvement Plan 2002-05;
• Housing Strategy 2002-07 & Annual Housing Investment Programme;
• Local Agenda 21 (1997);
• Neighbourhood Renewal: A New Way of Doing Business (2002);
• Open Space Strategy;
• Regeneration Strategy Draft 2006-2020;
• Social Inclusion & Justice Strategy 2002-06;
• Sports Strategy: Fit for Sport 2004-2008;
• Transport Strategy (2001) and Draft Local Implementation Plan (2005); and
• Tourism Strategy: Greenwich: A Place to Visit? 2004-10.
5.29 The role of the UDP is to provide guidance and advice on the land use implications of these other
Council strategies, plans and proposals.

PART ONE 13
 6. STRATEGIC PLANNING POLICIES
6.1 In developing its planning strategy for this Unitary Development Plan the Council has adopted the
following policies:

Community Needs, Benefits & Services

SC1 To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents, especially
the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals, communities and neighbourhoods.

SC2 In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek
to ensure, through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning
permissions, that new development provides for the infrastructure, facilities, amenities and other
planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential
planning loss to the local area.

SC3 To provide, consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve, especially in
areas of deficiency, areas of deprivation and areas of new development.

Jobs & the Local Economy

SJ1 To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by
identifying good quality employment sites, and by promoting efficient use of employment land and
improvements to business infrastructure.

SJ2 To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport.

SJ3 To retain, and encourage the expansion of, existing businesses, and to promote the provision of
premises for small and growing firms.

SJ4 To resist the loss of employment land and premises in active employment use or that are well
suited for continued employment use.

SJ5 To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce, and to ensure
that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those
disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market.

Housing
SH1 To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16,100 net additional dwellings
between 1997 and 2016.

SH2 To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs
of households, especially those with special needs, by providing a suitable range of dwellings by
type, size and affordability.

SH3 To retain and improve the existing housing stock.

SH4 To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is
built to a high quality design.

14 PART ONE
SH5 The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek
to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to
those on low and lower incomes.

SH6 The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the
physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities
and sustainable neighbourhoods.

Open Spaces
SO1 To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by:
i. Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities;
ii. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces;
iii. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and;
iv. Recognising the value of landscape, biodiversity and open space features throughout the
urban environment.

SO2 To safeguard, improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space
(Green Belt, Metropolitan Open Land, Community Open Space, small open spaces) that fulfil a
specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities.

SO3 To ensure that all communities, residents and workers have adequate access to open space and
the riverside.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will
be given emphasis, especially in areas of public open space deficiency.

SO4 Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their
character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. The only uses
considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are:
i. Public and private open space, sportsgrounds and playing fields.
ii. Agriculture, woodlands and orchards.
iii. Open water features.
iv. Golf courses.
v. Allotments.
vi. Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions.
vii. Cemeteries and associated crematoria.
viii. Nature conservation.

PART ONE 15
 Environmental Protection
SE1 To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development.

SE2 To protect and improve the environment in termsof air and water quality, and reduce the impact
of pollution, noise, smell and toxic materials, especially from transport and industrial processes.

SE3 To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding.

SE4 To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste.

Design & Conservation

SD1 The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to
existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility,
safety and the built and natural environment.

SD2 To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character; for the Borough, and London
as a whole, including historic landscapes, fine views, open land, wildlife habitats, woodland, trees,
wetlands and wildflower meadows.

SD3 To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas, and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or
historic interest and their settings.

SD4 To improve areas of poor quality environment.

SD5 To promote the use of previously developed land, and to ensure new developments make
efficient and appropriate use of land.

Movement
SM1 To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable
transport network, at no or minimal cost to the environment.

SM2 To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people, particularly for those
presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. Generally, the following priorities should be
considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects:
i. Pedestrians, people with disabilities, cyclists and public transport users first ; then
ii. Car users and powered two wheeled vehicles.

SM3 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport, such as walking, cycling and public
transport, by restraining road traffic, meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act
and Local Air Quality Management Plans, and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms
such as traffic management, parking control and development control, particularly in respect of
sensitive local areas.

SM4 To promote safe transport in general, and particularly safe and convenient movement for
pedestrians and cyclists, particularly in respect of safer journeys to school.

16 PART ONE
SM5 To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets
the needs of residents, businesses, workers and visitors in the Borough. This would include
necessary new infrastructure and services, a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up
and go services; improved interchanges and common high standards.

SM6 To safeguard the Crossrail route, changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in
respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment, Thames Gateway Bridge and to have
regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way
in L.B. Newham), Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. Greenwich
Waterfront Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports and will be safeguarded as
and when appropriate.

SM7 To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment, the
Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail.

Town Centres
STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality, commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s
Town Centres as retail, leisure, employment service and residential centres for residents, visitors
and the business community.

STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major, District and Local Centres, and its
network of Neighbourhood Parades, as set out below and in tables TC1 and TC2:
i. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres, and the Borough’s largest and second
shopping and office employment centres respectively.They are preferred locations for larger
scale development in retail, leisure and other town centre uses.
ii. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a
supermarket or range of food shops. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town
centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality
and viability Woolwich or Eltham. Greenwich is the borough’s largest District Centre, and in
addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage site. Proposals that
serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents.
iii. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities, usually
including a small supermarket, and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town
centre uses to serve their local catchment. A new Local Centre will be developed by
Kidbrooke Station as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area.
iv. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal town centre hierarchy and typically
have less than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking
distance. Retail developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. Provision of a
minimum range of retailing and services will be safeguarded.

STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety, access, comfort, security, amenity and the environment within
the Borough’s town centres for residents, workers and visitors.

STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces, and
to preserve and enhance historic buildings, and other important heritage features.

STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport, and to reduce congestion
and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport, walking, cycling, and linked trips.

PART ONE 17
 Tourism
ST1 The Council supports and promotes tourism, recognising that it has a positive and significant role
to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in
the Waterfront areas.

ST2 To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations, subject to the need
to:
i. Protect the housing stock, the amenities of the local community and the environment of the
Borough;
ii. Ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses;
iii. Diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a
wide range of arts, culture, sporting and entertainment activities for participation and
enjoyment by all sections of the community; and
iv. That major tourist facilities are well served by public transport.

Waterfront
SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and
buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period, bringing about the regeneration of the whole
area and realising its economic, social, environmental, cultural and recreational potential, to
secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities.

SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford
Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality; as Open Spaces, and an
essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right.

Implementation
SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date.

SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan, continue to work in partnerships and
consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents.

SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan.

18 PART ONE
PART
TWO
 1. COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
1.1 The Council’s approach to social inclusion and equal opportunities applies to all the policy areas
contained within the Plan.This chapter contains the policy context. It recognises the ways in which
land use and transportation policies can affect some people more than others because of
differences in personal mobility arising from factors such as age, health, disability, income, caring
responsibilities, gender, sexuality or ethnic background.The needs of groups facing discrimination and
deprivation are examined and areas of deprivation and their specific community needs are identified.
Particular issues are addressed by policies in this chapter and elsewhere in the Plan. It is recognised
that these needs have to be addressed in a comprehensive, integrated and multi-agency approach
but that planning has a role to play within such approaches. The strategic policy for opportunities
for all is:

SC1 To ensure that development policies reflect the needs of all the Borough’s residents, especially
the priority needs of the most disadvantaged individuals, communities and neighbourhoods.

1.2 The chapter sets out the Council’s approach to community benefits and goes on to detail the broad
needs for a wide range of community services ranging from local community facilities to health and
educational establishments.The general policies for community benefits, needs and services are:

SC2 In order to secure the best use of land and a properly planned environment the council will seek
to ensure, through the use of conditions and planning obligations attached to planning
permissions, that new development provides for the infrastructure, facilities, amenities and other
planning benefits which are necessary to support and serve it and to offset any consequential
planning loss to the local area.

SC3 To provide, consolidate and retain community facilities within the area they serve, especially in
areas of deficiency, areas of deprivation and areas of new development.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

Community Needs
1.3 Community needs have been examined through identifying disadvantaged groups and areas of
deprivation in the Borough.

Disadvantaged Groups
1.4 There are a number of groups in the Borough who are disadvantaged by the built environment.
Table C1 sets those groups out.

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 21

 TABLE C1: GROUPS MOST DISADVANTAGED BY THE BUILT ENVIRONMENT

Disadvantaged Numbers Distribution in Policies/

Group Affected the Borough Issues Land Use
DISABLED 17% had a Borough-wide. Housing: Inaccessible, Sheltered housing.
PEOPLE Limiting Long Kidbrooke with unsuitably designed, Accessible/adapted
Term Illness Hornfair 20 %, including unsafe elements. housing. Accessible public
(2001 Census) Middle Park & Transport: inaccessible. transport and community
Sutcliffe 20% Problems of access to all transport. Accessible new
(2001 Census). health and other facilities, buildings. Provision of
shops, leisure facilities and facilities and conveniences.
open space. Employment: Disabled facilities at work.
inaccessible places of work Employment opportunities.
and lack of sheltered
employment. Building
design and landscapes not
always conducive to
personal safety.
UNEMPLOYED 5% Woolwich Leads to poverty and Maintain economic activity
PEOPLE (2001 Census) Riverside 9%, deprivation, ill-health and in the Borough to provide
Thamesmead reduced standards of living. job opportunities. Allocate
Moorings 7% sites. Encourage growth of
(2001 Census) service sector. Need for
training. Encourage the
provision of affordable
public transport.

MINORITY 23% Particularly Employment: higher Flexible policies on small

ETHNIC (2001 Census) Woolwich unemployment rate;
COMMUNITIES Common (41%), demand for setting
Glyndon (38%), up/running small
Woolwich businesses. Housing:
Riverside (36%) dependence on public
(2001 Census) sector, harassment, special
requirements for larger and
extended families.
Community facilities: places
of worship for different
religions, meeting places.
Transport: dependence on
public transport,
particularly by women and
older people. Language
needs for some groups,
particularly women and
refugee communities.
businesses.Training.
Maintain economic activity
in Borough. Affordable
housing. Housing mix.
Sympathetic policies for
community buildings.
Cheap, accessible, reliable
public transport.Translation
of Council documents
when possible and
interpretation provisions.

22 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

Disadvantaged Numbers Distribution in
Group Affected the Borough Issues
WOMEN 52% Borough-wide Employment: lower wages,
(2001 Census) poorer conditions, lack of
childcare, many part-time.
Caring: are majority of
carers of children, sick,
people with disabilities and
older people.Transport:
few women with access to
cars so dependent on
public transport.
Personal safety: rise in
crime against the person
disproportionately affects
women. Housing: high
dependence on public
housing and rented sector,
many homeless. Shopping:
lack of accessibility to
shops for pushchairs and
few childcare facilities.
Community facilities -
access to health and other
facilities.
OLDER PEOPLE 13% over Southern Wards Housing: dependent on
pensionable most affected public housing, problems of
age. 6.5% over such as maintenance, access and
75's. Majority Coldharbour & security.Transport
are women. Eltham, Eltham dependent on public
(2001 Census) North and transport. Welfare/ heath:
Eltham South low income group, need
(2001 Census) for community care and
facilities, health problems
increase need for health
care and social service
provision. Access: many
may be infirm and have
similar needs to people
with disabilities.
LONE PARENTS 14%-13,133 Northern Wards Housing: dependent on
households. most affected - public housing. Caring: lack
Numbers rising. Woolwich of facilities contribute to
(2001 Census) Common 16%, restricted employment
Woolwich opportunities and adds to
Riverside 15%, isolation. Poverty is a
Glyndon 15% particular problem.
(Lone parent
households with
dependent
children,
2001 Census)
COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES
Policies/
Land Use
Workplace nurseries.
Children’s Centres with
integrated centres for
under fives and their
families. Employment
opportunities.Training.
Community nurseries.
Day- care centres.
Supported housing. Safety
conscious design of built
environment. Affordable
housing. Hostels. Shoppers’
crèches. Local shopping.
Better access. Cheap,
accessible, reliable public
transport. Accessible
community facilities.
Sheltered housing and
special needs housing.
Reliable, safe and accessible
public transport.
Community facilities -
accessible day care centres,
hospitals and health
centres. Domiciliary
services. Accessible
buildings including ramps
and handrails.
Affordable, accessible
housing. Childcare facilities.
Children’s Centres with
integrated centres for
under fives and their
families. Good public
transport. Local shops,
health clinics, etc.
23
Disadvantaged Numbers Distribution in Policies/
Group Affected the Borough Issues Land Use
HOMELESS In 2005-2006 Not Known Lack of temporary Hostels, affordable housing,
PEOPLE Greenwich accommodation and cheap single unit housing.Training
Council housing. Lack of training opportunities.
accepted opportunities for young
responsibility homeless and young care
for housing 971 leavers.
homeless
households.
UNDER FIVES 7.2% Northern Wards Many live in areas of stress Work-place nurseries,
(2001 Census) most affected in high-rise flats, living in community nurseries, play
such as poverty in a poor space. Children’s Centres
Woolwich environment with little with integrated centres for
Common (10%), access to gardens or play under fives and their
Woolwich space. High rates of injuries families. Access to schools,
Riverside (9%), from road accidents due to health clinics, hospitals.
Glyndon (9%), poor road layout and/or Reducing road traffic
Thamesmead environment and the accidents and improving
Moorings (9%) priority given to road housing conditions
(2001 Census) users.Totally inadequate
nursery provision to meet
growing demand. Need for
health clinics and support
services.
CARERS 9% Borough-wide Community facilities: need Cheap, accessible, reliable
(2001 Census). for day care centres and public transport.
other temporary help. Supported housing.
Transport: dependent on Community facilities.
public transport. Housing: Accessible health services.
need for accessible and/or
adapted housing.
NON-CAR OR 41% - Northern Wards Transport: dependent on Cheap, accessible reliable
VAN OWNERS (2001 Census) most affected public transport. Safe public transport. Protection
including walking routes are essential of local shops. Discourage
Woolwich (including routes which are out of town shopping
Riverside (55%), safe for those who use centres. Safer pedestrian
Woolwich mobility aids such as environment and cycleway.
Common (51%), scooters, wheelchairs and
Glyndon (48%) buggies). Shopping: local
(2001 Census) shops essential. Community
facilities: local health and
other facilities essential.
LESBIANS, GAY 10% estimated Borough-wide Housing: homelessness a Single unit housing, hostels,
MEN AND for all or some major problem, need for affordable housing. Safety
BISEXUAL PEOPLE part of lives hostels for young lesbians conscious design in built
and gay men excluded by environment.
parents, need for single
housing unit. Personal
safety: for example, need
for purpose-built Lesbian
and Gay Centre in safe
environment.

24 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

Disadvantaged Numbers Distribution in Policies/
Group Affected the Borough Issues Land Use
PEOPLE WITH 12% Estimated Borough-wide Housing: often related to Supported housing
LEARNING nationally stress from living in including hostels and
DIFFICULTIES AND unsuitable housing and/or sheltered housing.
MENTAL HEALTH environments. Increasing Sheltered employment
NEEDS demand for supported integrated education.
housing, hostels and Accessible Social Services
sheltered housing. and health services.
Employment training and
retraining, sheltered
employment.Transport:
access to special transport.
Education: integrated at
local level. Accessible health
facilities and Social Services
support. Cultural and
recreational provisions.
TRAVELLERS Approximately Official site at Housing: lack of permanent Skills centre and training.
AND ROMANY 50 families on Abbey Wood/ accommodation London- Temporary and permanent
PEOPLE Thistlebrook unauthorised wide, lack of properly sites needed London-wide.
site.Varying sites vary. serviced sites for Access to health and social
numbers on temporary services.
unauthorised accommodation.
sites. Employment: needed for
retraining where wanted.
Education: irregularity a
problem.

1.5 The Disadvantaged Groups identified in Table C1 share many common experiences: they all face
discrimination in obtaining access to employment and housing, often have low incomes and are
disadvantaged by lack of transport and access to health and other facilities.They may also encounter
barriers in accessing other mainstream provision - welfare benefits, legal representation, advice and
culturally sensitive services. Several key issues with implications for planning policies can be identified
and are set out below.

Housing
• A variety of homes, affordable, accessible and safe, including special needs and hostels.
• A safe and accessible environment around homes with gardens and play space for children.
• Choice of tenure to ensure that affordable, accessible, safe and supported housing to meet
different needs are available as part of any major new development.

Transport
• Cheap, accessible, safe and reliable public transport - to people with disabilities and geographically,
i.e. close to where people live, work and shop.
• Transport schemes for the community, such as Dial-a-Ride, women’s safe transport and existing
community transport.

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 25

 • Prioritising environmentally friendly transport - walking, cycling and public transport - and
reducing car use will be essential to meeting air quality targets, and bring health benefits,
contributing to the Department of Health Targets and reductions in traffic accidents.
• Improving the environment for pedestrians, particularly for children, older people and people with
disabilities, and cyclists. Encouraging walking and cycling through the creation of safe, attractive
walking and cycling routes and pedestrian only areas.
• The importance of public transport for people who do not have access to a car: around 41% of
households in Greenwich. In parts of Greenwich, such as Woolwich Riverside and Woolwich
Common, the proportion is much higher than this (55% and 51%, respectively – 2001 Census).

Shopping
• Local Shopping areas and parades.
• Facilities for children including separate baby changing areas, baby feeding areas and play areas
including crèches.
• User-friendly amenities and design, such as seating and rest areas, to meet the needs of all,
particularly elderly people and people with disabilities.
• Access for disabled people, through provision of toilets, wide doors and lifts, use of appropriate
lighting, contrast and surface textures, etc.

Jobs
• Improving employment opportunities through encouraging a variety of employment including
small businesses and initiatives such as community and social enterprise, self-employment and
Intermediate Labour Markets.
• Training to enable people to overcome disadvantage in the labour market and provide them with
new skills to match job opportunities.
• Childcare facilities such as workplace nurseries.
• Facilities to meet the needs of people with disabilities.

Community Services
• Social support through the provision of accessible Health, Social Services, day care and child care,
etc.
• Meeting places for special cultural, religious and social needs.

Environment
• Access for people with disabilities, those with physical or learning needs, older people, children,
and parents and carers with young children.
• Personal safety should be an important consideration in the layout and design of the built
environment and open spaces.
• Improving outdoor air quality and safety through measures to reduce car dependency.

1.6 Table C2 provides a cross reference to the key policies for disadvantaged groups contained in other
chapters of the Plan.

26 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

TABLE C2: KEY POLICIES FOR DISADVANTAGED GROUPS
2. Jobs and the Local Economy
SJ5: Strategic Policy
J13: Quality Jobs
J14: Training and Business Support
J15: Community Benefits
J16: Accessibility
3. Housing
SH2: Strategic Policy
SH5: Strategic Policy
H7: Housing Design
H12: Children’s Play Areas
H13: Housing Improvement
H14: Affordable Housing
H15: Housing Mix
H16: Non Self-Contained Accommodation
H17: Lifetime Homes
H18: Sheltered Housing
H19/20: Wheelchair Standard Housing
H21: Supported Housing
H22: Travellers and Romany people
4. Open Spaces
SO3: Strategic Policy
O9: Public Open Space Deficiency Areas
O10: Community Benefits
O12: Park Facilities
O15: Recreational Footpaths & Cycleways
O25: Environmental Education
5. Environmental Protection
SE1: Strategic Policy
SE2: Strategic Policy
E7: Traffic Restraint and Reduction Measures
6. Design and Conservation
SD1: Strategic Policy
SD4: Strategic Policy
D1: Urban Design
D4: Environmental Improvements
D5: Parking and Access Arrangements
D6: Access for People with Disabilities
D7: Safety and Security in the Environment
D32: Environmental Improvements
7. Movement
SM2: Strategic Policy
SM3: Strategic Policy
SM4: Strategic Policy
M1: Development and Transport - General Principles
M4: Extension of the Public Transport Network

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 27

 M6: Accessible Public Transport
M11: Transport Interchanges
M12: Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities
M28: Community Benefits
M32: Cycling
M33: Pedestrians
M34: People with Disabilities - Access in Public Areas
8. Town Centres
STC2: Strategic Policy
STC3: Strategic Policy
STC5: Strategic Policy
TC5: Woolwich Town Centre: Pedestrian and Cycle Access
TC9: The Multi-Functional Role of Greenwich Town Centre
TC12: Greenwich Town Centre:Traffic Management and Transport Links
TC15: Eltham Town Centre:Traffic Management, Streetscape and Environmental Quality
TC17: Protected Core, Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages
TC19: Essential Local Facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and Freestanding Premises
TC25/ Site Access, Servicing and Parking
TC26:
9. Tourism
ST2: Strategic Policy
T1: Location and Criteria
10. Waterfront
W4: Thamesmead

Areas of Deprivation
1.7 Greenwich ranks as the 41st most deprived local authority in England and the 9th most deprived
Borough in London in terms of ‘extent’ of deprivation (Indices of Deprivation, ODPM, 2004).There
is considerable variation within the Borough, which contains relatively prosperous and less well off
areas.Ten out of the Boroughs seventeen wards, primarily in the north of the Borough, contain areas
within the most deprived 10% in England. Such areas of deprivation suffer from a combination of
economic and social problems. Some of these areas also experience environmental deprivation,
including a lack of green space, leading to the need to improve social, economic and environmental
conditions and to facilitate neighbourhood renewal. Studies carried out at enumeration, ward and
district level have identified geographic clusters of deprivation (Breadline Greenwich 1994; Ward
Poverty Profiles 1994; DETR Indices of Deprivation 2004).These provide a geographical context for
allocating resources in the Borough. One of the Plan’s major objectives, in line with the London Plan,
is to direct resources, whether Council, other public sector or private sector, towards these areas,
to help meet the specific needs of these areas. Many of the Plan’s policies thus refer to these areas
of deprivation.

Community Benefits
1.8 The Borough continues to have many opportunities for major development especially along the
Waterfront; however, this is also an area that contains an already disadvantaged community. It is
therefore vital that the Council ensures that new development is not at the cost of those
communities and that regeneration is balanced to take into account their needs.
1.9 The use of planning conditions and obligations, in conjunction with new development, can make a
valuable contribution to the effectiveness of the planning system.The use of conditions and planning

28 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

 obligations is guided by both legislation and government policy. They can ensure that the
environment is safeguarded and the development provides for the infrastructure, facilities and
amenities needed to support it. Section 106 of the Town and Country Planning Act 1990 empowers
local authorities to seek such “planning benefits” from new development through agreement with
developers. Circular 05/2005 ‘Planning Obligations’ provides more detailed guidance on the use of
planning obligations and the type of “planning benefits” which are considered reasonable. It states
that planning obligations should only be sought where they are:
• necessary;
• relevant to planning;
• directly related to the proposed development;
• fairly and reasonably related in scale and kind to the proposed developments;
• reasonable in all other respects.
1.10 The Department for Local Communities and Government proposes to reform the operation of
planning obligations. Circular 05/2005 sets out reforms relating to the negotiation of planning
obligations. Further reforms could include the introduction of an ‘Optional Planning Charge’,
whereby a developer could choose to accept a standard charge instead of entering into a negotiated
agreement. A decision on the Optional Planning Charge will be made in the context of the
Government’s response to the Barker Review of Housing Supply (March 2004). Barker
recommended the introduction of a ‘Planning Gain Supplement’ whereby the developer would pay
a financial sum, measured from the uplift in land values resulting from a grant of planning permission,
to contribute to wider community benefits.The Government will make a decision on the Planning
Gain Supplement at the same time as that on the Optional Planning Charge.
1.11 Obligations can be provided either directly by the developer on or off site, or by means of financial
payment to the local authority to make the necessary provision. Unacceptable developments should
not be permitted because of unrelated benefits offered by the applicant, neither should acceptable
development be refused permission simply because the applicant is unwilling or unable to offer
unrelated benefits.
1.12 When considering proposals for development which require planning permission, the Council will
seek either through provision by the developer or through financial payment of all or part of the
cost of provision, appropriate planning benefits which meet the ‘tests’ set out above.There are a wide
range of planning benefits which the Council considers would be appropriate for planning
obligations. Policy SC2 sets out the Part One policy whilst policies within the topic chapters identify
community benefits that might be sought in relation to particular development proposals. These
include:
Policy C3: Major Residential Developments.
Policy J6: Industrial and Business Developments.
Policy J12: Work/Live Units.
Policy J14: Training and Business Support
Policy J15: Community Benefits.
Policy H11: Amenity Space and Gardens.
Policy H12: Children’s Play Areas.
Policy H14: Affordable Housing.
Policy O9: Public Open Space Deficiency Areas.
Policy O10: Community Benefits
Policy O16: Riverside Footpath.

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 29

 Policy O17: Cycleways along the riverfront and through open spaces
Policy O23: Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites
Policy O24: Management of Wildlife Sites.
Policy E6: Air Quality Assessments
Policy E12: Site Servicing.
Policy E15: Waste Recycling.
Policy D4: Improvements to the Urban and Natural Environment.
Policy D30/31: Archaelogy.
Policy M1: Development and Transport - General Principles.
Policy M3: Travel Plans.
Policy M4: Extension of the Public Transport Network
Policy M6: Accessible Public Transport.
Policy M10 Greenwich Waterfront Transit.
Policy M19: New Housing Developments - Traffic Calming Measures.
Policy M20: Specific Improvements.
Policy M27: Car Parking.
Policy M28: Transport Community Benefits.
Policy M32: Cycling.
Policy M33: Pedestrians.
Policy T1: Major Tourism Development.
Policy TC16: Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach
Policy W3: Mixed Use Areas

Community Services
1.13 Services to support the community are provided by a variety of agencies to meet the health,
welfare, educational, social and religious needs of people living in the Borough. Although in many
instances the Council is not directly responsible for providing a service, it is concerned to see that
the needs of the community and its disadvantaged groups are met.This will be through supporting
and influencing the plans and proposals of the Health and other authorities, working in partnership
with them, and in some instances through the provision of voluntary sector grants to promote social
inclusion.
1.14 These facilities provide an important resource to the whole community and to support particularly
disadvantaged groups and areas of deprivation, which generally have a higher demand for health,
social and welfare services.

Health
1.15 It is recognised increasingly that patterns of land-use and development can have a significant impact
on the health of individuals and communities. Poor housing, lack of employment, training and
educational opportunities, high traffic levels and consequent pollution and lack of opportunity to
exercise, which may result from a lack of open space and safe, attractive pedestrian and cycle routes,

30 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

 all impact upon health and quality of life. Poor health is also linked to poverty and affects particular
areas of the Borough.
1.16 Within the Borough there are significant health inequalities.The partnership group, Improving Health
and Cutting Inequalities, aims to increase equality as do the ‘CARE’ partnership and arts and sports
initiatives.These emphasise prevention, community awareness and involvement, and the need for a
multi-agency approach to addressing the causes of ill health. While not all factors affecting health
come within the remit of planning, planning has an important role to play by ensuring that
development does not exacerbate health inequalities, but results in an improved environment for
everyone. Programmes are underway that tackle the causes of ill health and the Borough is working
towards meeting NHS targets. By 2010, the Greenwich Strategy aims to have provided high quality
and accessible health and social care services for all the Borough’s residents.
1.17 The commissioning of local health care services is the responsibility of Greenwich Teaching Primary
Care Trust (GTPCT), which also provides a number of community health services. Local hospital
services are commissioned from the Queen Elizabeth Hospital NHS Trust, and Mental Health and
Learning Disability Services from Oxleas NHS Trust. The Council and the GTPCT are developing
and integrating services for children through the Children’s Trust.The Council has an important role
in providing community care under the National Health Service and Community Care Act 1990.
The Health Authority has to consult with the local authority when considering new development
or closures. Close co-operation is required to ensure that Health facilities in the Borough are
adequate to meet the needs of the community and the additional requirements of disadvantaged
groups and areas of deprivation. The main hospital within the Borough is the Queen Elizabeth
Hospital at Woolwich Common. Other services are provided at the Goldie Leigh and Memorial
Hospital sites. Primary Health Care centres are being developed in the Borough to provide
integrated health and social care services. Centres exist in Kidbrooke, Charlton, East Greenwich,
Creekside, Woolwich Town Centre and the Millennium Village.

Education
1.18 Through the Greenwich Strategy, the Greenwich Partnership aims to ensure the Borough is a place
where people are successful learners throughout their lives. By 2010, this will be achieved by raising
school pupil performances, retaining students in education beyond the age of 16, and by creating
accessible lifelong learning opportunities.The Council’s Integrated Regeneration Strategy recognises
the key contribution that raising education standards can make to the sustainable social and
economic regeneration of the Borough.The Borough’s vision for education is for a network of early
years centres, a pattern of well resourced all-through primary schools, a complementary and diverse
pattern of secondary schools and post 16 provision delivered through the G Plus network. The
Council will increase nursery provision through the Neighbourhood Nurseries initiative and
alongside this will provide support for parents and carers through Sure Start services.The Council
has completed a major schools reorganisation, which has rebalanced the distribution of school
places to reflect parental preferences and local needs, and introduced the G Plus network to provide
for Post 16 education across the Borough. Greenwich is a Pathfinder Authority for the “Building for
the Future” programme, which seeks to provide environments suitable for a 21st century education
across secondary schools nationwide. This will provide a substantial investment into secondary
schools throughout the Borough.The Council is also a pathfinder for the ‘Extended Schools’ initiative
and aims to provide a range of Council and other community services through co-location or
integration with schools. Six Sure Start areas have also been designated in the Borough to support
parents and carers with the task of bringing up children under five. Since April 2004, the new
children’s centres programme has built on the good practice within these Sure Start areas and will
establish new and improved services within all the disadvantaged wards in the Borough. The main
providers of higher and further education in the Borough are Greenwich University,Trinity College
of Music and Greenwich Community College.The former is primarily based at the Old Royal Naval

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 31

 College, Devonport and Dreadnought House in Greenwich Town centre and two sites in Avery Hill.
The Old Royal Naval College is also the home of Trinity College.The latter is based at a number of
sites in the Borough.
1.19 A well-trained and educated resident workforce will be essential to the success of regeneration
schemes in the Borough, ensuring that local people are able to benefit from these in terms of job
opportunities, businesses are able to gain access to the skills they require and future employers will
be attracted to the area.The role of higher education in the Borough in this is acknowledged, as are
the economic and other benefits they bring to the Borough.The London Plan points out that higher
education institutions “are also important feeders into the labour supply, particularly of people with
higher order skills necessary for London to remain a globally competitive city”.

Policies
Community Services
C1 The Council will support proposals for new or extended or enhanced community facilities
particularly where they meet the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of the Borough subject
to the following criteria:
(i) The location for such facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre. Proposals
elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which overrides the
objective of supporting town and local centres.
(ii) The scale of the development is appropriate to the location.
(iii) The facilities should be easily accessible to those they are intended to serve by foot, cycle
and public transport.
(iv) There is no unacceptable impact on the amenity of neighbouring residents.
(v) Access for people with disabilities.
(vi) A high standard of design is achieved (See Policy D1)
(vii) Appropriate car parking provision (See Policy M26 & M27)

C2 Planning permission which would result in the loss of community facilities through change of use
or redevelopment, will only be granted where:
(i) alternative community facilities of a similar nature are provided locally in the area within
which that facility serves; or
(ii) it would enable the implementation of a strategy for the provision of a community service
in the Borough; or
(iii) the site is either demonstrably unsuitable for continued use as a community facility or is
vacant and no community use is forthcoming despite active site marketing on realistic terms
Provided that:
(iv) the alternative or remaining community facilities are easily accessible for those they are
intended to serve by foot, cycle, public transport and people with disabilities;
(v) the location for such community facilities is in or on the edge of a town or local centre.
Proposals elsewhere must demonstrate a special need for the particular location which
overrides the objective of supporting town and local centres; and
(vi) the needs of disadvantaged groups or areas of deprivation have been taken into account.

32 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

 Reason for C1 and C2
1.20 It is important that a range of services, such as schools and colleges, voluntary sector projects, health
and child care facilities, law and advice centres, community centres, facilities for religious purposes
and Council services with a high public use, exist to support and enable the community.The pattern
of delivering these community services does and will change and evolve in response to legislative
and organisational changes, changes in the needs of the community and changes in methods of
service delivery.These changes will have consequences for the land and buildings through which the
services are delivered. The policies seek to ensure that as these changes occur the principles of
support for town/local centres, accessibility by foot, cycle, public transport and by mobility aids such
as scooters, wheelchairs and buggies and their impact on disadvantaged groups/ areas of deprivation
are taken into account. Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) and
PPG13: Transport (2001) encourage proposals for health, education and community facilities to
maximise accessibility by public transport, walking and cycling. Smaller scale facilities such as health
centres, children’s centres and primary schools should be encouraged in local centres. In such
locations these uses help to underpin the health of town centres and are well served by public
transport. Exceptions will only be allowed where there is special need for the facility to be located
elsewhere, for example where the proposal is for an extension of an existing facility which does not
significantly change the nature of the facility.The proposals will also need to be assessed to ensure
that they satisfy other development control criteria set out in the Plan.
1.21 The policies also recognise that land and buildings used for community services are generally of low
financial land value and need to be protected and promoted through the planning system.Therefore
the loss of such land/buildings will need to be justified. This can be satisfied where the proposal
would lead to alternative provision of similar community facilities in the area.Alternatively it can form
part of a wider strategy for the provision of a community service or if it can be demonstrated that
the market has been unresponsive to the opportunity for a community use on the site.

C3 When considering major residential developments the Council will seek appropriate planning
obligations, including, to meet any increased local demand for health, child care, education,
cultural and recreational, social, youth and religious facilities and public open space in accordance
with Policy SC2.

Reason
1.22 The Borough, in the plan period, is going to face a significant increase in housing (see paragraph 3.5).
The additional demands that this will place on the Borough’s services needs to be recognised.The
Council is committed to ensuring that a range of community facilities - educational, health,
recreational - can be easily accessed by all the Borough’s residents. Where developments increase
demand for existing services, such as primary health care services, it is essential that arrangements
are put in place to secure additional and appropriate forms of provision so that the health and well-
being of the local community does not suffer. Major residential developments are defined as those
incorporating over 25 units.

C4 Proposals for the change of use of residential accommodation for use by doctors, dentists,
physiotherapists and other medical practitioners must ensure that:
(i) There is satisfactory access to public transport and adequate space exists for an appropriate
level of car parking, including for people with disabilities;
(ii) There will be no detrimental effect on the environment;
(iii) The size of the proposed practice is consistent with the size of the property and the
character of the neighbourhood.

COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES 33

 Reason
1.23 Although such uses provide a service to the community, this must be balanced against environmental
considerations. Detailed guidelines for the development of surgery premises are set out in an Advice
Note.

Nursery Provision
C5 The Council will support the provision and expansion of nursery facilities in the Borough where
suitable sites can be identified and standards of accommodation are satisfied. The following
criteria should be met:
(i) There is no detrimental effect on the amenities of neighbouring residents, particularly due
to noise and disturbance;
(ii) A proper sound insulation scheme is installed;
(iii) The provision of internal and external usable space must satisfy the space standards
guideline laid down by OFSTED; except in the case of nursery provision by the Local
Education Authority where it must meet the Department for Education and Skills minimum
space standards;
(iv) The scale and intensity of use should be appropriate to the size of the building and should
not adversely affect the character of the area;
(v) Adequate access by public transport and car parking space for Health and Education
professionals must be provided and a limited amount of car parking for staff would be
desirable with high quality landscaping to minimise the effects of off-street car parking;
(vi) Adequate access by public transport and space for parents and guardians to drop off/pick
up children;
(vii) A safe and secure internal and external environment for both children and staff must be
provided.

Reason
1.24 Provision of nursery facilities is vital in the implementation of equal opportunities and access to
employment. The Council is anxious that these are provided in locations and premises that are
suitable for that use. As part of the strategy to promote the expansion of nursery provision policy
have been developed in an Advice Note (to be updated).

34 COMMUNITY NEEDS, BENEFITS & SERVICES

 2. JOBS & THE LOCAL ECONOMY
GENERAL POLICY AND POLICY CONTEXT
2.1 The policies in this chapter are concerned with the locational aspects of employment uses, defined
for the purposes of this Chapter as offices, industry and manufacturing, wholesale warehousing and
distribution (categories B1, B2 and B8 of the Use Classes Order, 1987 and subsequent updates), and
‘sui generis’ uses such as aggregates, scrap and waste processing, builders yards, haulage yards,
transport depots, MOT testing stations and wholesale/trade sales that exclude the visiting public.The
policies seek to address the long-term employment needs of the local population including the
unemployed, and the needs of local businesses and industries. This chapter should be read in
conjunction with relevant policies in the Town Centres chapter and the section on Mixed Use Areas
in the Waterfront Chapter, which provide additional guidance for office uses, and specific guidance
for other employment generators such as retail and leisure activities. The general policies for
employment uses and the local economy are:

SJ1 To expand and diversify the Borough’s economic base and employment opportunities by
identifying good quality employment sites, and by promoting efficient use of employment land and
improvements to business infrastructure.

SJ2 To ensure that significant employment generators are accessible by public transport.

SJ3 To retain, and encourage the expansion of, existing businesses, and to promote the provision of
premises for small and growing firms.

SJ4 To resist the loss of employment land and premises that are in employment use, or that are well
suited for continued employment use.

SJ5 To encourage training and the development of the skills of the Borough workforce, and to ensure
that the benefits of economic activity are shared by all sections of the community including those
disadvantaged or facing discrimination in relation to the job market.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

Background
2.2 Greenwich forms part of the Thames Gateway, recognized in both the Sustainable Communities
Plan (ODPM 2003) and the London Plan as being one of two priority regeneration corridors in east
London with the potential to accommodate a significant proportion of London’s projected
population and employment growth, and to redress the economic imbalance between east and
west London.
2.3 The economic geography of Greenwich is dominated by substantial industrial areas in the north of
the Borough, in particular Greenwich Peninsula (west), Charlton Riverside and West Thamesmead.
These are complemented by a range of smaller commercial areas and premises that are more
widely dispersed, and by offices and small service industries primarily clustered around the Borough’s
town centres.
2.4 The collapse of the Borough’s traditional economic base between the 1960’s and the early 1990’s
left a legacy of high and long-term unemployment and severe urban decay. Consequently, between
the early 1990’s and the end of 2004-05, 172 hectares (net) of derelict, under-used or contaminated
industrial land were released for other uses, principally through the Development Plan review

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 35

 process. The decline in heavy industrial sectors disproportionately affected workers in semi and
unskilled socio-economic groups, who remain concentrated in the Northern part of the Borough
(although Middle Park, Ferrier, and Sherard Wards also have concentrations above Borough
average). Unemployment is also disproportionately suffered by other disadvantaged groups, such as
lone parents, young people, people with disabilities and long term health problems. Such groups tend
to be less financially able to move to other areas where jobs suited to their existing skills may be
available. They are also more likely to experience difficulties moving into different types of
employment in expanding sectors like business and financial services, information and
communication technology, hospitality and tourism and cultural and creative industries.
2.5 As at the end of 2005-06 there are 241 hectares (net) of land in or last used for industry including
warehousing and aggregates in Greenwich (224 ha. excluding land already re-allocated for other
uses). 182 hectares are identified as Strategic Employment Locations in the London Plan, comprising
three Defined Industrial Areas (Greenwich Peninsula West, Charlton Riverside and Plumstead/West
Thamesmead), Charlton Business Park and the Aggregates Zone. There are 33 hectares of vacant
industrial sites in the Borough, inclusive of 21 hectares remaining on the White Hart Triangle, which
is being developed for industry and warehousing. As at the end of 2005-06 there was approximately
853,000m2 (gross) of industrial and warehousing floorspace in the Borough. 6.8% was recorded as
vacant in the Greenwich Business Development Centre site marketing database.

Economic trends
Employment and business growth
2.6 Following decades of persistent decline in the Borough’s employment base, there has been a period
of stabilisation and employment growth. From an earlier peak of 58,000 jobs in 1991, job numbers
fell to 52,600 in 1995, but have since rallied: total employment in the Borough stood at 62,600 in
2003. After decades of contraction, total industrial employment has steadied, remaining at around
6,000 jobs.
2.7 Parallel trends are reflected in other recent data. Unemployment in Greenwich has fallen from
21.9% in 1994 to 5.7% in 2006. Greenwich has historically suffered an unemployment rate at least
2% higher than the London average, but the gap had narrowed to 1.0% in September 2005. 31% of
the unemployed are aged between 16-24, and this most vulnerable age group suffers an
unemployment rate of 15.4%. Almost half of the jobs filled by unemployed Greenwich residents
have gone to people who live in the areas in Greenwich that suffer from the worst unemployment.
However, unemployment rates still approach or exceed 10% in St. Mary’s, West and Ferrier Wards.
The incidence of long-term unemployment (those registered unemployed for a year or more) has
also fallen significantly, from 45% (about 7,000) in 1994 to 19% (about 1,200) in 2006. Over 70% of
the current long-term unemployed are men.
2.8 The Greenwich economy is dominated by small businesses: 85% employ less than 10 people, and
4% employ more than 100. Business formation and closure rates are lower than the London
average, suggesting that to date the Greenwich economy has been more stable but less dynamic
than the London region as a whole. However, small businesses typically have the greatest growth
potential.

Planning and Development

2.9 There has been a significant upturn in development activity in northern wards and waterfront
industrial areas in the late 1990’s. Flagship developments permitted on the Greenwich Peninsula, the
Royal Arsenal and the White Hart Triangle alone propose to create in excess of 12,000 new
dwellings and over 700,000m2 of new office, industrial, retail and leisure floorspace by 2021.

36 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

2.10 Recent development trends underline the continuing importance of Greenwich in London’s
industrial economy, and there has also been a substantial increase in industrial development activity
over the previous Plan period (1994-2001). Greater London Authority and Council records for light
industrial uses, manufacturing and distribution show that in the six years 1993-94 to 1998-99 annual
industrial floorspace completions averaged 5,400m2, an annual land take of 1.2 ha. (Use Classes B1c,
B2 and B8, developments exceeding 1,000m2 gross only). By contrast, 1999-00 to 2004-05 annual
industrial completions averaged 21,200m2 and land take 4.8 ha. per annum, a four-fold increase.This
trend looks set to continue in the medium term. In 2003 planning permission was granted for
106,000m2 of industrial floorspace on the White Hart Triangle (25.7 ha, construction phased to
2010 with the first units available in 2005-06).This is indicative of the fact that ‘industry’ comprises
a wide range of activities, and whilst many are in decline in London or in the UK generally, others
are experiencing significant - or localized - growth. When set against the decline of preceding
decades, it also highlights the need to take a long-term view in managing the stock and availability
of land for future employment use.

Training
2.11 The decline of traditional industries has important implications for the regeneration of the Borough
as a whole, in terms of the need to train less-skilled groups to increase their access to jobs within
and outside the Borough. Despite the recent economic upturn, male unemployment still exceeds
14% in many wards, indicating an ongoing need to facilitate the provision of new opportunities for
less skilled members of the workforce. Similarly, availability of a suitably skilled workforce is
important both for local firms and to attract new businesses into the area.
2.12 Training is a gateway to accessing employment, and a key mechanism in tackling social exclusion. If
local people are to benefit from local job creation, it is essential that training in the necessary work
skills takes place.The Greenwich Local Labour and Business Service (GLLaB) has been recognised by
the Audit Commission as an exemplar of best practice in creating local employment. Between 1997
and 2002 GLLaB helped 4,800 local people into employment, and helped local businesses win £3.5
million worth of new contracts. GLLaB’s service to local people includes the arrangement and
procurement of identified training needs and efforts are underway to develop customised training
programmes for local people so that they can access the jobs created through the major
commercial developments in the Borough. Training is also important to increase the employability
of people to enable them to compete for jobs outside the Borough, as the London-wide labour
market provides many job opportunities if training and transport factors allow the local labour force
to compete for them.

Economic Strategy and the Annual Economic Development Plan

2.13 The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) provides a framework for economic
development from 2002 - 2007. Major new investment and development are creating unparalleled
opportunities for Greenwich and East London. An estimated 25,000 new jobs will be created in
Greenwich by 2010, and thousands more across the Thames Gateway sub-region. High quality
developments are transforming vast areas of derelict land and creating business growth and new
jobs.The strategy sets out the following Vision for Greenwich:
i. An exciting thriving place to live, work and do business.
ii. A first class business location.
iii. A place where all residents will have the education, skills and ability to get jobs in Greenwich, or
elsewhere in London.

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 37

 Economic opportunities and initiatives
2.14 There are a range of significant events, opportunities and initiatives playing a key role in the
transformation and modernisation of the local economy:

Funding Initiatives
2.15 Eight of the most deprived wards in the north of the Borough benefit from Assisted Area Status (as
at 2003). Manufacturing companies seeking to expand or safeguard employment may be eligible for
grants from the Department of Trade & Industry. Six of these wards have also been designated
Objective 2 Area status, with European funding available for industrial renewal, infrastructural or
workforce development. The Riverside area east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefits from the
award of £10 million funding between 2000 and 2007 under the Single Regeneration Budget to
improve manufacturing opportunities.The South Greenwich ‘Building New Links’ area also benefits
from a further £22 million up to 2006. In addition, committed and planned investment by the public
and private sectors secured through successive regeneration programmes exceeds £2 billion.Their
implementation is providing a wide range of new employment and training opportunities. The
Borough is also likely to benefit from further funding and increased investment through the London
Development Agency’s Single Programme and the ODPM’s Sustainable Communities Plan.

Mixed Use Areas

2.16 Mixed Use Areas have been designated at Greenwich Peninsula, Deptford Creekside (West
Greenwich) and at Woolwich Royal Arsenal to facilitate the continuing economic, physical and social
transformation of waterfront areas blighted by the decline of heavy industry or port activity. They
contain many of the most significant waterfront redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough, and
will bring further opportunities for economic renewal and diversification, employment, housing,
leisure and environmental improvements. An overall increase in business floorspace will be sought
(see Waterfront Chapter Policy W3).
2.17 On Greenwich Peninsula the prospects for the long-term regeneration of the local economy
received a massive boost when Meridian Delta Limited were granted outline planning permission
for their proposals for 81 hectares to be phased over 20 years. Details include use of the Dome for
a sports arena, exhibition and leisure venue, 10,010 new homes, 400,000m2 of office and business
space including a hotel, plus over 50,000m2 of retail and food and drink uses. Once completed it is
estimated the development as permitted will provide over 23,000 permanent jobs on site,
representing a one-third increase in jobs located in the Borough. The development of major sites
around Deptford Creek and the ongoing regeneration of the Woolwich Royal Arsenal will bring
further opportunities and improvements

Transport improvements
2.18 Infrastructural investments have improved accessibility within and into the Borough, and for Borough
residents to Greater and Central London. Major schemes completed include the Jubilee Line
extension and station at North Greenwich, the Docklands Light Railway extension to Greenwich,
and the completion of the Woolwich Road Widening scheme. Cumulatively they enhance the
Borough as a business location, and open up new opportunities for residents. Further transport
investment is likely over the Plan period.The Mayor’s 2001 Transport Strategy and the London Plan
supports the Docklands Light Rail extension to Woolwich, Waterfront Transit and the provision of
additional river crossings at Gallions Reach and Greenwich Peninsula (see Movement chapter).

Potential Economic Growth Sectors:

2.19 The Economic Development Strategy for Greenwich (2002) has identified a number of sectors with
potential for growth.These include health and social care, manufacturing, construction, tourism and

38 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 hospitality, sport and leisure, creative industries, business and financial services and information and
communication technologies.
2.20 The Council working in partnership with others has been successful in securing investment and
additional resources for the regeneration of the Borough.The priority now is to capitalise on these
new opportunities and maximise the benefits for local people and businesses.

Policies
Employment Locations
2.21 This section addresses the availability and suitability of sites for different types of business and
industrial activities.This is an essential aspect in safeguarding and enhancing the quality and range of
employment opportunities in the Borough to address problems of social exclusion, a requirement
that takes on increased importance when set against pressures to release brownfield and riverside
sites for housing.

Defined Industrial Areas

J1 Defined Industrial Areas designated on the Proposals Map are particularly suited and safeguarded
for activities within Use Classes B1, B2 and B8, although office developments unless ancillary will
be limited to locations with good public transport accessibility (see Policies J4, J7,W3 & TC16),
and B8 uses will be subject to the considerations in Policy J8. Other uses will not be permitted
unless they are:
i. ‘Sui Generis’ uses that are industrial in character as defined in paragraph 2.1, subject to
considerations under Policies J2, J10 and E1- E3.
ii. Local service uses to predominantly serve businesses and employees within walking
distance.

Reason
2.22 PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms states that Development Plans should
ensure that there is sufficient land available to suit a variety of industrial and commercial
requirements.The policy gives industrial developers and local communities greater certainty about
the types of development that will or will not be permitted in a given location, allowing industrial
investment decisions to be made with confidence.
2.23 The London Plan recognises the importance of industry, and seeks to ensure a sufficient ‘strategic
reservoir’ of industrial capacity is retained to meet London’s future industrial requirements. Industry
provides 7% of London’s jobs and 11% of its GDP, a higher productivity than some service sectors.
Slower but ongoing employment decline in industry in London is predicted, partially offset by a
projected increase in warehousing employment. Mayoral advice on Industrial Capacity states that to
2016 approximately 30-50 hectares per annum of employment land across London should be
released to other uses, particularly in the East London sub-region, which includes Greenwich.
2.24 However, Greenwich is a-typical of the East London sub-region as the amount of available vacant
land remaining within the Defined Industrial Areas is relatively low. Large tracts of the most
persistently underused land have already been transferred to other uses, principally by re-
designation as Mixed Use Areas (see paragraphs 2.4, 2.16 and Policy W3). This ‘managed release’
approach largely preceded, but is consistent with, PPG3 Housing and Mayoral recommendations that
East London boroughs adopt a managed approach to the release of surplus and especially poorer
industrial land.There is also significant local demand with new industrial/employment development
on 57 hectares 1998-2003 including works in progress (see paragraph 2.10). It is therefore

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 39

 important that the remaining industrial sites, and especially sites that are readily developable, are
made available to firms wishing to expand or locate in the Borough. These factors combined with
relatively low vacancy rates (see paragraph 2.5) underpin the controlled policy approach resisting
the ad hoc release of employments sites between Development Plan reviews.
2.25 The London Plan outlines a locational framework of Strategic Employment Locations (SELs) of
London-wide importance. SELs include Preferred Industrial Locations (PILs), defined as medium to
large-scale sites that should meet the needs of most industries in terms of their access, layout,
landscaping and cost requirements, as well as their relationship with other land uses. Within the
Borough 144 hectares (net) on Greenwich Peninsula west, the Charlton Riverside Area, and the
Plumstead-Thamesmead Industrial Area are designated as PILs, and form the basis of the Council’s
Defined Industrial Areas. These are historically industrial in nature, are largely located away from
environmentally sensitive areas, and contain a range of industrial accommodation. Mayoral advice on
Industrial Capacity is that managed industrial land release across London should take place outside
SELs (see also Policy J5).
2.26 A number of factors increase the probability that industrial demand can be converted into new
development over the Plan period. These include the award of £10 million under the Single
Regeneration Budget to promote manufacturing in Greenwich and Bexley, and the availability of
grants or other assistance from the London Development Agency, the Department of Trade and
Industry and the European Union. All the Defined Industrial Areas benefit from Intermediate
Assisted Area Status and those east of Greenwich Peninsula also benefit from Objective 2 Status.
Most of the Defined Industrial Areas are also Industrial Improvement Area under the Inner Urban
Areas Act (1978), enabling the Council to apply its own resources where appropriate. Planned
infrastructure proposals and the Borough’s enhanced profile are also likely to help.
2.27 The policy allows flexibility between B1, B2 and B8 uses, subject to more detailed policy guidance
for office and B8 uses in the policies cited.The lack of modern business units, particularly for small
and medium-sized light industrial firms, is a barrier to inward investment and may hamper economic
diversification. Light industry can also usefully serve as a buffer between general industry, large-scale
distribution and more sensitive surrounding land uses such as housing. However, B1 office
development is better located within town centres and other locations specified in Policy J7
(although it is not intended to prevent replacement of existing offices).
2.28 Criterion (ii) and the site schedules provide further flexibility for business/ employment related
diversification in specific locations. In particular, the Thames Barrier Approach offers scope for
employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local service facilities for both
business and visitor markets, to serve as an amenity and service zone for the industrial area which
encloses it, whilst also supporting the Thames Barrier as a visitor attraction. Despite improvements,
local environmental quality along Eastmoor Street is undermined by poor quality industrial buildings
and ‘eyesore’ activities such as car dismantling. Redevelopment and diversification into compatible
business uses will help to address these issues. However, it is essential that new uses support rather
than fetter business occupants of the Defined Industrial Area that encloses the Thames Barrier.
Residential use is not acceptable, nor are destination retail or leisure activities (see Site Schedules j4,
j5).The Council is working with the London Development Agency to improve the wider Charlton
Riverside Industrial Area.
2.29 Defined Industrial Areas have also traditionally accommodated a range of uses outside Group B of
the Use Class Order (1987) that are essentially industrial in character and have similar locational
requirements in terms of their impacts on surrounding activities. Proposals for such uses will be
considered in relation to impact on the environment, and the extent to which existing or potential
industrial occupiers in the vicinity might be adversely affected.

40 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 Aggregates and other ‘Open Yard’ Industries
J2 The Aggregates Zone within the Charlton Riverside area shown on the Proposals Map is the
Council’s preferred location for open yard aggregates, crushing and scrap uses, subject to the
safeguarding of the Riverside Walk (Policy O16). Such uses will also be acceptable on Safeguarded
Wharves providing the significant majority of raw and part-processed materials are transported
by river (see Policy W5).
Open yard aggregates, crushing and scrap uses will normally be resisted elsewhere unless
alternatives to road freight are utilised, and operations will not unacceptably compromise
regeneration objectives or the amenity of adjoining areas.

Reason
2.30 The availability of riverside wharves and the potential to develop greater commercial use of the
Thames are important Borough assets.The provision of an aggregate zone contributes to meeting
the London wide need for aggregates, while its wharf side location reduces road congestion and
pollution by allowing aggregates to be moved as water freight, in accordance with the London Plan.
The zone also benefits from a railhead in current use.
2.31 The designation of a specific location with rail and river access is intended to minimise potential
problems from aggregates or scrap operations in other parts of the Borough. Problems typically
arise on sites that are too close to residential areas or businesses that require a clean operating
environment, and/or on sites requiring frequent heavy truck access through residential streets.
Aggregate uses are likely to continue on three safeguarded wharves outside the defined zone: at
Victoria Deep Water Terminal, Riverside Wharf and at Brewery Wharf (see Policy W5 Safeguarded
Wharves). Subject to appropriate environmental and amenity safeguards, temporary on-site
processing facilities may also be acceptable on major development sites. Aggregate and scrap
operations within the confines of a building will generally be treated as a B2 general industrial use,
which will normally be acceptable in Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1).

Charlton Business Park

J3 Within Charlton Business Park the Council will permit development within Use Classes B1
(excluding non-ancillary offices) and B8.The Council will oppose any proposals leading to either
a loss in land or premises in employment use, or an increase in retail floor space unless in
accordance with Policy TC16.

Reason
2.32 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. It
is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry, distributive and trade
wholesale uses. It also accommodates retail warehouse units. The Council does not support any
increase in retail floorspace in Charlton Business Park (nor the surrounding area) within the Plan
period, unless in accordance with Policy TC16 (hybrid uses which combine wholesale use with
retailing will be considered individually on merit against the most relevant parts of Polices TC16 and
J8).
2.33 Charlton Business Park contains a number of ‘first generation’ retail warehouses approaching the end
of their useful life. Redevelopment proposals that reconfigure existing retail units are also addressed
in Policy TC16. Site Schedule mu29 identifies an opportunity to reconfigure existing retail warehouse
units to simultaneously meet a need for additional bulky goods floorspace and potentially to redress
an imbalance in DIY provision identified in the Greenwich Retail Study (2002). In reconfigurations site
access and servicing should be provided from Bugsby’s Way wherever possible.

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 41

 Town Centres
J4 Woolwich, Eltham and Greenwich are preferred locations for office developments, and the
Council will seek to retain good quality office accommodation in these centres. B1 development
at an appropriate scale will be acceptable in all Major, District and Local centres, providing
proposals:
i. Do not result in the unacceptable loss of retail and leisure sites, nor the unacceptable loss
of reasonable residential accommodation;
ii. Are conveniently related to, and adequately served by, public transport; and
iii. Comply with approved planning briefs, site schedules and other policies in the Plan.

Reason
2.34 Woolwich and Eltham are the Borough’s main office locations, and existing office accommodation
will be protected where office use is ongoing or likely.These centres and Greenwich are preferred
locations for office development, which could help to lessen dependence on commuting to Central
London (other suitable locations are identified in Policy J7). Other uses may be more appropriate
for office sites in some circumstances – see Policy J5.
2.35 Town centres are generally well served by public transport, and can also offer employees convenient
access to retail, leisure and other service facilities. They are thus generally suitable for larger office
developments. Offices can also stimulate demand for and investment in shopping and other town
centre services, to the benefit of town centre vitality and viability. Guidance in PPS 6: Planning for
Town Centres (2005) notes that in smaller town centres such development should be at a scale that
is appropriate to the centre.

Employment Sites Outside Defined Employment Locations

J5 The Council will seek to maximise the contribution to employment in the Borough from sites in
existing or previous employment use outside designated employment areas. Planning permission
will be granted for an alternative employment use, provided that it does not impact unacceptably
on residential amenity, the environment, traffic levels, road safety or parking congestion.
Planning permission for non employment uses will be granted only if the site is vacant and
evidence is submitted to clearly demonstrate at least one of the following:
i. The site is environmentally or physically unsuitable for any employment generating use.
ii. Marketing on fair price and terms for at least 2 years indicates there is no realistic prospect
of any form of employment use arising.
iii. Employment use is only viable within a mixed-use scheme.
Where development without employment use is justified, priority will be accorded to residential
use wherever practicable, and the maximum viable contribution to affordable housing will be
sought.

Reason
2.36 There are a number of industrial and business sites of varying sizes dispersed throughout
Greenwich.This is a sustainable pattern of economic development where business premises, services
and jobs are close to residential areas.The Council’s objectives are to retain as many of these sites
and businesses as is practicable, and to protect cheaper ‘seedbed’ accommodation, by resisting
premature change to higher value land uses (such as private housing). This will help to safeguard
locally accessible employment and services, and to meet the requirements of PPG4 Industrial and
Commercial Development and Small Firms and the London Plan by ensuring the continued supply of

42 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 premises for start-ups and small firms that often cannot afford premises on purpose-built industrial
estates. For the purposes of this policy employment uses are as defined in Paragraph 2.1.This policy
is not applicable to sites identified in the Site Schedule Proposals if the uses specified therein do not
include employment, industry or business.
2.37 Circumstances are identified in the policy where it will be more appropriate to redevelop former
industrial and business sites for other uses, or for a mix of uses including employment-generating
uses.This meets the general policy thrust of PPG3 Housing and the London Plan (including Mayoral
advice on Industrial Capacity) to make effective use of urban land and increase the supply of housing,
and to manage the supply of lower quality employment sites outside Strategic Employment
Locations. That said, the approach has been adapted to fit Greenwich circumstances. Key local
considerations are regeneration and job creation priorities in a relatively deprived Borough, an
established track record of managed and large scale release of surplus employment land through
the Development Plan review process, plus housing land allocations and planning permissions to
meet and exceed strategic housing provision targets. In the absence of any clear justification for
employment land release other than apparent lack of demand, it must be demonstrated that an
employment use is not forthcoming despite at least two years active site marketing on realistic
terms (well advertised, fair price, lease length, and occupier criteria). Up to five years marketing
history will be needed for readily developable sites that form part of a wider area in predominately
business use, especially if the alternative uses proposed would significantly fetter or compromise the
continuation of existing employment uses on adjoining sites. In either of these circumstances the
marketing period will be halved if the supply of vacant premises in the Borough exceeds 10% of the
total stock (excluding premises under construction), as recorded in either the Council’s Unitary
Development Plan Annual Monitoring Report or the DCLG’s Commercial and Industrial Property
Vacancy Statistics.
2.38 Where sites are wholly released from employment use the priority alternative use is housing where
it is suitable. In recognition of the potentially enhanced economics of provision for such
developments engendered by the change of use, 50% affordable housing will be sought, subject to
the considerations in Policy H14 and its Reasons.

Industrial and Business Developments

J6 The Council will seek to ensure that wherever possible industrial and business developments:
i. Are designed and specified to enable convenient adaption to a range of business uses, and
large units can be readily subdivided, and;
ii. Connect premises to broadband information technology infrastructure (or, if this is
demonstrably impractical, make provision for convenient connections to be made in the
future); and
iii. Address the need to provide business premises on flexible and affordable terms.

Reason
2.39 The Borough’s industrial and business accommodation varies in age and quality. Whilst older
premises provide affordable workspace and generally remain in productive use, some are reaching
the end of their economic life. The policy encourages new development, redevelopment or
refurbishment to maintain an adequate stock and range of premises. It also seeks to ensure new
premises are attractive to a broad range of industrial or commercial occupiers including technology
and knowledge-based industries, and are sufficiently flexible in design to be adaptable to changing
business requirements. In servicing new developments it should be ensured that they are connected
to existing broadband infrastructure wherever possible, and opportunities to upgrade servicing and
telecommunications on surrounding sites are improved rather than reduced. Section 106

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 43

 contributions may be sought to improve IT infrastructure. Mechanisms to secure other forms of
flexibility, for example tenancy lengths and occupier terms, will be considered where appropriate.
These are also becoming increasingly important as businesses seek to retain the freedom to adapt
to rapidly changing market conditions.

Types of Employment Use

B1 uses
J7 Activities within Use Class B1 will normally be permitted in the locations below, providing they
are appropriately scaled, environmental and traffic impacts are within acceptable levels, and the
site is not allocated or safeguarded for another use elsewhere in the Plan. Office developments
should be conveniently accessible by public transport.
i. Defined Industrial Areas (see Policy J1);
ii. Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3);
iii. Town Centres (see Policies J4 and TC16);
iv. Mixed Use Areas (see Policy W3); and
v. Other sites allocated for employment use (see Site Schedules) or in current or former
employment use (see Policy J5).

Reason
2.40 The B1 use class encompasses offices, research and development and light industry. B1 uses do not
normally create significant environmental problems, and thus can often be incorporated into mixed-
use schemes or within mainly residential areas.They can thus contribute to employment objectives
without conflicting with existing activities, providing development does not utilise land safeguarded
in the Plan for other purposes.
2.41 In terms of transport implications, light industrial activities usually require access to a main road for
heavy goods vehicles. Larger B1 developments, especially office uses, can generate high levels of car
traffic and road congestion, and therefore should be conveniently located for public transport.This
will ensure that the jobs created are accessible to people who do not have the use of a car whilst
offering car users the opportunity to travel by public transport; further reducing congestion and
road related pollution, meeting requirements set out in PPG13 Transport.Town centres are generally
well served in this regard, and are thus particularly suitable for office development (see Policy J4).

B8 Distributive Industries and Trade Wholesale uses

J8 Distribution, logisitics, warehousing and trade wholesale activities (use class B8) will be permitted
in Charlton Business Park and within Defined Industrial Areas, providing proposals do not result
in the closure of a viable and significant B1 or B2 use, and providing speculative developments
also offer opportunities for B1 and B2 uses including small businesses. Other environmentally
acceptable locations with good trunk road access will be considered on merit, particularly where
opportunities to transfer freight by rail and water are utilised (see also Policies W5 & M36-M39).

Reason
2.42 The London Plan advises Boroughs to promote positive policies for distributive uses, including
identifying sites and assisting in making land available. It advises sites within Preferred Industrial
Locations can be suitable for B8 use. Distribution is an industrial sector with potential for
employment growth across London over the Plan period, which on average offers employment

44 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 levels approaching that of manufacturing. It is also an important logistical complement to
manufacturing and other commercial activities essential for the efficient operation of the London
economy.
2.43 Use Class B8 also includes trade wholesalers and ‘trade counters’.To be acceptable on employment
sites such proposals must be clearly distinguishable from A1 retailing by demonstration that a
significant majority of their customers will be other businesses, and that sales to the general public
would be minimal and ancillary. Conditions may be used where appropriate to ensure retailing to
the public remains ancillary. Uses which combine wholesale and retail use will be considered
individually on merit against the most relevant parts of this policy and Policy TC16.
2.44 Developments to satisfy demand from the higher value distribution sector for large, high-bay
warehouses may cumulatively threaten existing businesses or constrain opportunities for other
types of businesses seeking to relocate or expand. Where Defined Industrial Area sites not last or
currently in B8 use are redeveloped to include B8 uses, planning conditions or legal agreements may
be applied to ensure premises are also suitable and available for B1 and/or B2 use, to protect
economic diversity, meet the needs of small firms and provide a range of employment opportunities.

Cultural and Creative Industries

J9 Town Centres and Mixed Use Areas are preferred locations for Cultural and Creative industries.
Office-based activities will also be appropriate in any B1 location identified in Policy J7, and
workshop-based activities in any B1 or industrial location. Other sites will be considered against
the relevant Plan policies for the use proposed.

Reason
2.45 Cultural and creative industries can be anything from a film and video production firm through to a
small crafts workshop, a theatre or the offices of a fashion designer. Whilst such activities generally
fall within Class B1 of the Use Classes Order (1987) they can include a wide range of other land uses.
The Cultural Strategy for Greenwich (2003) promotes the growth of these activities because they have
the potential to play a key role in economic regeneration and expansion. Cultural and creative
activities are the country’s fourth largest invisible earner, employing more than 1.4 million people
nationally. They are particularly important in the London context, as 80% of the nation’s artists,
cultural and creative activities are based in London.This concentration of cultural activity in London
provides the opportunity for the Borough to draw such activities into the area and to develop a
cultural industrial base. This would not only widen the Borough’s economic base but would also
increase the range of local job opportunities, while providing local people with access to cultural
activities.
2.46 The West Greenwich/Creekside area (straddling the borough boundary with Lewisham) is
recognised to be an emerging node for cultural and creative industries, a role promoted in the 2000
West Greenwich Development Framework. The policy seeks to support this role as it is widely
recognised that creative industries benefit from proximity to other creative industries. West
Greenwich and Woolwich also offer a range of commercial floorspace. In addition, the most
successful clusters tend to have access to a wider range of cultural resources including
entertainment and leisure facilities. These are typically to be found in town centres, which are
generally convenient for public transport. The policy also identifies other suitable locations, in
recognition that West Greenwich/Creekside will not be appropriate or convenient for all cultural
and creative industries.

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 45

 The Working Environment
2.47 This section addresses the need to encourage the development of safe, flexible and healthy working
environments with high standards of layout.

‘Bad Neighbour’ Industries

J10 Proposals for ‘bad neighbour’ industries, in particular ‘open yard’ uses or activities generating
significant emissions, will not be permitted where surrounding businesses or residential areas
would be unacceptably affected, or where the activity proposed would fetter prospects for the
occupation or redevelopment of underused industrial sites in the locality (see Policies E1 – E3).

Reason
2.48 To ensure that new business contribute to rather than detract from the performance and prospects
of the local economy, and to foster a healthy working environment. Significant provision has been
made for large scale ‘bad neighbour’ uses in the defined Aggregates Zone (see Policy J2), and the
SELCHP facility meets Borough requirements for disposal of local non-hazardous waste (see
paragraph 5.37). Small scale processing or recycling of locally produced non-hazardous waste or to
provide materials for use in the local area may be appropriate in environmentally acceptable
locations (see Policy E14).

Home Working
J11 Home working for business purposes will normally be supported. Planning permission for change
of use may be required if there is a significant intensification of business use, and will be refused
if the proposal would generate visitors, traffic, noise, vibration, fumes or other impact significantly
above levels that would be expected from residential use alone, to the extent that it would
demonstrably harm the amenity of nearby residents.

Reason
2.49 Home working in part of a dwelling where it is incidental to the residential use is not normally
‘Development’ and thus would not require planning permission. It is a valuable source of
employment for some Borough residents and is consistent in principle with the Council’s planning
policies, provided it does not cause a loss of housing accommodation or a loss of amenity to
neighbouring occupiers. Providing these broad principles are adhered to, the use of equipment at
home for business purposes can make a valuable contribution to sustainable development by
reducing work-related travel. However, PPG4 Industrial and Commercial Development and Small Firms
recognises that where the business use becomes dominant or intrusive, planning permission should
be required and may be refused. Home workers are advised to seek a determination in writing as
to whether or not a planning permission is required. Further guidance for Home workers on
whether or not planning permission is required is set out in an Advice Note.

Work/Live Units
J12 Work/live units will normally be permitted in Mixed Use areas, and other environmentally
acceptable sites not allocated for or occupied by an employment use as defined in paragraph 2.1.
Work/live units must include at least 20m2 (net) of specifically designed business accommodation
to standards suitable for B1 use, which will be safeguarded from change to purely residential use.

Reason
2.50 Work/live units are a hybrid use incorporating both business and residential areas. Business areas
should comprise at least 20 m2 (net), occupy not less than 25% of the total internal floor area, and

46 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 must be clearly separable from the residential element (preferably on a separate floor). It is
expected that they will include elements such as high speed information technology connections,
and be constructed to commercial standards, to includes elements such as service lifts, noise
insulation and ventilation, so as to be capable of accommodating a range of B1 uses and a level of
business-related disturbance that would not normally be acceptable in the use of a room for work
purposes in a traditional home. In effect, work/live units are considered to be an intermediate step
between home working and use of a separate small business unit.The ‘Live Work Network’, supported
by the Office of the Deputy Prime Minister and the Housing Corporation, provide further useful
advice, including a definition of ‘true live-work’ (www.liveworknet.com).
2.51 Work-live units are not considered well suited for family use, and residents should reasonably expect
some amenity loss through business-related disturbance. Conditions may be applied to mitigate or
avoid potential problems on surrounding residential areas that might arise from hours of operation,
use of machinery or hazardous materials, waste and emissions, and vehicular movements.
2.52 The Council wishes to safeguard and encourage the provision of suitable accommodation for start-
up enterprises, and it is recognised that work/live units can offer an affordable and flexible alternative
to small business units. The provision of rental work/live units, either self contained or as part of a
flexible work/live ‘complex’, is a Council objective. Accordingly as work/live units have a residential
element, the provision of affordable units for rent will be sought in developments exceeding 15 units
or 0.5 hectare (the threshold for affordable housing Policy H14).
2.53 However, the Council’s experience with work/live units suggests occupiers often perceive them as
living space and may seek permission for purely residential use, which is contrary to their purpose
and this policy. In granting consent for work/live units, conditions or legal agreements will be used to
prevent future residential use of the business accommodation, and to ensure that occupiers of self-
contained units use both the residential and business floorspace, and enforcement action may follow
where appropriate. Business rates will be applicable to the commercial floor area.
2.54 Work/live applications have also been used to attempt to circumvent restrictions on residential
development in areas allocated for other uses. In line with PPG4 Industrial and Commercial
Development and Small Firms, work/live units will not be permitted in Defined Industrial Areas and
Charlton Business Park, to avoid the introduction of residential uses that may be incompatible with
and fetter industrial operations. Nor will they be permitted on other business/industrial sites except
under conditions set out in Policy J5, to prevent the premature loss of land for dedicated industrial
and business use.

Employment Opportunities
2.55 This section encompasses access to employment, training for groups at a disadvantage in the labour
market, and community benefits from development.

Quality Jobs
J13 The Council will resist development proposals that result in the loss without qualitatively
adequate replacement of jobs suited to the needs and skills of local people, and will seek to
encourage employment development which provides good quality jobs, in particular for the most
disadvantaged groups in the Borough workforce.

Reason
2.56 The historic decline in manufacturing and industry in general has resulted in a mismatch between
job opportunities and local skills. Suitable jobs for both the skilled and unskilled, traditionally
employed in the industrial sector need to be both protected and promoted. Preventing the loss of

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 47

 land in active employment use will help to safeguard such employment that might otherwise be lost.
Training is also an important element in eradicating this skills mismatch (Policy J12).The unskilled are
becoming increasingly disadvantaged in the labour market. As a typically low income group they are
less able to move to find suitable work. Lacking transferable skills or the means to retrain, they are
less able to take advantage of new opportunities.
2.57 Other groups of workers or potential workers are also disadvantaged when competing for work
and/or suffer difficulties at work. People with disabilities suffer from access problems, minority ethnic
groups from discrimination, women from the lack of childcare facilities, and those on low incomes
from the high cost and inadequacy of public transport. Whilst possessing few powers of direct
intervention, the Council will encourage employment development that assists these groups and
others such as school leavers and the longer term unemployed.

Training and Business Support

J14 The Council will support the establishment of training centres, training workshops and other
training provision to develop the skills of the Borough's resident workforce, and to help those
facing disadvantage in the labour market. In new developments the Council will seek to negotiate
commitments or commitments and contributions to Greenwich Local Labour and Business, to
provide opportunities for local job seekers, contractors and local businesses.

Reason
2.58 Greenwich Local Labour and Business (GLLaB) plays a central role in improving the attractiveness of
the Borough as a business location to existing and incoming firms, and in providing employment and
subcontracting opportunities for local businesses and residents. GLLaB is in part financed by Section
106 developer contributions, which are sought on all major development proposals. It was
established with two primary objectives.
2.59 First, to train local people and help them secure employment, in particular groups who are often
disadvantaged in the job market such as women, minority ethnic groups and people with disabilities.
For regeneration policies to be effective, the local workforce must be suitably trained to take
advantage of new opportunities.Training opportunities supported by GLLaB reduce the mismatch
between available skills and skills required, and allow residents to compete for jobs in new and
growing sectors of the local economy. The resulting availability of a well-trained local workforce is
important in attracting new businesses, and with the constant pace of technological change the need
for training is on going.
2.60 Second, to create new business opportunities for local companies, advise local firms of contract
opportunities arising from the Borough’s extensive redevelopment and regeneration projects, and
raise their capacity to secure contacts and successfully deliver them. Access to competent local firms
and suppliers can assist in attracting new companies to the area.

Community Benefits
J15 In appraising employment development schemes, the Council will use planning agreements to
secure community and workplace benefits as appropriate, in accordance with Policy SC2.

Reason
2.61 Most developments normally provide benefits of one kind or another be they leisure facilities or job
opportunities, but these do not necessarily meet the needs of their host communities. It is the
Council’s aim to maximize and channel the benefits of development towards the community on the
one hand, and on the other to avoid the problems that often result from new developments, for
example the intensification of pressure on existing facilities such as childcare services.The provision

48 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY

 of community facilities also benefits the developer. For example, the provision of workplace creches
will help employers to encourage women to re enter the workforce. Other benefits may be sought
under Policies J6 (premises and infrastructure) and J14 (training and business support).

Accessibility
J16 All employment developments, including refurbishment and conversions, should be designed to
meet the needs of visitors and employees with disabilities unless demonstrably impractical.

Reason
2.62 People with disabilities suffer higher levels of unemployment than the Borough average. Employment
opportunities are often unnecessarily restricted by the physical design of buildings, which can make
access or use difficult or impossible. Ensuring that the buildings are accessible and equipped to meet
their needs will open up the range of employment opportunities available to people with disabilities.
See Policy D6.

JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY 49

50 JOBS AND THE LOCAL ECONOMY
 3. HOUSING
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
3.1. The Council recognises the major role housing plays in shaping the social, economic and physical
character of the Borough.The general policies are:

SH1 To provide sufficient land to allow for the completion of at least 16,100 net additional dwellings
between 1997 and 2016.

SH2 To ensure the development of balanced and mixed communities and to meet the varying needs
of households, especially those with special needs, by providing a suitable range of dwellings by
type, size and affordability.

SH3 To retain and improve the existing housing stock.

SH4 To provide a high quality sustainable residential environment and to ensure that new housing is
built to a high quality design.

SH5 The scale of housing need in the Borough for affordable housing is such that the Council will seek
to ensure that at least 35% of the dwellings provided between 1997 and 2016 are affordable to
those on low and lower incomes.

SH6 The Council will facilitate the regeneration and renewal of South Greenwich to alleviate the
physical and social isolation of the area and to enable the development of mixed communities
and sustainable neighbourhoods.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

Households
3.2 Between 1991 and 2004 the number of households in the Borough increased from 86,500 to
93,200, reflecting the major housing developments in Thamesmead and on the Waterfront coupled
with the continued rise in smaller households. This increase is expected to continue with an
estimated 103,200 households by 2011 and 105,400 by 2016. From 1971 to 1991 average
household size fell from 2.85 to 2.45 persons. However the most recent projections assume this will
remain stable upto 2016. (GLA 2003 Demographic Projections Scenario 8.1).
3.3 The nature of these households is also changing. There is a significant growth in single person
households such that they comprised 32% of households in 2001, estimated to rise to 34% in 2011
and to 36% in 2016.The increase in these households accounts for between 70% and 80% of the
increase in the total number of households.The increase is largely made up of an increase in single
person households between the ages of 30 and 64 who increase as a proportion of single person
households from 35% in 1991 to 55% in 2016. In contrast the number of one person households
of pensionable age declines slightly but as a proportion of one person households falls from 52% in
1991 to 33% in 2016.The number of lone parent households is expected to rise upto 2016. (Source:
GLA 2000 Demographic Projections). There are about 12,000 people with disabilities in the
Borough, whose housing needs require particular attention. There are people with mental health
requirements and people with learning needs who wish to live independently with support in the
community.

HOUSING 51
3.4 Housing needs are becoming more varied as a result of the changes in household and population
structure shown above and in Part One.Add these to existing unmet need and there are formidable
issues to be tackled in the next decade. This will increase the demand for affordable housing,
accessible housing which can meet the needs of people with mobility difficulties; and for types of
housing which provide support.

Housing Stock
3.5 Between 1991 and 2001 the number of dwellings in the Borough increased by about 7%, making
housing the largest user of land in the Borough, occupying roughly 35% of all land. The London
Housing Capacity Study (GLA 2000) carried out for 1997 to 2016 shows potential for 14,690
additional dwellings mainly from large sites (11,256 units), small sites (870 units), conversions (1,120
units) and windfalls (1,440). Over 70% of these dwellings had planning permission at the time of the
study. If ‘non conventional capacity’ - non self-contained accommodation (1,200 units) and a
reduction in vacant dwellings (200 units) - is taken into account this potential increases to 16,100
dwellings (800 per annum).The latter figure is included in the London Plan as the additional housing
provision figure for the Borough. Between 1997 and 2004 planning permission has been granted for
20,713 dwellings (net). At 2,589 dwellings per annum this significantly exceeds the annual capacity
estimate. The planning permissions include 10,010 units on Greenwich Peninsula (in addition to
those being provided at Greenwich Millennium Village), over 1,800 units at the Gallions Reach Urban
Village and over 1,000 units in the Royal Arsenal. Residential completions between 1997 and 2004
totalled 8,198 units (net). At 1,025 dwellings per annum this is 27% above the capacity estimate, and
it is anticipated it will be further exceeded as planning permissions are implemented.
3.6 The tenure of housing has changed with the 1970s with the proportion of public sector housing
rising to 47% in 1981 followed by a decline to 38% in 1991 and to 29% in 2001, as a consequence
of right to buys and stock transfers to housing associations. Owner occupation increased over the
same period. In the 1980s the private rented sector declined but increased in the 1990s, while
Housing Association / Registered Social Landlord stock expanded to around 5% in 1991, and to 10%
by 2001.
3.7 Nearly one-third of the stock was built before 1919 and a further one-third was built between 1919
and 1939. Housing conditions in the Borough, particularly in the older properties, are of serious
concern with one in ten dwellings in the private sector either in serious disrepair or unfit. Significant
improvements are needed to the Council housing stock to bring it up to a good standard of repair
with modern facilities. Poor housing conditions are often accompanied by a poor residential
environment, both visually and physically, a lack of a usable amenity open space, and noise and air
pollution.

Mixed and Balanced Communities

3.8 It is important that the large scale of new housing in the plan period provides mixed and balanced
communities. This is recognised in PPG3 and Circular 6/98 which encourage local planning
authorities to develop such communities. Developments should provide housing of different types,
size and affordability. The aim should be that individuals / households are able to pass through all
phases of life, if they so wish, within one community. New housing must also meet the varying needs
of individual households. It must be aimed at meeting not only general housing need but also the
specific housing needs of the population, e.g. minority ethnic groups, older people, people with
disabilities, people with learning difficulties, and young and single people. The Greenwich Strategy
aims to offer a range of homes that meet the lifestyle needs of all sections of our communities.

52 HOUSING
 Housing Need and Affordability
3.9 The Council’s Housing Needs Survey (2002) found that a significant proportion of households in
the Borough could not afford to buy or rent on the open market. This reflected that whilst entry
level prices for home ownership range from £74,000 for a one-bedroomed home to £154,400 for
a four bedroom property and minimum private rents were from £470 to £933 per month, average
earned household income was only £19,699 per annum.The survey went on to identify affordable
housing needs arising from the need to reduce the backlog of households in unsuitable
accommodation (2,377 households, to be met at a rate of 475 households per annum over 5 years),
from newly forming households (3,158 households per annum), minus the supply of affordable
housing (2,287 households per annum). This gives a net affordable housing requirement over the
next 5 years of 1,346 units per annum. Over the 5 years to 2007 there is therefore a need to
provide an additional 6,730 affordable dwellings.The Study also shows that over 10 years the annual
requirement for affordable housing is 1,109 units per annum, totalling 11,090 additional affordable
dwellings by 2011.The analysis concluded that in terms of types of affordable housing, the priority
need is for socially rented housing with a small element of shared ownership and that low cost
market housing does not meet any housing need.
3.10 Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences for both the Londonwide and local economy
and local communities. (Affordable Homes for London, London Pride Partnership 1998 / The Impact of
High Cost Housing in Greenwich, LRC, 1989,The Report of the Mayor’s Housing Commission 2000).
3.11 The London Plan sets out a strategic target that 50% of all additional dwellings should be affordable.
The target includes affordable housing from all sources and not just those secured through planning
obligations. Within the Mayor’s 50% target, he proposes a split of 70% social rented and 30%
intermediate housing. The London Plan states that targets in UDPs should be based on realistic
assessments of need and supply. It recognises that such targets should be sensitive to the economic
and social circumstances of different parts of London.
3.12 The affordable housing needs identified in the Housing Needs Survey – for both 5 and 10 years –
exceeds the housing capacity identified in the Borough (800 per annum). It is anticipated that the
capacity estimates will be exceeded but not at a sufficient scale to satisfy the affordable housing
needs. It would be inappropriate, unachievable and not the role of the planning system, to seek 100%
affordable housing. In these circumstances, the Council considers a 35% target justified, taking into
account strategic housing need and the strategic housing target set out in the London Plan, Borough
housing need and the fact that housing supply is on target to significantly exceed the dwelling
provision figure in Policy S.H.1 (see para 3.5).This target is reasonably practicable given the Council’s
extensive and successful experience of negotiating for affordable housing which contributes to
strategic and Borough needs and is supported by the Three Dragons / Nottingham Trent University
report ‘Affordable Housing in London’. It is recognised that where the economics of housing
provision permit, for example on readily developable windfall sites, 50% affordable housing will be
sought subject to Policy H14.This will also apply to greenfield sites in the Kidbrooke Development
Area (See Policy H4 and reason) and the change of use of employment sites outside defined
employment locations (See Policy J5 and reason), where a different approach to the levels of
affordable housing is justified.
3.13 The Council’s Housing Strategy (2002-2007) vision for housing is ‘In 2010 we want Greenwich to
be a place where everyone is able to afford a decent home of his or her choice, and where people
feel proud and able to contribute to the life of their local community’. By this is meant:
Decent good quality homes: well designed and maintained, safe, secure, healthy, warm and dry, and
part of a good quality urban environment;
Affordable homes: a range of housing options that are within people’s ability to pay;

HOUSING 53
 Appropriate homes: a balance of the right type, size and tenure across the Borough, for all types of
households;
Well managed homes: within a clean, diverse and well maintained environment, whether public or
private;
Homes for all: an inclusive community from which no one is excluded because of discrimination, or
because a suitable housing option is not available.

Policies
Quantity Of Housing Policies
3.14 The two key areas of policy are to:
• Provide new homes
• Prevent the loss of existing homes and housing land

New Housing
H1 Residential development, including the change of use of existing buildings, will be acceptable on
environmentally suitable sites, including sites allocated on the Proposals Map and in the Site
Schedules, and where the residential use of the site would not conflict with other policies and
proposals of the Plan. In the interests of achieving sustainable development, the re-use of
previously developed land will be promoted to the extent that 90% of new dwellings will be
provided on such land.

Reason
3.15 The increasing number of households and existing housing need combine to produce a requirement
for additional dwellings in the Borough. The London Plan recommends a minimum provision of
16,100 dwellings between 1997 and 2016. As set out in paragraph 3.5, the rate of planning
permission for new dwellings is on target to significantly exceed that figure and the rate of planning
completions is anticipated to exceed it as planning permissions are implemented. The two most
significant areas are the continuing development of Thamesmead (Policy W4) and the residential
part of the mixed-use development of the Greenwich Peninsula (Policy W3). Brownfield sites have
been prioritised such that they comprise the vast majority of sites and significantly exceed the 60%
target in PPG3. The Borough has set a target that over 90% dwellings are provided on previously
developed land. In the development of sites sustainable residential quality principles will be applied
consistent with the location of the sites to public transport, car parking provision and the character
of the area. (Policies H7 - H10). To enable the development of the allocated land the Council will
grant planning permissions (the Schedules state where planning permissions have been granted
already) and will use its powers and influence to overcome infrastructure problems constraining
development. New community services should accompany major residential developments, (Policy
C3). Small-scale ancillary and supporting commercial uses may also be appropriate. Developments
of 15 units or more should provide a significant proportion of affordable housing (H14).

54 HOUSING
 Preventing The Loss Of Housing
H2 Planning permission will not be granted for a change of use or redevelopment that would result
in the net loss of residential accommodation except in the following circumstances:
i. Where it is not possible to achieve the required quality of provision through redevelopment
without a net loss of dwellings;
ii. Change of use to another form of residential accommodation consistent with Policy H21
(Supported Housing);
iii. Change of use to guesthouses and bed and breakfast accommodation in accordance with
the criteria in Policy T2;
iv. Change of use to local community services in accordance with the criteria in Policies C4
and C5;
v. Where a reasonable standard of accommodation cannot be attained in the larger town
centres in accordance with Policy TC21.

Reason
3.16 It is important to safeguard the existing residential stock, as the need for housing remains, and to
reduce the need to find replacement housing land. Where residential land or buildings are
redeveloped the Council will normally insist that existing residential floorspace and units be
replaced. However it is also recognised, particularly in the redevelopment of large estates, that a net
loss of housing may occur as a result of an improved residential environment being created,
notwithstanding the application of sustainable residential quality principles. The policy also sets out
exceptions for changes of use to other forms of residential accommodation.

Effective Use Of Dwellings

H3 The Council will seek to make good use of residential buildings and will particularly examine
ways to encourage and assist empty residential accommodation back into housing use.

Reason
3.17 The effective use of existing residential buildings will not only enable a better use of resources but
will assist in meeting the housing requirements of the Borough. In particular, empty residential
properties should be brought back into housing use. The major problem is primarily with vacant
properties in the private sector. The Council’s Empty Homes Strategy sets out a coordinated
approach to this issue.

HOUSING 55
 Kidbrooke Development Area
H4 The Kidbrooke Development Area, as defined on the Proposals Map, is designated as a mixed-
use, residential led, regeneration area. The redevelopment and regeneration of this area will be
required to deliver the following objectives:
i. Creating a mixed neighbourhood and community integrated with the surrounding area
providing a sustainable environment;
ii. Provision of a total of 4,400 dwellings which will include the replacement of 1,900 affordable
homes;
iii. Creating quality open spaces;
iv. Providing a local shopping centre which acts as a commercial hub for the area;
v. An improved transport interchange and public transport to and from the area.
vi. On greenfield sites in the development area identified for housing development, in
recognition of the economics of housing provision, 50% affordable housing will be sought.
Development proposals will be expected to take account of the proposed masterplan which is
to be the basis of a supplementary planning document. Any proposals which would be
detrimental to the implementation of any aspect of the masterplan will be resisted.

Reason
3.18 In 1999 the Council and its partners were successful in a Single Regeneration Bid for the South
Greenwich Area, ‘Building New Links’.The bid has three strategic themes:
(1) Tackling social exclusion and promoting opportunity.
(2) Raising the level of safety.
(3) Transforming housing and local infrastructure.
3.19 A key part of the third theme has been a land use reassessment of the land around Kidbrooke
station including the Ferrier Estate. A masterplan that assumes redevelopment of the Kidbrooke
Development Area has been prepared and has been subject to extensive consultation with both
residents and landowners. The aim is to create a mixed neighbourhood, integrated with the
surrounding area, which provides a quality and sustainable environment for its residents, workers and
visitors. Kidbrooke is recognised as an Area of Intensification in the London Plan. The proposals
provide for the:
• Demolition of 1,900 homes on the Ferrier Estate
• Development of 4,400 new homes, including 1,900 affordable homes
• Development of a more traditional street pattern providing a safer environment
• Creation of a new central park and better access to open space
• Increased access to employment and training opportunities
• Improvements to the road network and transport infrastructure, particularly to the north of
the Borough
• Development of new community, commercial and retail facilities as part of a new local centre
around a transport hub.
3.20 The masterplan will be progressed as the Kidbrooke Development Area Supplementary Planning
Document. It is vital that all developments contribute in an integrated way to the regeneration of
this area.Therefore development proposals which seek to anticipate the masterplan and where they
will be detrimental to the coherent regeneration of the area will be resisted.The reconfiguration of
open spaces has led to proposals for the development of a limited number of greenfield sites. On
these sites it is considered the economics of housing provision will allow for a target of 50%

56 HOUSING
 affordable housing to be pursued and this will be taken into account in applying Policy H14 in the
Kidbrooke Development Area.

Conversions
H5 To protect small and medium sized family dwellings and the local environment, the sub division
of residential property will not be permitted where there are any of the following circumstances:
i. The original premises are less than 1,200 sqft (111.48 sqm) (net floor area) excluding any
garages or less than 1,400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where they form part of a terrace.
ii. On street parking problems aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic and pedestrians in
the area (see Policy M27).
iii. The character and appearance of the surrounding area and buildings is adversely affected.

H6 The sub division of residential property will be permitted if the following criteria are fulfilled:
i. Internal space and design standards are acceptable.
ii. There is adequate space for and access to dustbins which, in all appropriate cases, should be
in suitably located and designed enclosures.
iii. Sound insulation is installed to alleviate the problems of noise both between the new
residential units and between them and neighbouring dwellings, and sound insulation and
ventilation treatment against road and railway noise is installed on noise sensitive facades.
iv. Adequate, safe and secure access to all dwellings is provided.
v. Each unit of accommodation is self contained.
vi. Dwellings intended for families are provided on the ground floor or have direct access to a
garden.
vii. Any extensions or additions are limited to an appropriate size and meet with the design
Policies (D9 and D10).
viii. Car parking in the surrounding grounds meets the car parking standards and is dealt with
sensitively (Policy M23).

Reason for H5 and H6

3.21 A further way of providing more new homes will be to allow the sub division of dwellings.They can
assist in balancing the type and size of dwellings to population needs, particularly small households.
However, the existing stock of small and medium size family dwellings still have a vital and versatile
role to play in meeting housing need and should be protected. The policy is tighter for terraced
properties in recognition of the need to retain medium sized terraced properties for family
accommodation in areas of conversion pressure and the greater difficulty of providing an acceptable
standard of conversion (e.g. impact of noise, car parking).
3.22 For each application received reference will be made to existing conversions in each street, the
nature of accommodation provided, the impact on the environment and the character of the area.
Special consideration should be given to the division of the garden areas with the aim that all units
have access to garden spaces. All conversions will be expected to be self contained, meet internal
space and design standards and provide a suitable mix of dwellings. (Policies H7 and H16). The
Council has more detailed guidelines for standards of conversions in Advice Note No. 3. Changes
of use to non self-contained accommodation are covered under Policy H.16.

HOUSING 57
 Quality Of Housing Policies
3.23 The Council’s policies aim to:
i. Achieve a high quality of housing design and environment.
ii. Secure the improvement of sub standard housing and improve residential environments.

Housing Design
H7 New residential development, redevelopment or conversions will be expected to achieve a high
quality of housing design and environment. In considering proposals the Council will take into
account the key relationships between the character of the area, site location and public
transport accessibility, car parking (Policies D5, M26 and M28) and housing densities (Policies H8
and H9) and give particular regard to:
i. The achievement of the Building Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating,
which addresses a wide variety of environmental issues (Policy D1)
ii. The design of the development is consistent with Policies D1 D3.
iii. Safety and security of residents and public (see Policy D7).
iv. Landscaping the environment around the dwellings.
v. Dwellings intended for families should normally have direct access to a private garden (see
H11).
vi. Dwelling mix is consistent with Policy H15.
vii. Aspect and orientation.
viii. Privacy of adjoining occupiers.
ix. An acceptable level of noise insulation being achieved by means of sensitive design, layout
and in developments vulnerable to transportation noise and vibration. (Policy E3).
x. The provision of new housing to Lifetime Homes standards. (Policy H17).
xi. Waste recycling. (Policy E15)
Developments over 25 units should be accompanied by a Design Statement (Policy D2).

Reason
3.24 A key objective of PPG3 ‘Housing’ (2000) is to promote good design in new housing developments
to create a high quality living environment where people will choose to live. It expects developments
to:
• create places and spaces for people which are attractive, have their own distinct identity but
respect and enhance local character;
• promote designs and layouts which are safe and take account of public health, crime prevention
and community safety considerations;
• focus on the quality of places and living environments being created and give priority to the
needs of pedestrians rather than the movement and parking vehicles;
• avoid inflexible planning standards and reduce road widths, traffic speeds and promote safer
environments for pedestrians; and
• promote the energy efficiency of new housing were possible.

58 HOUSING
3.25 The Borough has a number of contrasting residential environments. All new housing developments
should both provide a high quality of design and contribute positively to these surroundings. The
policy sets out the factors the Council will take into account to ensure these are achieved.The close
interrelationship of these with the location of sites (Policy H1), public transport accessibility, car
parking standards (Policies D5, M26 and M8) and housing densities (Policies H8 and H9) to create
sustainable residential environments is acknowledged, as is demonstrated by the work on
Sustainable Residential Quality commissioned by the former LPAC. Larger developments because
of their extent and impact are expected to be accompanied by a Design Statement which show
how the proposals take into account urban design principles. New housing development should
incorporate in design and layout, protection against transportation noise and/or vibration and where
appropriate other noise, to preserve the amenity of future residents. (Policy E3). The Building
Research Establishment’s ‘EcoHomes’ rating is a flexible and independently verified environmental
assessment method, with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent.To
achieve sustainable development, developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard. A
post-construction validation report will be required by planning condition. Residential developments
on the Greenwich Peninsula and the Gallions Ecopark in Thamesmead are already being built to
such a standard. Further details are available at www.bre.co.uk/ecohomes. Extensions to residential
properties are considered under Design Policies D9 and D10.

Density
H8 When considering proposals for housing developments the Council will give priority to securing
a high quality environment for residents and making the best sustainable use of land, having regard
to the location of the site, to the individual characteristics of the site and the character of the
surrounding area. Densities which will be considered appropriate are set out in Policy H9.

H9 Subject to Policies H7 and H8, the Council will permit development at the following densities:
i. 150- 250 HRH (60- 100 HRA) for dwellings for families.
ii. 170- 300 HRH (70 - 120 HRA) for non-family dwellings.
iii. 200 - 450 HRH (80- 182 HRA) for non-family dwellings on sites in the Borough’s Major and
District Centres (See Table TC1) or with immediate access to a network of good public
transport facilities.
iv Over 450 HRH (182 HRA) for non-family dwellings will be accepted in exceptional
circumstances, on sites of high public transport accessibility, where it can be demonstrated
that the design is of exceptional quality.
The above ranges will be applied to mixed residential developments in proportion to category.

Reason for H8 and H9

3.26 The density policies seek to secure a sustainable use of housing land consistent with achieving a high
quality environment. Within that context the appropriate density on a site is based on the
relationship between the location of the site, public transport accessibility, car parking standards and
the character of the surrounding area. A distinction is made between different household types, e.g.
single people, older people and families. In applying this policy it is recognised that many areas of the
Borough, particularly in the south, are suburban in character and have lower levels of public
transport accessibility. This approach is consistent with the guidance contained in PPG3 and the
London Plan which emphasise making the best sustainable use of land and achieving higher densities
at places with good public transport accessibility.
3.27 The policies recognise that densities should be higher at places with good public transport
accessibility, principally the Borough town centres and in those areas of the Waterfront well linked

HOUSING 59
 into public transport. For the purposes of the policy, a key factor in assessing public transport
accessibility will be ‘Public Transport Accessibility Level’ (PTAL). Sites with good public transport
accessibility would have a PTAL of 4, and sites of high public transport accessibility would have a
PTAL of 5 or 6 (See Policy M13).The score for each site will need to be assessed on an individual
basis. For sites with good / high public transport accessibility, car parking standards should be lower
enabling a higher density development where this would not exacerbate on street parking problems
in areas of the Borough where such car parking is at capacity.The Policy recognises that there may
be exceptional circumstances, for sites with high public transport accessibility, where densities
outside the ranges indicated may be justifiable. Such schemes must demonstrate exemplary urban
design. An example of such a site is the exceptional and unique circumstances on the northern
Greenwich Peninsula. In contrast, it is also recognised that to preserve the residential character of
some Conservation Areas, a lower density may be appropriate.
3.28 Higher densities can play a role in sustaining local services and transport. They can also impose
additional pressures on such services particularly where development, either on its own or
cumulatively, is of a significant scale and intensity. Developments in the latter category will be
expected to assess what these additional pressures are and demonstrate how they are to be met
and / or mitigated. (See Policy C3)
3.29 For the purpose of density calculation, habitable rooms include all separate living rooms, including
bedrooms, but excluding bathrooms, toilets, landings, halls and lobbies. Kitchens will be counted as
habitable where they have an overall floor area greater than 13 sq. m. The net residential area, (as
defined in PPG3 Annex C), should be used for density calculations. For mixed-use schemes the
calculation should be made by applying the same proportion of residential floorspace to total
floorspace of the scheme to the site area of the scheme.

Backland and Infill Development

H10 Residential development on backland and infill sites will only be favourably considered where all
the following criteria are fulfilled:
i. There is no unreasonable reduction in the amount of amenity space enjoyed by existing
residents, especially for those in houses with the shared use of a garden.
ii. There is no unreasonable loss of privacy from overlooking adjoining houses and/or their
back gardens.
iii. There is no unreasonable increase in noise and disturbance from traffic gaining access.
iv. There is no significant loss of wildlife habitats, particularly trees or shrubs which would
adversely affect the appearance and character of the area.
v. The character of the area is maintained with particular regard to the scale, design and
density of the development.

Reason
3.30 The pressure for land for new housing in the Borough means that infill and backland sites are
increasingly considered for housing development. However, the sensitive nature of these sites
requires development only to be allowed where it will not adversely affect the local environment
and where it will not lead to over development. In addition, it is important to safeguard the interests
of residents in surrounding houses by ensuring that residential amenity such as garden space, privacy
and the character of the area is maintained. In the Borough’s tight urban fabric the opportunities for
an acceptable form of this development are increasingly limited as the number of available sites
decreases.

60 HOUSING
 Amenity Space and Gardens
H11 In new residential schemes and conversions developers will be expected to provide sufficient
amenity space to meet the needs of residents. Family housing should normally have direct access
to a private garden. In flats a terrace, good-sized balcony or enclosed communal gardens (not
accessible to the general public) should be provided.

Reason
3.31 Gardening, sitting out, children’s play, clothes drying and DIY are among the various activities for
which a garden or some form of private outdoor space is essential. Gardens have an important role
to play in encouraging biodiversity and generally raising the environmental quality of an area. New
developments and conversions should aim to secure some usable private amenity space for all
households. Dwellings with direct access to private gardens are the most appropriate form of
provision for families with children.
3.32 As a guide, a minimum garden area of 50m2 in family housing should be provided.This is in addition
to any space occupied by front gardens, which serves a different, though important function. Sizes
and layouts of gardens should take into account the character of the local area, privacy and security.
There may be scope for a lower level of private amenity in some locations, for example, in
developments adjacent to public open space or on conversion schemes where site constraints may
affect the ability to provide the desired level of amenity space.
3.33 The Council will seek an agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2, to put into
place mechanisms and initial funding for future management and maintenance of communal amenity
space.

Children’s Play Areas

H12 In residential developments that include over 50 units of family housing, suitably equipped and
well designed children’s play areas should be provided.

Reason
3.34 Children make up around 20% of the Borough’s population. All children benefit from having access
to safe, communal play space.This provides opportunities for recreation, exercise and social contact.
3.35 The National Playing Fields Association (NPFA) recommends minimum standards for children’s
outdoor play space of between 0.6 - 0.8 ha (1.5 – 2 a) per 1000 population.This includes 0.2 - 0.3
ha for outdoor equipped playgrounds for children of all ages and 0.4 - 0.5 ha for casual or informal
play space within housing areas. Play space should be distinguished from open space, a separate
requirement dealt with elsewhere (Policy O9). NPFA Standards apply regardless of whether people
have access to good-sized gardens or not. Play areas offer opportunities for social development for
adults and children, which gardens do not. In areas where amenity provision is poor, standards above
the minimum will be needed. Provision should cater for a range of ages: the size and type of facility
taking into account existing provision and the population profile of families nearby.
3.36 Walking time is an important factor determining whether a play area will be used by a particular
age group: very young children do not walk far. NPFA propose three types of play areas: local areas
for play (LAP), less than a minutes walk away; local equipped area for play (LEAP); and
neighbourhood equipped area for play (NEAP). Each incorporates features designed to encourage
use within an appropriate age group. NEAPs can be incorporated in a park or area of open space;
a large development may require several LAPs.
3.37 Design and siting of play areas should take into account accessibility, safety, including proximity to
main roads, railways, waterways and other potential hazards, and visibility. Play areas should be

HOUSING 61
 located so as to minimise conflict and allow for a level of informal supervision. Further guidance can
be found in The Six Acre Standard: Minimum Standards for Outdoor Playing Space published by The
National Playing Fields Association (2001).
3.38 In some locations, the Council may accept the provision of a play area in a nearby area of public
open space rather than within the development itself, where more beneficial to the local community.
Alternatively, a financial contribution towards enhancing existing, nearby provision may be
acceptable.
3.39 Where the children’s play area is principally of benefit to the occupiers of the development itself,
the Council will seek to make legal agreements with developers in accordance with Policy SC2, to
put into place mechanisms and initial funding for future maintenance.

Housing Improvement
H13 The Council will encourage the improvement or refurbishment of the housing stock in areas
where it is particularly needed along with upgrading the overall environment.

Reason
3.40 There is concern over the growing deterioration in the housing stock. Sustainable development
emphasises the renewal and continued use of such properties. In response, a programme of
improvement is needed that recognises that disrepair is not only concentrated in some areas but is
more widespread throughout the Borough. The Private Sector Improvement Areas In Greenwich’
report (LRC 1995) identifies such areas, in particular Plumstead. Where area based initiatives are
pursued they should be linked to environmental improvements (see Policy D32). The Council’s
Housing Strategy Statement sets out the targeted programme and resources needed for renewal
of both Council stock and other property in the Borough.This has and continues to be integrated
with improvements taking place as part of wider regeneration programmes. See also Policy H2 on
the redevelopment of housing.

Variety Of Housing Policies

3.41 To ensure a sufficient variety of housing is available for the different types of households and to
provide mixed and balanced communities, the Council’s policies will be to:
1. Provide a well-integrated mix of decent homes of different types and tenures to support a range
of household sizes, ages and incomes.
2. Provide appropriate forms of housing for people with special needs.
3.42 The Council supports the contribution to housing variety that can be made by Registered Social
Landlords and others which allocate dwellings on the basis of housing need, particularly those which
seek to meet the needs of disadvantaged groups, including special housing needs. It recognises the
key role they play, particularly the smaller specialist housing associations, in providing for special
housing needs, e.g. supported housing, housing for single people, housing for minority ethnic groups.

Affordable Housing
H14 Housing and mixed-use developments with 15 or more units or residential sites of 0.5 hectare
or more are expected to provide a significant element of affordable dwellings on site.The precise
percentage, distribution and type of affordable housing will be determined by the particular
circumstances and characteristics of the site and the development, the economics of housing
provision, other planning objectives and the scale of need for affordable housing as set out in
Policy SH5.

62 HOUSING
 Reason
3.43 PPG3 ‘Housing’ and Circular 6/98 ‘Planning and Affordable Housing’ recognise that the need for
affordable housing is a material planning consideration to be taken into account in formulating
development plan policies and in determining planning applications. In the Borough most people
who do not yet have their own separate dwelling cannot afford to buy or rent at market prices a
dwelling suited to their needs (see para 3.9). Lack of affordable housing has damaging consequences
for the local economy and the local community.The Council therefore intends that at least 35% of
all new homes should be affordable to meet the needs of people who cannot afford to rent or buy
at market price.
3.44 The policy, Circular 6/98 and the London Plan recognise that the precise proportion of affordable
housing to be achieved is subject to negotiation on individual schemes taking into account the
factors set out in the policy. In some instances, where the economics of housing provision permit,
for example on readily developable windfall sites, 50% affordable housing will be sought (See also
para 3.12 and Policies H4 and J5). To secure the affordable housing effectively in the long term,
developers are encouraged to involve a registered social landlord to own and/or manage the
affordable housing. This will be confirmed through the use of appropriate conditions and/or legal
agreements. Where, exceptionally, a registered social landlord is not involved the Council will use
conditions and / or legal obligations as appropriate to secure the future occupancy for people in
housing need.The affordable housing that is provided should be distributed across the site to help
create mixed communities.
3.45 The site thresholds for affordable housing are consistent with the Housing Needs Survey and the
guidance in the proposed changes to PPG3 published in July 2003. The thresholds also apply to
mixed use schemes including residential use where the 15 unit threshold is met.
3.46 Circular 6/98 suggests that affordable housing encompasses both low-cost market and subsidised
housing that will be available to people who cannot afford to rent or buy houses generally available
on the open market. Both PPG3 and Circular 6/98 state that it is for local authorities to define what
is considered to be affordable based on local assessments. The London Plan recognises, and the
Housing Needs Survey confirms, that in the Borough low cost market housing does not meet any
housing need. Therefore for the purpose of this policy affordable housing is defined as housing to
meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access
appropriate housing in the local housing market. In practice this is social rented housing and
intermediate housing.
3.47 The provision of intermediate housing (including key worker housing) through shared ownership
initiatives, sub-market renting etc also forms part of the affordable housing. To accord with the
London Plan, it is proposed that the affordable housing, be provided as 70% social rented and 30%
intermediate housing. However the Housing Needs Survey concluded that shared ownership,
(which is a key element of intermediate housing), will only help a small number of households, with
the greatest need being for social rented housing. In this context intermediate housing should form
a component of the affordable housing, but the proportion will relate to the need to achieve mixed
and balanced communities.Therefore in areas with a large extent of social housing, the proportion
will be 30%, whilst conversely in other areas it will be lower. The intermediate housing will be
secured through a legal agreement. The agreement will include an Affordable Housing Marketing
Plan which will include the following objectives:
a) in respect of intermediate units with Social Housing Grant priority is to be given initially in equal
proportions to households in the following income bands:
i. households with a gross income of between £18,000 - £25,000.
ii. households with a gross income of between £25,001 - £30,000.

HOUSING 63
 iii. households with a gross income of between £30,001 -£36,000.
provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase is no greater
than 40%
b) in respect of intermediate units without Social Housing Grant and in respect of affordable
housing discount for sale units, priority is to be given to households where gross income is up
to £40,000 provided that the proportion of disposable income required to fund the purchase
is no greater than 50%.
The application of the financial figures above will be subject to RPI indexation through the plan
period (February 2004 base).
3.48 There is a presumption in favour of the on site provision of affordable housing where it is viable to
do so. Only in the following exceptional criteria will off site provision or financial contributions be
acceptable. Firstly, where the site / building configuration or layout makes the provision impractical.
Secondly, where it would contribute to the provision of mixed and balanced communities, such as
where affordable housing is already concentrated and where further affordable housing would not
contribute to mixed and balanced communities. Any financial contribution will be reserved for the
provision of affordable housing elsewhere in the Borough and secured through a legal agreement.

Housing Mix
H15 A mix of housing types and sizes will be expected in all developments including conversions,
particularly on developments over 25 dwellings.The mix on each site will vary according to the
location of the development and the character of the surrounding area. Both large and small units
should be included and dwellings for families should have direct access to a garden. Factors such
as schemes for special needs groups or where there is a poor external environment will affect
the mix. Schemes with predominantly family housing should, as far as is practicable, be related to
the adequate provision of accessible nursery and primary schools, local shops, play areas and
amenities.

Reason
3.49 PPG3 ‘Housing’ recognises that planning policies should be used to secure an appropriate mix of
dwelling size and type in new developments and conversions to meet the changing composition of
households in the area. It is recognised in particular that there is an increasing number of small
households in the Borough but this does not justify new developments being overwhelmed by
smaller dwellings. Rather the most satisfactory solution is for all new developments to have a
proportion of small units and a mixture of dwellings for different household sizes.This will encourage
the development of mixed and balanced communities. The mix will also be influenced by the
location of development. Areas of good public transport accessibility, e.g. town centres, should have
a higher intensity of development which may lead to a greater proportion of flats. Smaller dwellings
can also be provided by conversions. Small units are defined for the purpose of this policy as one
bedroom units and two bedroom units which include at least one single bedroom. Small units,
including studio flats, should be of a good overall floorspace.
3.50 There remains a need to provide for households with children, including family houses or ground
floor flats with direct access to private gardens. The Greenwich Council Housing Needs Survey
(2002) identified that of the total housing need between 2002 and 2007, 5% of the units provided
should be three bedrooms and 20% four or more bedrooms. To create balanced and mixed
communities including homes suitable for family use, it would be desirable for developments to
include a mix where 35% of the total residential floorspace is allocated to units containing three or
more bedrooms.

64 HOUSING
H16 Conversions and new residential developments which provide non self contained or bedsitter
accommodation for non-family use will only be considered where they are of a satisfactory
internal layout, are registered with the Council's HMO Registration Scheme and meet or are
capable of meeting its standards, except where;
i In terms of conversion, the original dwelling house is less than 1,200 sqft (111.48 sqm) (net
floor area) excluding any garages or less than 1,400 sqft (130 sqm) (net floor area) where
they form part of a terrace; or
ii The proposal will lead to an over concentration of non self contained or bedsitter
accommodation which is considered detrimental to the character of an area;
iii The arrangements for car parking are inadequate.

Reason
3.51 The Council wish to set standards for the provision of shared home accommodation. It is important
to have control over such forms of residential development yet, at the same time, help towards
promoting the provision of a wide range of housing options.
3.52 Conversion of non self contained units and bedsitting rooms (HMOs) does not increase the number
of units available and may decrease it. It is important to retain a variety of accommodation for local
needs and rented non self contained shared accommodation and bedsits provide a source of
affordable housing for young people and for others who are “non priority” homeless. However,
HMOs should not lead to the loss of small and medium sized family dwellings for which there is a
continuing demand and they should provide a satisfactory and safe standard of accommodation.
Registration with the Council’s scheme as operated by the Environmental Health Department
achieves this. It is accepted that HMOs will have fewer car owning households but some level of
provision is needed.

Lifetime Homes
H17 New housing should be built to Lifetime Homes standards. Conversions should aim to
incorporate as many of the standards as practicable.
Lifetime Home include the following access requirements:
i. Level or gently sloping approach and flush thresholds.
ii. Entrances illuminated.The main entrance should be covered.
iii. Distance from the car-parking space to the home to be kept to a minimum.
iv. Where car-parking is adjacent to the home, it should be capable of being enlarged to a width
of 3.3 metres.
v. Where homes are reached via a lift, this should be wheelchair accessible.

Reason
3.53 Lifetime Homes are ordinary homes designed to accommodate the changing needs of occupants
throughout their lives. They incorporate 16 standards as set out in the Joseph Rowntree report
Designing Lifetime Homes. Reduced versions of these standards are required under Part M of the
Building Regulations.
3.54 Because of their flexibility Lifetime Homes can meet a wider range of needs than other types of
housing. Lifetime Homes are not ‘special needs’ housing: they offer greater convenience to everyone.
At the same time, they enable people to stay in their homes if they become less mobile; enable
people with disabilities to visit friends or relatives more easily; and expand people with disabilities’

HOUSING 65
 housing options, whose choice is currently limited. An estimated 32% of households contain a
member with a limiting long-term illness (2001 Census). Lifetime Homes also respond to other
groups housing needs more effectively, in particular, families with young children. Add to this the
increasing number of older people - as more of us are living longer - there is a need to ensure a
corresponding increase in the amount of housing accessible to the community as a whole.
3.55 Lifetime Homes because of their adaptability do not require structural alterations to be made
should adaptations be needed later on; and because accessibility is built in from the start, these are
less likely to be needed in the first place. By making better use of limited resources, Lifetime Homes
can contribute towards the aim of sustainable development. In addition to standards indicated above
Lifetime Homes comprise:
1. Width of doorways and hallways in accordance with Access Committee for England standards
2. Space for turning for wheelchair users in kitchens, dining areas and sitting rooms; adequate
circulation space elsewhere
3. Sitting room / family room at entrance level
4. Ground floor bed space
5. Wheelchair accessible downstairs toilet, with drainage and service provision to enable a shower
to be fitted
6. Walls in bathrooms and toilets capable of taking adaptations, such as handrails
7. Provision for a future stairlift and space for through floor house lift
8. Bath / bedroom ceiling strong or capable of being made strong enough to take a hoist
9. Bathroom layout designed to incorporate ease of access
10. Living room window glazing to begin at 800mm or lower and windows to be easy to
open/operate
11. Switches, sockets and service controls at a convenient height, between 600mm and 1200mm
from the floor
3.56 Lifetime Homes are a way of enhancing the quality, safety and accessibility of housing at little or no
extra cost.Viewed over time, they are highly cost-effective. As the standards become more widely
adopted, costs will fall. On some steep sites it may not be possible to achieve all the standards, such
as level thresholds.

66 HOUSING
 Sheltered Housing
H18 When considering proposals for sheltered housing for older people, the Council will have regard
to the following criteria:
i. Sheltered developments should normally be located in residential areas not more than 200
metres from a local parade of shops having all of the services set out in Policy TC19 and be
within easy walking distance of local amenities such as public transport and community
facilities;
ii. Such developments should have good vehicular access for residents, ambulances, health care
professionals and visitors and should make provision for car parking at the Borough's
standard of 1 space per 3 dwellings;
iii. Such developments should comply with residential density policies;
iv. There should generally be a minimum of 20 dwellings and a maximum of 40 in each
development with a resident warden. In smaller schemes without a resident warden
adequacy of services provided will be taken into account;
v. A high quality of landscaping and sufficient amenity space is provided.

Reason
3.57 The provision of sheltered housing to meet the specific needs of older people is recognised. Recent
years have seen an expansion in the range of such accommodation. However, provision should be
well distributed to give older people the opportunity to be housed in their own local area. It is
important that in the development of schemes, policy criteria are met so that schemes are
appropriately located, designed and equipped.

Wheelchair Standard Housing

H19 In residential developments of 25 or more units at suitable sites and locations, the Council will
seek to negotiate 10% of dwellings to be built to full wheelchair standard. In the case of private
housing, the requirement may be provided as units capable of adaptation to full wheelchair
standard without further structural alterations.

Reason
3.58 PPS1 states that Development Plan policies should address accessibility (both in terms of location
and physical access) for all members of the community. As PPG3 makes clear ‘developers should
already be considering whether the internal design of housing, and access to it, can meet the needs
of people with disabilities, whether as residents or visitors.’ Access arrangements are in part covered
under Part M of the Building Regulations and the need for wheelchair housing should decline as
more of the general housing stock becomes accessible. However, there will still be some need for
Wheelchair Standard housing. In addition to the Lifetime Homes Standards described above, its
main feature is the larger space standards and wider doors which enable greater ease of access for
wheelchair users.
3.59 People with disabilities’ housing options are currently restricted because the majority of the housing
stock is not accessible.There is, therefore, a need to increase provision and extend choice across a
whole range of housing types, sizes and tenures. A mix of units should be provided within the
proportion indicated above, preferably distributed across the site as a whole, rather than grouped
together; though siting should take into consideration ease of access. Suitable locations include those
where the site is level and surrounding area relatively flat, with public transport, shops and a range
of community facilities close by.

HOUSING 67
3.60 Because of the additional cost in providing the more generous than average space standards
required, it is appropriate that wheelchair housing is provided in larger schemes. In practice, it is likely
that most Wheelchair Standard Housing will be provided as affordable housing. The Greenwich
Wheelchair Site Brief (2002) gives further guidance.

H20 Planning policies for residential extensions may be relaxed to enable a person with a disability to
continue living in their own home.

Reason
3.61 A person may become disabled but not wish to undergo the disruption of moving house. Where
possible the Council wishes to enable them to adapt their present home.The Council would wish
to exercise reasonable discretion in allowing an extension, for instance a ground floor bathroom and
bedroom, to be added to a dwelling for the use of a person with a disability. (See Policies D9 &
D10)

Supported Housing
H21 Proposals for residential care homes, hostels, cluster flats, refuges and other supported
accommodation required by the local community will be given sympathetic consideration. In
taking a decision the Council will have regard to all the following considerations:
i. Location in residential areas with good access to essential services, including public
transport and shops.
ii. Impact upon the local environment and the character of the area, taking into account
intensity and scale of use and whether the development would lead to an over-
concentration of provision in the area.
iii. Extensions to existing properties should be consistent with Policies D9 and D10.
iv. Satisfactory vehicular access.
v. Provision of adequate private amenity space for clients.
vi. Compliance with relevant car parking standards.
vii. An identified local need.
viii. The size of the unit and the standard and suitability of the provision for the client group.
ix. The particular locational needs of the client group.

Reason
3.62 Some people, for a part or exceptionally for all their lives, need supported housing or residential
care. Such accommodation needs to be provided if the appropriate range is to be on offer. Groups
who may need such provision at some time include: the very young, older people, single people
living in large lodging houses, or through time spent in long stay hospitals for people with learning
disabilities or those recovering from mental health problems, people with long term illnesses
including AIDS and HIV, women escaping violence, lone parents, people with disabilities, young
lesbians and gay men forced to leave home, young people leaving care and homeless people.
3.63 Nationally, in response to these needs, small hostels, including cluster flats and supported flats, are
beginning to be part of the range of accommodation provided, replacing institutions, long stay
hospitals, the large traditional lodging houses and resettlement units. In spite of the possible
apprehension of local residents, small hostels and shared houses are essentially needed as part of
the drive to provide care in the community. In order to maximise full integration in the community
it is essential that wherever possible the accommodation should be distributed throughout the

68 HOUSING
 Borough, avoiding a concentration of schemes and preferably sited in residential areas. Over-
concentration of any one type of provision can have a detrimental impact on an area, in terms of
additional noise, visual intrusion and traffic generation and place additional stress on already over-
burdened services. It is not compatible with the aim of achieving socially mixed communities and
may undermine any systems of informal support between vulnerable and less vulnerable members
of the community that emerge. Smaller scale schemes are more likely to fit in with existing residential
communities. Whether or not a particular scheme will lead to over-concentration will be
determined by taking into account the number, scale and type of provision and levels of need, for
the type of scheme proposed, that exist in the immediate area. Proposals should also respect the
privacy of special needs groups and enhance the opportunities for full integration.There should be
good access to family, when appropriate, and essential services including shops and transport.
Proposals which result in the loss of supported housing will take into account the continued local
need for such housing.
3.64 In providing this accommodation measures must be taken to ensure that adequate space, privacy,
amenity and design standards for special needs groups are maintained. In particular some exclusive
provision needs to be made for women who may be reluctant to use mixed facilities. Generally
proposals should adhere to the Housing Corporation’s DoE approved “Design and Contract”
criteria, and for residential care homes the 1984 Registered Homes Act, the associated regulations
and the Greenwich Standards and Practice Guidance for Residential Care Homes (1993).

Travellers and Romany People

H22 The Council will seek to retain existing provision for travellers and romany people.Any proposal
for a new site should include provision for basic amenities and services and will be assessed
against the following criteria:
i. The local need for the provision.
ii. The suitability of the site for the proposed uses.
iii. Highway considerations.
iv. Access to local shops, services and facilities.
v. Compatibility with other polices of the Plan particularly in terms of environmental amenity
and the need to retain open spaces.

Reason
3.65 The London Plan and Circular 1/94 ‘Gypsy Sites and Planning’ advise that development plans should
include policies and criteria for dealing with gypsy site provision. The Borough already has a
dedicated permanent site for travellers at Thistlebrook which provides 40 pitches. The policy sets
out the criteria by which the development of future permanent or temporary sites will be assessed.

HOUSING 69
70 HOUSING
 4. OPEN SPACES
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
4.1 Open spaces play a significant role in a civilised community contributing to a high quality
environment.They can therefore play an important role in sustaining and improving the amenity of
residential districts, attracting new investment, employment opportunities and improving the quality
of life. Open space, including rivers and lakes, is one of the Borough’s major resources and needs to
be protected, improved and made fuller use of, if its potential is to be realised.The general policies
are:

SO1 To adopt a positive approach to the use and treatment of open space by:
i. Maintaining and increasing suitable recreational facilities;
ii. Improving the environmental quality of open spaces;
iii. Identifying and conserving sites of nature conservation importance and;
iv. Recognising the value of landscape, biodiversity and open space features throughout the
urban environment.

SO2 To safeguard, improve and enhance the character of existing public and private open space
(Green Belt, Metropolitan Open Land, Community Open Space, small open spaces) that fulfil a
specific function for the local and wider community and encourage full use of their facilities.

SO3 To ensure that all communities, residents and workers have adequate access to open space and
the riverside.The needs of disadvantaged communities and groups with special requirements will
be given emphasis, especially in areas of public open space deficiency.

SO4 Open spaces of strategic importance (Metropolitan Open Land) will be maintained and their
character safeguarded from built development and enhanced as appropriate. The only uses
considered to be generally appropriate within MOL are:
i. Public and private open space, sportsgrounds and playing fields.
ii. Agriculture, woodlands and orchards.
iii. Open water features.
iv. Golf courses.
v. Allotments.
vi. Large grounds attached to educational facilities and institutions.
vii. Cemeteries and associated crematoria.
viii. Nature conservation.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

4.2 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy recognises the important role that the Borough’s open spaces
play in a sustainable community;‘the environment should not be seen as an addition or as separate,
but as an integral part to our lives.’ The Strategy notes that through protecting and enhancing
wildlife habitats and green spaces, the urban areas will be made more attractive and ‘livable.’ The

OPEN SPACES 71
 Greenwich Strategy aims to promote the Borough’s and open spaces and the River Thames for
recreation while protecting and enhancing the natural habitats they offer.
4.3 Open space constitutes almost a quarter of the Borough’s total land area, ranging from local
woodlands to large formal parks. There is a major swathe of open spaces stretching through the
central, eastern and southern parts of the Borough forming part of an area of Metropolitan Open
Land known as the ‘Green Chain’.The Green Chain stretches through the four South East London
Boroughs of Bexley, Bromley, Greenwich and Lewisham. There are seven miles of Thames and
Thameside. There are sites of historical and ecological importance. These open spaces provide a
range of functions including recreational, ecological, historical, amenity and structural breaks in the
overall urban environment. It is important that the level of open space in the Borough is maintained,
whilst recognising that new open spaces are being provided as part of the developments of
Thamesmead and the Greenwich Peninsula, which help to achieve a more balanced distribution of
open space in the Borough.
4.4 Open space in the Borough is subject to pressures, for example development pressure for housing,
leisure facilities, new road and public transport developments. Within the framework of these
competing land uses the Council recognises that not all the Borough’s residents have adequate
access to open space. Despite the relatively large amount of open space in the Borough some areas
are deficient in public open space. As a result the immobile, younger and older people and parents
with young children do not always have convenient access to recreational open space.
4.5 In order to realise the full potential of open space opportunities within the Borough, the Council
will capitalise upon the roles that open space can play in the fulfillment of this Plan’s vision. This
approach is reflected in the division of the chapter into three broad themes.

Protecting Open Space

4.6 To safeguard and improve existing public and private open land from built development, through
Metropolitan Open Land, the Green Chain and other open space designations, whilst encouraging
a positive approach to the use of open space. PPG17 ‘Sport, Open Space and Recreation’ (2002)
states that the Government’s main planning objectives for sport and recreation are to:
• promote more sustainable patterns of development by creating and maintaining networks of
recreational facilities and open spaces, particularly within our urban areas;
• promote social inclusion, community cohesion, health and well-being by ensuring that everyone
has easy access to good quality sport and recreation facilities and open space; and
• support an urban renaissance and a rural renewal, by making our towns and cities more attractive
places in which people will choose to live, providing opportunities for recreation in the
countryside and regenerating the economies of rural areas.

Open Space and Leisure

4.7 Open space plays an essential role in providing the necessary facilities for the pursuit of a wide range
of leisure and educational activities. These can be divided into three broad categories: Sporting
activities, which require specialist facilities such as football and cricket pitches; General leisure
activities, ranging from walking and sitting to informal play; and cultural and entertainment facilities
which range from historical buildings, museums, open air theatres, sites of sculpture and visual
imagery to refreshment facilities. Sporting and general leisure activities have the potential to provide
facilities for physical activity and hence to promote both physical and mental good health. The
Greenwich Strategy aims to promote and foster Greenwich as a centre of cultural excellence where
sports and leisure facilities and activities are among the best in London.The Council’s ‘Taking Leisure
Forward’ (1998), currently being updated as the ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008, seeks to
support initiatives of sporting excellence.

72 OPEN SPACES
 Open Space and The Environment
4.8 Open space plays an important role in protecting and enhancing the environment and fulfilling the
Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy, which in turn exercises a profound influence on the Borough’s social
and economic conditions. In broad terms open spaces form a key part of the urban landscape;
making a contrast with built development through sensory perceptions (Sight, sound, smell and
touch). They also provide opportunities for nature development and conservation as well as the
resources for educational play and studies. Small open areas, private gardens and wildlife features
permeate and enrich the whole urban environment and such elements need to be considered
during the development process and conserved. The Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan will
provide an audit of existing species and habitats, identify those of particular importance and set out
a programme for their protection and enhancement. Londonwide the Mayor published a
Biodiversity Strategy in 2002.

Policies
Protecting Open Space
Metropolitan Open Land
O1 In areas defined on the Proposals Map as Metropolitan Open Land:
i. The use of land for the open land uses stated in Policy SO4 will normally be permitted
unless the use would result in an adverse change to the character of the open land.
ii. Small scale built development which has a primary function for a purpose ancillary and
essential to an appropriate use as stated in Policy SO4 may be permitted provided that the
following criteria are met:
a. The design, scale, massing, siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively
to other buildings on the site, to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the
surrounding open land. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have
minimal impact upon the open nature of the area.
b. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see
Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area.
c. The proposal should not have unacceptable adverse effects on neighbouring residential
areas and should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance.
d. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open
space deficiency (see Policy O9).
e. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or
sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough.
f. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and
any provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site.
All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site.
Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided. (See Policy
D8).
iii. Proposals for a change of use of an existing building, which is in a use ancillary to that of the
surrounding open space, to a non ancillary use will not normally be permitted. The use of
such a building for indoor sport or leisure use, combined with an outdoor use, may be
permitted subject to landscaping and the criteria above.

OPEN SPACES 73
 Reason
4.9 The London Plan defines Metropolitan Open Land as land of predominantly open character which
has more than a Borough significance, generally because of its size and catchment area. MOL
provides breaks in the built up area, provides open air facilities and contains features or landscape
of historic, recreational and nature conservation interest all of which benefit the people of part or
all of London.This open space, whether land or water, privately or publicly owned and accessible to
the public or not, is needed both for active sport and informal leisure, recreation and for the intrinsic
qualities of ‘openness’ and ‘greenness’. In MOL the London Plan advises that there is a presumption
against inappropriate development including development which would be harmful to the open
character of the land.
4.10 In accordance with the London Plan, the Council intends to safeguard open land of metropolitan
importance from built development and maintain their structural contribution in providing a visual
break in the built up areas of London.These areas are also of significant strategic value for wildlife.
The open land comprises a variety of public and private open spaces, serving both the local and
wider communities of South East London and is already used/has potential for outdoor recreation.
4.11 Whilst there is a presumption against built development it is accepted that some limited built
development, ancillary and essential to an appropriate use may be needed for the effective
operation of such uses. The policy sets out criteria by which such proposals are to be assessed.
Changes of use of buildings from an ancillary to a non ancillary use will be resisted although it is
recognised that exceptions could be made for indoor sport or leisure uses combined with an
outdoor use. It is also recognised that not all open space uses identified in Policy SO4 are
appropriate on all MOL sites. For example some open space uses would be detrimental to the
landscape and/or historic nature of the site and as a result would have an adverse impact on the
character and quality of the MOL.

O2 Proposals for redevelopment, extension or change of use of existing built development within
Metropolitan Open Land whose primary function is not ancillary to the use of adjoining open
land will be controlled according to the following criteria:
i. The design, scale, massing, siting and landscaping of the proposal should relate sensitively to
other buildings on the site, to those on adjoining sites and to the character of the
surrounding open land. The proposal should not be visually intrusive and should have
minimal impact upon the open nature of the area.
ii. The proposal should not be within a defined site of nature conservation importance (see
Policy O18) nor prejudice the ecological or amenity significance of the area.
iii. The proposal should not have any adverse effects on neighbouring residential areas and
should not result in an unacceptable level of noise or other disturbance.
iv. The proposal must not result in the enlargement or creation of an area of public open space
deficiency (see Policy O9).
v. The proposal shall not result in an overall reduction of the provision of playing fields or
sports pitches and associated facilities in the Borough.
vi. The proposal shall not result in a significant increase in vehicular traffic to the site and any
provision for parking shall not dominate or fragment the site.
vii. Any replacement buildings should not exceed the ground floor area or height of those
existing on the site.

74 OPEN SPACES
 viii. There will be a presumption against extensions to existing buildings unless it can be
demonstrated that any such development would be modest in scale and not be visually
intrusive or have any adverse effect on the character of the surrounding Metropolitan
Open Land.
All proposals shall be landscaped and introduce diversity to the wildlife interest of the site.
Existing trees of significance should be protected and replacement trees provided. (See Policy
D8).

Reason
4.12 In some places Metropolitan Open Land includes substantial amounts of built form, such as schools,
colleges, hospitals, halls of residence and large houses all set in large grounds but whose primary
function is not ancillary to the use of the open land. Whilst it is recognised that some limited
development may be warranted to enable the proper functioning of these buildings to continue,
their nature and prominent or sensitive location is such that any significant extension, further
development or intensification of use of such buildings could conflict with the objectives of
maintaining and enhancing the character of MOL.

O3 The University of Greenwich Avery Hill Campus, Mansion Site and Southwood Site, are identified
as Major Developed Sites (MDS) on the Proposals Map and in the Site Proposals Schedule.
Proposals for expansion are to meet the following criteria:
i. form part of a comprehensively planned development for each site;
ii. would not lead to an increase in the height of the existing development or previously
approved schemes;
iii. would not have an unreasonable effect on the surrounding environment and amenity of
adjoining residents;
iv. would not have an unacceptable effect on traffic flow or safety and includes adequate
parking and access arrangements;
v. would be well served by a variety of means of transport other than the private car;
vi. have no greater impact than existing or previously permitted development on the open
character of MOL; and
vii. not exceed 21,700 sqm (gross) of additional floorspace.

Reason
4.13 The University of Greenwich has identified a need in the plan period for a further 21,700 sqm of
additional teaching and associated floorspace at their Avery Hill Campus. At the Southwood Site
planning permission has already been granted in 2003 for 6,500 sqm of that additional floorspace,
leaving 13,700 sqm to be provided. At the Mansion Site, historically (1994) planning permission was
granted by the Secretary of State for the Environment for a substantial extension of the campus by
14,900 sqm.To reflect this position, both sites are identified as Major Developed Sites in MOL (Site
schedules o4 and o5), and their boundaries take into account these space needs. This reflects the
guidance on such sites in PPG2 ‘Green Belts’ Annex C, interpreted for a site in MOL.

O4 The Council will give special consideration to development proposals on land fringing, abutting
or otherwise having a visual relationship with Metropolitan Open Land where development
could be detrimental to its visual amenity, character or use. Possibilities for opening up visual links
and green corridors, or creating new access points into or between open land areas will be
pursued.

OPEN SPACES 75
 Reason
4.14 Development, redevelopment or extensions on land adjoining or relating visually to Metropolitan
Open Land could have an impact on the appearance, character and use of the open spaces, and
proposals need to be assessed accordingly. In particular there are many residential properties with
large gardens abutting the MOL boundary which the Council would wish to see retained as a buffer
between built development and open land and ensure views to and from are protected.

Green Chain
O5 Areas of Metropolitan Open Land forming part of the "Green Chain", which is defined on the
Proposals Map, will be promoted as a regional and local outdoor recreational resource and visual
amenity in conjunction with other parts of the Green Chain in South East London. The six
objectives for the Green Chain are:
i. To improve and encourage the provision of suitable recreational facilities, with an emphasis
on those serving a wide area of South East London and/or requiring open land.
ii. To safeguard the open land from built development and maintain its positive contribution in
providing a visual and physical break in the built up area of London.
iii. To conserve and enhance the visual amenity and ecological aspects of the landscape.
iv. To improve public access to and through the area.
v. To promote an overall identity for the area in order to increase public awareness of available
recreational facilities.
vi. To encourage the collaboration and co operation of the various public and private agencies,
owners, organisations, clubs, etc. in the area to achieve the above objectives.

Reason
4.15 MOL, forming the Green Chain, comprises a number of public and private open spaces, largely in
recreational use, which extend in a virtually continuous arc through the Boroughs of Bexley,
Greenwich, Lewisham and Bromley.The London Plan urges Boroughs to consider the valuable role
of Green Chains and to consult with neighbouring planning authorities as appropriate. These
objectives have been jointly adopted by the four Boroughs and are pursued by the Green Chain
Joint Committee and the Officers Working Party. A Management Plan for the future of the Green
Chain (2003-2008) was published in 2004.

Green Belt
O6 The small area of land comprising the grounds of Stonefields, New Eltham, is defined as Green
Belt land and should be retained as open space.

Reason
4.16 This small area of open land forms part of a larger continuous area of Green Belt, which straddles
the Borough’s boundary with Bromley. Any proposals for this area must comply with the guidance
contained in Planning Policy Guidance Note 2: Greenbelts (PPG2).

76 OPEN SPACES
 Community Open Space
O7 Public and private open space areas defined as Community Open Space on the Proposals Map
will be safeguarded from built development. New buildings and extensions to existing buildings
will only be permitted where they are ancillary to the existing land use, are limited in size and
extent, sensitively sited, and are compatible with neighbouring development. Changes of use of
existing buildings in ancillary use will be considered in the light of Policy O1.Where existing built
development within parks and public open spaces becomes surplus to demand, the Council may
allow the sites to be redeveloped for specialist sporting development (which combine the use of
outdoor and indoor space), subject to the criteria set out in Policy O1.

Reason
4.17 The numerous public and private open spaces within the built up areas of the Borough not defined
as Metropolitan Open Land provide important functions for the local and wider community, and
need to be safeguarded equally from built development pressures. The open spaces comprise a
variety of uses including local parks, playing fields, sportsgrounds, allotments, etc., and they do not all
have general public access. In every case they fulfil specific functions for the local or wider community
and constitute welcome open breaks within the built up area, contrasting with the overall built
environment. However many of the Borough’s parks and public open spaces contain derelict or
under used buildings which could be used to provide better recreational facilities and act as a catalyst
for the improvement of the surrounding open spaces.

Other Open Spaces

O8 Other small open spaces, amenity open spaces and play areas not allocated for other uses,
whether public or private (too small to be defined on the Proposals Map), which fulfil an
environmental, recreational, local nature conservation or amenity function will be safeguarded
from built development and Policy O7 will apply.

Reason
4.18 Small open spaces play an important role in providing breaks in the built up area, providing space
for recreation for residents, assisting nature conservation, preventing over development, providing
visual contrast and areas for play and sitting out.

Public Open Space Deficiency Areas

O9 The Council will seek to increase the provision of public open space and improve public access
in areas of open space deficiency identified on Map 5.The development of major new residential
communities in areas deficient in open space should include a minimum public open space
provision to the standards set out in Table O1.

Reason
4.19 The London Plan advises that UDP’s should identify areas of public open space deficiency and seek
to reduce deficiencies in open space, either through the creation of new open space to which the
public have access or by enabling convenient access for all to existing open space. .Table 3D.1 of the
London Plan sets out London’s open space hierarchy and provides a benchmark for public open
space provision across London.
4.20 The uneven distribution of public open space in the Borough of Greenwich and surrounding
Boroughs means that less mobile people, younger and older people and parents with young children
do not always have adequate access to open spaces for the purpose of recreation. Map 5 identifies
these areas. Sites where new provision or improvements to open space can be made are identified

OPEN SPACES 77
 Map 5: Public Open Space Deficiency Areas
© Crown copyright

Local and District Park Deficiency Area

District Park Deficiency Area

Local Park Deficiency Area

NB This is a diagrammatic representation of Open Space Deficiency in

the Borough. The determination of development proposals will be
subject to a more detailed assessment.

78 OPEN SPACES
 within the Site Schedules for open space. Minor extensions and improved access points to existing
small local parks and open spaces can help alleviate deficiency, especially in areas of deprivation. A
detailed appraisal will be carried out in all cases where open space deficiencies need to be improved.
4.21 In smaller new residential developments the priority will be on the provision of small local parks
within easy walking distance of users. Policy H12 deals with the provision of children’s play areas in
new residential developments.
4.22 In excess of 25ha of public open space have (Central and Southern Parks) and are to be provided
on the Greenwich Peninsula.The development will deliver a network of open spaces that provide
a variety of experiences and cater for different user groups, equivalent to the provision of a District
Park.Tripcock Park will address the District Park deficiency in the Thamesmead area. A further 6ha
of open space are to be provided within the new development at Tripcock Point,Thamesmead.

TABLE O1:TYPES OF PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE OPEN SPACES

Open Space Categorisation Size Guideline and Distance from Home

Regional Parks 400 hectares

3.2-8 km
Metropolitan Parks 60 hectares
3.2 km
District Parks 20 hectares
1.2km
Local Parks and Open Spaces 2 hectares
0.4km
Small Open Spaces Under 2 hectares
Less than 0.4km
Source:Table 3D.1 London Plan (2004)

Community Benefits
O10 The Council will seek to secure improvement and enhancement of existing parks and public open
spaces, where major development places increased demand on existing areas, and, where
appropriate, the creation of new parks and public open spaces in line with Policies O9 and C3,
through planning obligations and conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2.

Reason
4.23 There will be a significant increase in the number of households and the number of homes in the
Borough during the plan period and the additional demands that this will place on existing facilities
needs to be recognised. Policy O9 requires proposals in areas deficient in public open space to
include new public open space provision. However, major developments may also increase use of
existing parks and public open spaces. It is considered necessary to improve and enhance existing
nearby public open space to cope with increased demand. These parks and public open spaces
should be reasonably related in location to the development proposed and should be of direct
benefit to the occupiers of the new development.
4.24 The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy
SC2.The Council will seek a legal agreement with developers in accordance with Policy SC2, to put

OPEN SPACES 79
 into place mechanisms and initial funding for improvements and enhancements of existing parks and
public open spaces. (See also Policies C3 and D4).

Open Space and Leisure

Sportsgrounds and Playing Fields
O11 The Council will resist granting planning permission for any development which would lead to
the loss or would prejudice the use of a playing field or land last used as a playing field except
where:
A
i. An appraisal of current and future needs for playing fields has demonstrated that there is an
excess of playing field provision and the site has no special significance to the interests of
sport or for school playing field(s) it would not result in the loss of playing fields below
Department for Education and Skills standards; and
ii. The site is suplus to requirements of all other open space functions; or
B
iii. The proposed development affects only land incapable of forming, or not forming part of, a
playing pitch, or
iv. It would meet an identified need for an alternative open space use; (See Table O1) or
v. It would combine the use of indoor and outdoor sports, providing a facility for sporting
excellence which justifies the loss of land; or
vi. An alternative site or facility of at least an equivalent quantity and quality is provided in a
suitable location; and
vii. It would have minimal adverse impact on the open character of Metropolitan Open Land (in
accordance with Policy O1), or for other open spaces it is not of particular recreational or
amenity value.

Reason
4.25 Recreational facilities provided on private sportsgrounds and educational playing fields and within
parks provide opportunities for team games and outdoor sports. The trend in most sports and
recreational activities is towards an increase in participation. In addition there is the difficulty and
expense of significantly improving the provision for outdoor sports and recreation within the built
up areas of London.There is a strong case, therefore, against any erosion in the provision of existing
outdoor sports provision in the Borough. Sportsgrounds and educational playing fields in the
Borough are also an important element in the overall regional provision for sports and recreation
in London, not just for the Borough.
4.26 The London Plan requires Boroughs to realise the value of open space and protect its many benefits
including those associated with sport and recreation. Reference should also be made to The
Sporting Capital: Regional Recreation Strategy for London (London Sport 1994), which provides a
background and framework for sport in London and an approach to achieving the vision for the
future. PPG17 ‘Sport, Open Space and Recreation’ (2002) states that playing fields should not be
lost to development unless there is an established surplus of all forms of open space and that if
playing fields are no longer required for their original purpose consideration should first be given to
their use for other recreational and open space needs.
4.27 People should have access to a range of high quality sports facilities. This is recognised in the
Council’s ‘Fit for Sport’ Sport Strategy 2004-2008 - which identifies the importance of supporting

80 OPEN SPACES
 initiatives for sporting excellence in the Borough. Many of these initiatives combine indoor and
outdoor facilities. Indoor sports facilities are subject to the sequential approach (See Policy TC16),
but it is recognised that the availability of large town centre sites for such facilities is limited. Outside
such locations, sites for sports facilities must take into account public transport accessibility. Any such
outdoor sports facilities should be combined with outdoor facilities, and should provide for sporting
excellence as validated by the appropriate sporting authority. (See also policies O1 and O7).
4.28 The policy distinguishes between school playing fields and other playing fields. In both cases an
excess of playing fields will need to be demonstrated – based on the methodology detailed in
‘Towards a level playing field: a guide to the production of playing pitch strategies’ (February 2003)
before alternative proposals will be considered. For the former, Department for Education and Skills
standards are also to be met. In both cases the other criteria would also need to be met.The Council
has published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study of the Borough, incorporating an appraisal of
future need in 2004.The Study will be taken into account in the application of this policy.
4.29 Local Authorities are required to consult with Sport England where development proposals may
affect a playing field or land used as a playing field in the last 5 years.The Local Planning Authority is
required to notify the Department for Communities and Local Government where they are minded
to grant planning permission for the proposed development of a local authority owned playing field
or used by an educational institution and Sport England have objected.

Park Facilities
O12 The Council will seek to enhance open space by the provision and encouragement of appropriate
park facilities (e.g. seating, children’s play equipment, refreshment facilities, outdoor tennis courts,
pitch and putt, sports pitches and changing facilities and Arts, Culture and Entertainment facilities,
such as open air performance spaces, sculpture and visual imagery and areas for cultural
exhibition and study) within suitable parks and public open spaces. Facilities should be of a high
standard of design and quality and respect local nature conservation interests. Such facilities
should be safe to use and accessible to all. (See Policies D5, D6 and D7).

Reason
4.30 Many public open spaces contain few facilities, making them less attractive places to visit. Open
spaces can be visually enhanced and used to a greater and more varied extent through appropriate
outdoor uses.The Council would like to realise the full potential of open space as a leisure resource.
Encouraging outdoor arts and cultural activities where they do not conflict with the appropriate
uses of the open space for performance and exhibitions for example, enables cultural and artistic
expression, benefiting the wider community. Indoor ACE facilities are encouraged in appropriate
locations, discussed within the Town Centres Chapter.

Floodlighting
O13 The Council will permit the floodlighting of sports facilities where they do not cause
unacceptable nuisance or visual intrusion. In some cases their hours of use may be restricted.

Reason
4.31 The hours during which sports pitches can be used may be greatly increased by the use of
floodlighting. Their use can, however, cause unacceptable night time nuisance in residential areas,
adversely affect wildlife and be visually intrusive by day. (See Policy E5: Light Pollution).

OPEN SPACES 81
 Allotments
O14 The loss or change of use of existing allotment sites will be resisted.The provision of additional
allotments, particularly in the northern part of the Borough or where demand exceeds supply,
will be encouraged on suitable sites.

Reason
4.32 There is a continuing interest in allotment gardening and allotments constitute one of the more
intensely used forms of recreational open land.There are only 0.13 hectares of allotment land per
1,000 people in the Borough (1997 mid year population estimate) compared with 0.41 hectare per
1,000 nationally). Allotment gardening is generally a localised activity with plotholders living within
easy walking distance of their plots.The demand generally exceeds the supply of plots, particularly
in the northern part of the Borough. The Council published a Playing Fields and Allotments Study
of the Borough, incorporating an appraisal of future need, in 2004. The Study will be taken into
account in the application of this policy.

Recreational Footpaths and Cycleways

O15 Existing footpaths will be safeguarded and new footpaths created to and through open spaces
and places of interest, where they do not adversely affect nature conservation.The Council will
endeavour to create a signposted network of continuous and circular routes. In particular the
‘Green Chain Walk’ footpath network will be improved and extended and new links created
wherever possible.

O16 The existing riverside footpath will be safeguarded and improved so that a continuous signposted
walk from Deptford to Thamesmead is created. Development proposals for riverside sites will
be required to incorporate provision for a riverside walkway along the river frontage or
contribute to improvements where the existing footpath needs it.The Council will examine the
potential to extend the riverside footpath along Deptford Creek.Amenity open space areas will
be created at strategic locations en route and the possibility of creating open-air performance
areas will be pursued with developers where appropriate. Footpaths and associated areas should
be safe to use and accessible to all. (See Policies D5, D6 and D7).

Reason for O15 and O16

4.33 Walking is an important pursuit that combines both journeys of recreation and necessity for
residents and visitors alike. Many of the Borough’s best attractions can be approached on foot, and
the identification, signposting, provision of information and publicising of suitable routes will
encourage the use of open spaces and visits to places of interest. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy
(2001) identifies the Green Chain Walk as one of six Strategic Walks in London.The Green Chain
Walk, which runs through the Green Chain Open Spaces, also forms part of the Capital Ring which
is a 72 mile orbital path in London.
4.34 The Council supports the inclusion of the riverside walkway in the Countryside Agency’s Thames
Path National Trail.The Thameside footpath now extends along most of the riverside apart from a
couple of sections on the Charlton / Woolwich riverside. In these areas it is to be provided on the
redevelopment of adjacent riverside sites. In some areas it needs improvement. The precise route
of the riverside path may vary according to the operational requirements of other river users.The
West Greenwich Development Framework recognises the opportunity to improve pedestrian
linkages along and across the Creek. The latter has benefited from the restored Ha’penny Hatch
footbridge adjacent to the railway bridge. Contributions to footpath provision will be sought in
accordance with Policy SC2.

82 OPEN SPACES
O17 The Council will use its planning and other powers to secure the provision of cycleways along
the riverside, and within and through the major open spaces, particularly in the Green Chain
Area, in conjunction with non leisure cycleways (see Policy M32). Consideration will be given to
problems of nuisance and safety to other users. Suitable routes will be safeguarded and provided
as resources allow and through the use of planning agreements/conditions on planning
permissions.

Reason
4.35 Cycling is a popular leisure activity. It is considered appropriate to make available suitable segregated
cycle routes within and through the Borough’s major open spaces and along the riverside, where
the distances involved make cycling particularly appropriate. The Council will consult interested
groups, including groups representing walkers and pedestrians and draw up proposals in due course.
Contributions to cycle-way provision will be sought in accordance with Policy SC2.

Wildlife and Nature Conservation

The Identification and Protection of Wildlife Habitats
O18 A network of Sites of Nature Conservation Importance (SNCI) throughout the Borough have
been identified for protection. These include Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) and sites
declared as Local Nature Reserves (LNR).They are defined on the Proposals Map and listed in
Table O2 as sites of Metropolitan, Borough or Local importance for nature conservation or
geology. There will be a presumption against the development of these sites: the level of
protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation. Conservation and
enhancement of important scientific features will be sought by appropriate management.

Reason
4.36 It is important to retain a full range of natural habitats and features within easy reach of residential
areas. Many natural features and habitats cannot easily be recreated elsewhere and must be
conserved where they can still be found. A re-survey commissioned by the GLA Biodiversity Unit:
‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich (September 2004)’ updates the
previous list of sites.The sites identified include SSSIs designated by English Nature (Gilberts Pit, and
Oxleas Wood) and the Local Nature Reserves declared by the Council (Maryon Wilson Park &
Gilberts Pit and the Oxleas Woodlands complex). Sites are categorised as of Metropolitan, Borough
(Grade I or II), or Local Importance. In general development of these sites or areas, other than for
minor ancillary works, would be prejudicial to their nature conservation interest, but the level of
protection accorded to a site will be commensurate with its designation.
4.37 One of the key principles of PPS 9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) is to maintain
and enhance, restore or add to biodiversity and geological conservation interests. Plans should be
based upon up-to-date information about the environmental characteristics of their areas and
should indicate the location of designated sites of importance. Plans should also consider the
restoration or creation of new priority habitats. Local Authorities are required to consult with
English Nature where development proposals may affect a SSSI.
4.38 All development proposals are expected to have regard to the biodiversity of sites which are not
within designated areas, through Policy D3.

O19 Where development is proposed on sites adjacent to protected sites of nature conservation
importance, applicants must demonstrate that habitats will not be adversely affected.

OPEN SPACES 83
 Reason
4.39 Some developments can have significant detrimental effects on the wildlife of adjacent sites, due to
disturbance such as that from noise, movement, shade, atmospheric pollution and the effects on
drainage and ground water. Applicants must demonstrate that advice has been sought from
professionals with suitable expertise and qualifications.

Green Corridors
O20 The network of main Green Corridors will be protected and enhanced. Development will not
normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of wildlife habitat within the
corridor.

River Corridors
O21 The ecological and wildlife value of the Borough’s rivers, canals and lakes will be protected and
enhanced. Development will not normally be permitted where it would damage the continuity of
wildlife habitat within the corridor.

Reason for O20 and O21

4.40 Extensive contiguous areas of trees, shrubs and open land that often straddle road, rail and river
networks can form corridors that link one habitat with another. These corridors can help form a
network necessary to ensure the maintenance of the current range and diversity of flora and fauna.
The green corridors are:
i. The railway line between Blackheath and Falconwood which links with the open spaces of
Blackheath and Greenwich Park.
ii. The Plumstead Railway cutting
iii. The ridgeway in Abbey Wood/Thamesmead
iv. The railway line between Lee and New Eltham which connects to the Green Chain network of
open spaces.
The above are also Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation, and are shown on the Proposals
Map and listed in Table O2 as appropriate.The Green Chain also acts as a green corridor through
Woolwich Cemetery, Plumstead Common and Bostall Woods into Bexley.
4.41 The River Thames, Ravensbourne and Quaggy, together with the Thamesmead canal network and a
number of lakes form a corridor for aquatic species and bird migration. The culverting or building
over of watercourses should be resisted as it results in a break of continuity in river corridors, and
adversely affects nature conservation interests. Such works will require the consent of the
Environment Agency.

Species Protection
O22 The Council, when considering planning applications, will take into account the presence of any
protected or priority species and their habitats which are likely to be harmed.

Reason
4.42 National and international legislation protects certain species of flora and fauna. PPS9: Biodiversity
and Geological Conservation (2005) states that Local Authorities should take measures to protect
the habitats of these species from further decline.Where possible, the habitats of badgers, protected
and priority species should be protected before, during and after any development that may affect

84 OPEN SPACES
 them. Appropriate surveys of sites will help to identify if the species are present (See Policy D3). In
cases where habitats of these species may be affected by development, English Nature will be
contacted, and in the case of badgers, a licence will be required prior to permitting interference with
a sett.
4.43 Where development is permitted which may affect protected species; conditions and agreements
will be used to facilitate the survival of individual members of the species, reduce disturbance to a
minimum and provide alternative habitats to sustain at least the existing levels of populations.
4.44 Protected and priority species are listed in Part One, Schedules 1, 5 and 8 of the 1981 Wildlife and
Countryside Act, Schedules 2 and 4 of the Conservation (Natural Habitats &c) Regulations, and the
UK, London and proposed Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plans.

Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites

O23 In or near areas of wildlife deficiency (generally areas more than 1 kilometre from a Site of
Metropolitan or Borough Importance for nature conservation to which the public has access)
the Council will take opportunities to secure the provision of areas to be managed as wildlife
habitats and seek to maximise opportunities for access to suitable sites within areas of wildlife
deficiency where this does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance (See
Map 6).

Reason
4.45 The Council will seek to increase the ecological interest of areas currently deficient in accessible
wildlife sites. The opportunity sometimes occurs on redevelopment to secure open space and in
some cases this could appropriately be managed for ecological interest.The new ecology park that
forms part of the Millennium Village is an example of this. Vacant sites can also be used, either
temporarily or permanently, as wildlife refuges, especially with the help of local people.

Management of Wildlife Sites

O24 The Council will encourage landowners and managers to consider forms of management that
will aid the conservation of natural features within their sites. Development and management
proposals should have a particular regard to the value of retaining, replacing or creating features
of nature conservation interest.Where necessary the Council will seek to enter into agreements
to achieve these aims. In particular the development of ecological management plans will be
encouraged to ensure the maximum degree of biodiversity.

Reason
4.46 Management plays a crucial role in the retention of many valued habitats and species. Careful
management can help to reduce the loss of wildlife and can also contribute to the increase in
biodiversity. In the long term it may reduce maintenance costs and would give a positive role to such
marginal areas as embankments, verges and unused corners of playing fields and recreation grounds.
PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (2005) states that enhancing biodiversity in green
spaces will contribute to urban renaissance.

O25 The Council will encourage the use of wildlife sites to promote ecological awareness and
appreciation by providing nature trails and guided walks, encourage the creation and maintenance
of wildlife habitats within school grounds and support the setting up of urban / nature study
centres. Priority will be given to schemes benefiting areas of deprivation. Access to and within
these sites will be encouraged, particularly for those with mobility impairments and where this
does not conflict with protecting wildlife habitats from disturbance.

OPEN SPACES 85
 Map 6: Areas Lacking Accessible Wildlife Sites
© Crown copyright

Areas more than one kilometre from a publically accessible

Site of Metropolitan of Borough Importance for Nature Conservation

86 OPEN SPACES
 Reason
4.47 Ecological awareness and education is an important factor in the Borough’s Agenda 21 strategy and
the emerging Greenwich Biodiversity Action Plan. The Council wishes not only to protect wildlife
but also to increase the opportunity for residents (particularly of school age) and visitors to increase
and enhance their environmental knowledge.The Greenwich Environmental Curriculum Centre in
Eltham promotes environmental and outdoor education and is extensively used by local schools.The
nine acre site provides a diverse range of habitats to study and enjoy. There is also a new
environmental interpretation centre on Deptford Creek.

OPEN SPACES 87
 Table O2: SITE OF NATURE CONSERVATION IMPORTANCE
Sites of Metropolitan Importance
No. Site (area in hectares) Description
NC1 The River Thames and Valuable habitat supporting many plant and animal species.
tidal tributaries Important for wildfowl and wading birds.The river walls provide
(2295) a feeding habitat for the nationally rare black redstart (London
BAP species).Terraces have been created on the Greenwich
peninsula to provide opportunities for saltmarsh communities
to establish. Also forms a river corridor.

NC2 Shooters Hill Woodlands Comprises Oxleas, Jack and Shepherdleas woods, and forms
(112) one of London’s most extensive areas of ancient woodland.
Supports a wide range of plants and animal life. Local Nature
Reserve and part SSSI.

NC3 Bostall Wood and Heath Ancient and secondary woodland with areas of heathland and
(159.1) acid grassland. Site may be important for bats, including rare
species. Part SSSI

NC4 Royal Blackheath Golf Course Habitat for great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP
(24) species) bordered by woodland, scrub and acidic grassland.

NC5 Pippenhall Meadows Mosaic of small meadows and pastures divided by hedgerows.
(6.22) Range of grassland communities, including an interesting area of
wet natural grassland. Many regionally uncommon species.

NC6 Blackheath and Greenwich Park Largest area of green open space in central south-east London.
(161.4) The area has potential for further improvement through
management.. Contains ancient parkland trees, small woodlands
managed as bird sanctuaries, a lake and several ponds.

NC7 Kidbrooke Green and Series of ponds supporting a variety of amphibians, including
Birdbrook Road Nature Reserves great crested newt (specially protected UK BAP species) and
(2.39) the palmate newt (the rarest amphibian in London). Under
consideration by English Nature for SSSI status.

Sites of Borough Importance, Grade 1

NC8 Woolwich Common Mostly acidic grassland. Some neutral grassland, scrub and
(45) woodland. Site is manages as a meadow, encouraging butterflies,
grasshoppers and other invertebrates.

NC9 Eltham Warren Golf Course, Acid grassland and semi-improved natural grassland. Some
Gravel Pit Lane, and the hedgerows. Nature Study Centre contains a range of habitats
Environmental Curriculum Centre and is an important educational site.
(21.3)

NC10 Avery Hill Fields Contains some of the oldest hedgerows in the Borough, a
(36.4) pond and an interesting area of wet natural grassland.

NC11 Eltham Palace Fields A large area of open land with fine old hedgerows, a variety
(34.9) of grasses and wild flowers. Wetter areas, (ponds and the moat
in the grounds of the palace), add to the habitat diversity of
the site.

88 OPEN SPACES
No. Site (area in hectares) Description
NC12 Sidcup Road Grassland and Neutral grassland with small areas of acid grassland to the
Harmony Wood north of the A20. Natural banks of the Little Quaggy stream
(9.74) support wetland vegetation.

NC13 Maryon Park, Gilbert’s Pit and Acid and wet neutral grassland and secondary
Maryon Wilson Park woodland. Gilberts’s Pit is a geological SSSI. Part Local
(25) Nature Reserve

NC14 Greenwich Cemetery Neutral grassland containing a range of grasses and wild
(9.16) flowers. Several springs.

NC15 Tump 53 Nature Park Extensive reed beds. Open areas of water containing diverse
(1.82) aquatic flora and aquatic invertebrates. Water voles present
(priority species in UK and London BAPs). Site well used for
environmental, educational purposes.

NC16 Shrewsbury Park, Shooters Hill An extensive mosaic of habitats, ranging from ancient
Golf Course, Dothill Allotments woodland, secondary woodland through scrub to rough
and Woodlands Farm grassland and wetland. Woodlands Farm is a working farm, used
(90.5) also for environmental education.

NC17 Plumstead Common (Winn’s Extensive areas of acid grassland and secondary woodland.
Common, Bleak Hill and the Slade)
(29.5)

NC18 Charlton House Lawn Closely mown acid grassland with some scarce species of
(0.5) clover.

NC19 Birchmere Recently created lake with good marginal vegetation. Supports
(5.78) variety of wildfowl and dragonflies.

NC20 Oxleas Meadow Semi-improved neutral and acid grassland.

(10.4)

NC21 Thamesmead Historic Area and Series of wetlands providing a range of wetland habitats from
Wetlands reed beds to deep water. Scrub, tall herbs and brackish flora on
(2.5) surrounding land.

NC22 Twin Tumps and Thamesmere Two tumps and adjoining moats fringed with reeds. Water voles
(10) to be re-introduced following decontamination work. Large
waterbodies of Thamemere support common waterfowl. Grass
snakes occur.

NC23 Greenwich Ecology Park and Part of the Millennium Village development. Ecology Park is
Southern Park recent habitat creation scheme containing a range of habitats,
(5) managed for environmental education. Diversity of aquatic and
marginal plants. Southern Park is amenity grassland with
contains extensive plantings of native trees and wildflower
meadows around the edges.

OPEN SPACES 89
 Sites of Borough Importance, Grade II

No. Site (area in hectares) Description

NC24 Repository Wood and Comprises secondary woodland with areas of possibly ancient
Charlton Cemetery woodland, lake and ponds. Some neutral and acid grassland.
(14.1)

NC25 Plumstead Cemetery Close mown acidic grassland, with some rare species of grass.
(12.2)

NC26 St Nicholas Churchyard, Deptford One of the best sites in the Borough for ferns, with some
(0.31) uncommon species. Numerous mature trees.

NC27 The Ridgeway Mosaic of rough grassland, tall herbs and scattered scrub.
(10) Valuable habitat for common birds, including linnets (a UK BAP
priority species), butterflies and invertebrates. An important
green corridor

NC28 Eastmoor Street Park Recently created park with a range of habitats. Diverse
(1.71) grassland, small pond and native shrubs and trees.

NC29 Belmarsh Ditches Emergent vegetation in ditches, neutral grassland and associated
(1.97) scrub. Water voles present (priority species in UK and London
BAPs).

NC30 Deansfield Diverse rough grassland with scattered scrub.Young trees

(2.43) colonising from adjacent woodland (Shepherdleas Woods
NC2)

NC31 Eltham Park North Meadow grassland with common wild flowers. Small lake
(6.33) supporting common waterfowl.

NC32 Woolwich Cemeteries and Wide variety of grasses and common wild flowers. Some scrub
Rockliffe Gardens and secondary woodland. Rockliffe Gardens contains dense
(15.9) shrubberies and a small pond.

NC33 Quaggy River at Blackheath Park Section of river with natural banks but little aquatic vegetation.
(3.95) Hedgerows, bramble scrub and rough grassland. Proposed
Environment Agency river enhancements will increase the value
of this site.

NC34 Royal Blackheath Golf Course South Variety of grassland, areas of developing woodland, ponds and
(21.6) ditches. Support a range of common birds and animals.

NC35 Gallions Reach Park Recently landscaped park with range of habitats including
(3.16) flower rich grassland, scrub and wetlands. Nesting site for song
thrush (UK BAP priority species).

NC36 Plumstead Railway Cutting Secondary woodland, scrub and grassland. Supports good
(2.28) populations of common birds, butterflies and other animals.
Part of an important green corridor.

NC37 Westcombe Park Railsides Secondary woodland with small areas of rough grassland and
(6.4) bracken. Sizeable area of undisturbed habitats.

NC38 Blackheath to Falconwood Railsides Secondary woodland, scrub and rough grassland providing
(16.3) habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals.
A valuable green corridor.

90 OPEN SPACES
No. Site (area in hectares) Description
NC39 Mottingham and Secondary woodland, scrub and rough grassland providing
New Eltham Railsides habitats for a wide range of common birds and other animals.
(11.3) A valuable green corridor.

NC40 River Ravensbourne The river here is in a vertical concrete channel, but is still of
(0.02) importance for fish, including eels, flounders and sand gobies,
NB Site is too small to be visible on which pass through between the Creek and the naturalised
the Proposals Map river channel just upstream in Brookmill Park.

NC41 Sutcliffe Park Flood Environment Agency flood alleviation scheme.The Quaggy has
Alleviation Scheme been restored to the surface in a natural-looking, meandering
(6.06) channel, flowing through a flood plain with a mosaic of damp
grassland and wetlands. A sizeable lake with extensive reed
beds and other marginal and emergent vegetation, and several
smaller, permanent ponds, as well as temporary wetlands.
Kingfishers are regularly seen. Facilities include a boardwalk and
pond-dipping platform, outdoor classroom, seats and
interpretative signs.

Sites of Local Importance

No. Site (area in hectares) Description

NC42 St John the Baptist Churchyard, Diverse grassland between the graves; gravestones support
Eltham numerous lichens. Several large trees.
(1.08)

NC43 The Oaks, Plumstead Woodland, possible ancient.

(0.7)

NC44 Southwood Recreation Ground, Sportsfield surrounded by tall grassland and scrub. Small stream
New Eltham and area of damp grassland.
(2.16)

NC45 The Tarn Secondary woodland set aside as a bird sanctuary. Large pond
(3.6) with good marginal vegetation.

NC46 The Westcombe Woodlands Small secondary woodland with dense shrub layer. Future
(1.57) strategy and management under review.

NC47 Anglesea Road Open Space and Small secondary woodland. School nature garden contains a
School Wildlife Area range of habitats including pond, marshy area, wildflower
(0.37) meadow and scrub. Well used for environmental education.

NC48 Eaglesfield Wood Secondary woodland with dense shrub layer, rough grassland
(2.53) and pond. Used for environmental education by adjacent
school.

NC49 St Marys Churchyard, Woolwich Grassland with common wild flowers and mature trees.
(1.88) Vegetated walls support scarce ferns.

OPEN SPACES 91
 Sites of Local Importance

No. Site (area in hectares) Description

NC50 Academy Place Orchard Recently planted orchard with a wide variety of fruit treed, on
(1.75) a covered reservoir. Neutral grassland and old hedge.

NC51 Mycenae House Gardens Mature garden with large trees, dense shrubberies and
(1,3) grassland. Diversity of habitats for common birds and other
animals. Bats may also be present.

NC52 Plumstead Common Nature Reserve Small woodland, possibly ancient. Supports common birds and
(0.6) invertebrate. Managed as a nature reserve.

NC53 East Wickham Open Space Informal open space, mostly in Bexley. Mature poplars, rough
(0.09) grassland and nettles which may be of value to breeding
NB Site is too small to be visible on butterflies.
the Proposals Map

NC54 Well Hall Pleaseaunce Recently restored Victorian garden with mature trees,
(4.0) shrubbery and herbaceous borders. A moat, stream and several
ponds provide additional habitats. Wild area of grassland.

NC55 Twinkle Park Small park with very attractive pond with good marginal
(0.17) vegetation. A boardwalk surrounds the pond, facilitating its use
for pond-dipping by school groups.

For further information see ‘Sites of Importance for Nature Conservation in Greenwich’ – ’ September 2004

92 OPEN SPACES
 5. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
5.1 Concern for the quality of the environment underlies most of the Council’s planning policies, is
reflected in the Greenwich Strategy (2003) and the Council’s Sustainable Development Policy
(2003). The policies within this chapter are concerned with land use and the planning implications
of the need to care for the environment and the provision of safe public services. They deal with
those aspects of planning which make people’s surroundings safe, comfortable and compatible with
the natural environment. They specifically deal with air, water, and land pollution, noise, energy
conservation, and the disposal of waste, the reclamation of contaminated land, protection from
flooding, the conservation of the water environment, and the protection of the amenities of sensitive
residential and working environments. Specific policies on wildlife conservation are in the open
space chapter.The general policies on environmental protection are:

SE1 To encourage environmentally sustainable forms of development.

SE2 To protect and improve the environment in terms of air and water quality, and reduce the impact
of pollution, noise, smell and toxic materials, especially from transport and industrial processes.

SE3 To protect areas liable to river or tidal flooding.

SE4 To reduce the generation of waste and to encourage re-use and recycling of waste.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

5.2 The Council’s concern for the environment is reflected in its Sustainable Development Policy (2003),
which states that the Council will:
• Promote sustainable development through all Council strategies
• Act and campaign against pollution of land, air and water
• Implement a waste minimisation and recycling strategy to meet and exceed government
recycling targets
• Continue to implement energy and water conservation in council properties and promote these
issues in the community
• Promote the development and implementation of renewable energy sources and purchase
renewable energy for council property when possible
• Reduce emissions that are recognised to contribute to climate change
• Promote sustainable construction practices within the development industry
• Practice environmentally responsible ‘Green’ procurement
The Council Sustainable Development Policy will be addressed, in part, through the application of
the UDP Policies. The Council will encourage developers to use the BREEAM (Building Research
Establishment Environmental Assessment Method) independent rating system to demonstrate how
their proposals achieve sustainable development objectives. (Policies H7 and D1).
5.3 The Greenwich Agenda 21 Strategy seeks to forge direct links into the planning system and local
regeneration through the introduction of pilot sustainability indicators. It calls upon developments to

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 93
 address the thirteen themes which embrace social, economic, ecological concerns. The indicators
form a useful checklist for developments.The Greenwich Strategy recognises the importance of the
environmental well being of Greenwich; it aims to create a clean and well cared for environment
and ensures the best use of natural resources.
5.4 The Borough is a statutory Waste Disposal Authority (WDA) and forms part of a voluntary
grouping of authorities (South East London Waste Disposal Group: SELWDG) which co-ordinates
their duties under the Environmental Protection Act 1990, in consultation with the Environment
Agency. Government guidance has established a hierarchical approach to waste management, which
is addressed within the detailed policies in this chapter.The approach seeks waste minimisation, and
views disposal as a last resort. The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: ‘Rethinking
Rubbish in London’ was published in September 2003.
5.5 The Borough is wholly within the operational area of Thames Water, which is responsible for water
supply, sewerage and sewage treatment. The Environment Agency functions of safeguarding the
water environment, including water pollution control and flood defence, are exercised over most of
the Borough by the Environment Agency Thames Region. A small area within New Eltham and
Avery Hill Wards drains into the River Cray system and is in the Environment Agency Southern
Region’s area.
5.6 Local Environment Agency Plans (LEAP’s), produced by the Environment Agency are a series of 5
year Action Plans for river catchment areas.They seek to protect and enhance the local environment
of the area.The Ravensbourne and Marsh Dykes LEAP was published in 1998, the Thames Tideway
LEAP in 1999 and the Darent LEAP in 2000.
5.7 Many of the environmental issues discussed in this chapter are also the subject of the Building
Regulations (1991) and compliance with these is mandatory.

Policies
Control of Pollution
5.8 PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004) sets out the Government’s planning policies relating
to pollution control. It sets out advice on the relationship between controls over development under
planning and pollution control legislation.

Pollution
E1 Planning permission will normally not be granted where a proposed development or change of
use would generally have a significant adverse effect on the amenities of adjacent occupiers or
users, and especially where proposals would be likely to result in the unacceptable emission of
odours, fumes, dust, water and soil pollutants or grit.

E2 Planning permission will not normally be granted for new developments or extensions of existing
industrial, commercial, leisure or other uses that produce significant and unacceptable levels of
noise and/or vibration at site boundaries or within adjacent sensitive areas, especially residential
areas.

E3 Housing or other sensitive uses will not normally be permitted on sites adjacent to existing
problem uses, unless ameliorating measures can reasonably be taken and which can be sought
through the imposition of conditions.

94 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
 Reason for E1, E2 and E3
5.9 To protect the amenities of areas where people live and work the Council will seek to separate
them from problem uses. Problem uses are defined as those which would result in the unacceptable
emission of noise, odours, fumes, dust, water and soil pollutants, grit or vibration. Policy E6 deals with
air pollution. Policies on the location of commercial and industrial uses which may cause such
problems are set out in the Jobs and Local Economy chapter.
5.10 Planning applications for major developments may need to be accompanied by an Environmental
Impact Assessment subject to Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and
Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999. Applicants are advised to approach
the Council at an early stage in the development process to determine whether an Environmental
Statement is required to be submitted with the application. Assessment of all the environmental
impacts in one Environmental Statement will assist the determination of applications.
5.11 PPG24; Planning and Noise introduces the concept of Noise Exposure categories [NEC’s] ranging
from A-D. It guides the consideration of planning applications for residential development near
transport and mixed sources of noise.These categories will be applied where appropriate.
5.12 The London Plan states that Boroughs should reduce noise by promoting sustainable design and
construction and well managed, designated locations for noise generating activities.
5.13 Minimising the adverse effects of noise and/or vibration of proposed development can be sought
by imposing conditions requiring the inclusion of noise and/or vibration attenuation measures in any
planning permission where development or a change of use is proposed on sites or in buildings
adjacent to a permanent significant noise and/or vibration source.
5.14 Conditions imposed will be appropriate to the development and thus may vary from restricting
hours of use or operation of machinery to specific periods. Excessive noise and/or vibration can be
intrusive to future occupants or users of development. For most developments arrangements can
be made to mitigate the effects of noise, such as the position of the buildings on site, internal layout
of buildings, window details including insulation and boundary treatment. Encouraging such measures
as the use of sound insulation materials on noise sensitive facades facing classified roads can reduce
noise from traffic schemes.

E4 The Council will seek to reduce nuisance caused by existing uses from the emission of noise,
fumes, light, dust, grit, smells, or vibration by:
i. Negotiating reduction of activity or installation of ameliorating measures.
ii. Encouraging relocation where appropriate.
iii. Refusing planning permission for consolidation or expansion of problem uses, or imposing
conditions on planning permissions.
iv. Taking enforcement action where appropriate.

Reason
5.15 To improve the amenities of occupiers and users of adjoining sites adversely affected by existing
operations.

Light Pollution
E5 Planning permission will be granted for developments for new outdoor lights, where the applicant
can demonstrate that the proposals are designed to minimise light pollution. Lighting proposals
which would adversely affect residential dwellings, sites of nature conservation value and
protected or priority species and their habitats will be regarded as unacceptable.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 95
 Reason
5.16 The impact of lighting on residential amenity and on the environment are material considerations in
the decision making process. Floodlights and outdoor lighting of developments can illuminate an area
much wider than the area of immediate activity, causing visual intrusion for neighbouring uses.
Residential areas are particularly prone to this, and their amenity should be protected. Lighting can
adversely affect species such as bats. Policy O13 deals with the control of floodlighting of sports
facilities.

Air Pollution
5.17 The Government has displayed a strong commitment towards improving air quality, most recently
through the National Air Quality Strategy, in fulfilment of the requirement of the Environment Act
1995. This Act outlines a new system of local air quality management, and Local Authorities are
required to carry out periodic reviews of air quality and to assess present and likely future air quality
against the air quality standards and objectives prescribed by the Air Quality Regulations.Where the
objectives are not likely to be achieved an Air Quality Management Area [AQMA] must be
designated. Greenwich designated the whole of the Borough as a AQMA in 2001 and the Air
Quality Action Plan was published in 2002. Greenwich Peninsula has been designated as the first
Low Emission Zone (LEZ) in the UK.The Council will examine the potential to create further LEZs
through the use of Section 106 agreements.The Mayor’s Air Quality Strategy: Cleaning London’s Air,
was published in September 2002.The Council also has responsibility for enforcing Local Authority
Air Pollution Controls [LAAPC] introduced under Part l of the Environmental Protection Act 1990,
and the smoke, grit and dust controls of the Clean Air Act 1993.

E6 Development proposals with the potential to result in a significant deterioration in air quality will
be resisted unless measures to minimise the impact of air pollutants are included. Such planning
applications should be accompanied by an assessment of the likely impact of the development on
air quality. In areas of poor air quality, proposals for development which may be sensitive to air
pollution will be required to demonstrate appropriate mitigating design solutions.

Reason
5.18 The declaration of the whole Borough as an Air Quality Management Area indicates the seriousness
of air pollution in the Borough. Thus when considering development proposals a minimisation in
airborne pollutants will be sought. It is important that development proposals do not prejudice the
implementation of the Air Quality Action Plan to reduce the specified pollutants. (Particulates,
Nitrogen Dioxide and Sulphur Dioxide). Air quality assessments accompanying planning applications
should be based on the Technical Guidance Note for developers and consultants issued jointly by
London local authorities (ALG 2001) and should indicate impact both with and without
minimisation measures.
5.19 Areas of poor air quality are identified in the Air Quality Action Plan. Some uses, such as residential,
may be particularly susceptible to air pollution.The impact of air pollution can be reduced through
design measures, such as setting dwellings back from the road and the use of ventilation systems.
Proposals for such development should show how ameliorating measures have been taken into
account in the design of the scheme.

E7 The Council will pursue traffic restraint; traffic reduction and other measures to reduce vehicle
emissions including promoting the availability of less polluting alternative fuels. In addition it will
seek the co-operation of developers: technically in providing systems capable of operating
efficiently on ‘cleaner’ fuel sources; operationally through encouraging ‘Green Transport Plans’;
and locationally by the linking of development to public transport (See Policy M3).

96 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
 Reason
5.20 To contribute to a reduction in air pollution and the emission of ‘greenhouse’ gases, access to and
the use of fuels with low sulphur content, unleaded petrol, LPG and CNG and other means of
reducing atmospheric and air pollution from vehicles, including new technologies will be encouraged.
Traffic restraint and reduction measures will also seek to develop more sustainable travel patterns,
relieving congestion, noise pollution and reducing energy use. Green Transport Plans allow
organisations, especially those with many staff, to address their current transport impacts and put in
place initiatives to reduce commuter and work related travel and minimise the environmental
impacts of necessary transport needs.

Energy Conservation
5.21 The Government has established a target that 10% of UK electricity requirements should be met
from renewable sources by 2010. Regional studies were commissioned to consider how these
targets could be met.The London Regional study recommends the adoption of a target for London
of 2.14%, (including energy from waste), of estimated electricity demand by 2010. However, the
sponsors of the regional study (Government Office for London, Greater London Authority and the
Association of London Government) are disappointed that the target is so low, and are looking for
new and innovative ideas to exceed the target. The Mayor’s Energy Strategy: ‘Green light to clean
power’ was published in 2004.The Council’s Energy Strategy was published in April 2002.
5.22 Increasing the proportion of electricity derived from renewable sources is part of a wider national
strategy to reduce consumption of conventional fossil fuels and associated production of
greenhouse gas emissions. Achieving these reductions will also require transport emissions to be cut
and increased energy efficiency and conservation within the domestic, commercial and industrial
sectors.
5.23 Land use planning affects transport, design, layout, orientation and energy consumption of the
construction and use of buildings. The use and burning of fossil fuels causes air pollution, and their
extraction and transport causes further environmental harm. In addition, policies within the Plan’s
Movement Chapter aim to promote fuel efficiency and reduce the need to travel. Energy
Conservation is also a key principle of design - as detailed in Design and Conservation Policy D1.

Energy Efficiency
E8 The Council will encourage development that is energy efficient by influencing layout and
orientation, design and use of materials where these do not conflict with other policies of the
Plan.All developments should:
i. be environmentally and resource efficient to build and to operate (see Policy D1);
ii. use materials from local sustainable sources wherever possible, including the re-use of
materials;
iii. incorporate a waste segregation system (see Policy E15);
iv. incorporate measures for water conservation; and
v. be subject to an assessment of the impact on the amenity of the local environment, taking
into account the existing character of the area.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 97
 Renewable Energy
E9 The Council will expect all new developments with a floorspace greater than 1000 sqm or
residential developments of 10 or more units to incorporate renewable energy production
equipment to provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements where there is no
conflict with other policies in the Plan.
The Council will encourage the development of renewable energy projects and developments
which include renewable energy facilities and energy saving technologies where there is no
conflict with other policies in the Plan.

Reasons for E.8 and E9

5.24 To help reduce energy consumption, protect natural sources of material [especially tropical forests],
and to aid recycling of waste products in accordance with the Council’s Sustainable Development
Policy (2003). The London Plan states that Boroughs should include policies to improve energy
efficiency and increase the proportion of energy generated from renewable sources. Government
Policy is to stimulate the use of renewable energy sources wherever they are economically attractive
and environmentally acceptable.
5.25 Buildings in use account for a significant proportion of energy use: the planning system can help to
reduce energy requirements, by ensuring the provision of renewable energy production equipment
in new development or refurbishment / conversion of existing buildings. Encouraging energy
efficiency by promoting improved design, form, layout and orientation of development and use of
appropriate materials can lead to reduced consumption of energy and environmental cost of
running the building.This could include the use of passive solar design principles and developers are
referred to ‘Planning for Passive Solar Design’. (BRESCU 1999). Savings of energy for heating, lighting,
cooling and ventilation can all be achieved depending on the building type, although passive solar
design principles are best suited to newly built buildings. This approach will also contribute to
national efforts to reverse the damaging effects of energy consumption on climate change.
5.26 65% of the electricity used in the Council’s administration buildings, is ‘green electricity’ from low
carbon fuels. The Council will introduce measures to improve thermal insulation in its own
properties to the standard set by the Building Regulations and wherever possible aims to exceed
this standard. Developers will be encouraged to do likewise. Water conservation measures may
include where appropriate; water efficient toilet and shower facilities, grey water recycling systems,
compostable toilets and/or garden water conservation systems. When assessing applications
particular regard will be paid to the existing character of the area and the appropriateness of the
design.
5.27 Planning Policy Statement 22 (PPS22): Renewable Energy, states that Local Authorities may include
policies which require a percentage of the energy used in new residential, commercial or industrial
development to come from on-site renewable energy developments. Proposal 12 of the Mayor’s
Energy Strategy requests that Local Authorities set targets for renewable energy generation.
Proposal 13 states that applications referable to the Mayor would be expected to generate at least
10% of their energy needs from renewable energy on site where feasible.
5.28 There are various types of renewable energy and regard also needs to be paid to technologies
which may emerge in the future. Within Greenwich, the most promising sources of renewable
energy generation are likely to be solar heated hot water, photovoltaic cells and combined heat and
power.The various renewable energy technologies will have different environmental impacts, and it
has to be recognised that some technologies may not be suitable in Greenwich. This requirement
may be relaxed where the applicant can demonstrate that the installation of renewable energy
production equipment is not viable given the location, design and type of development. Combined
Heat and Power (CHP), on it own and in conjunction with Community Heating systems, can provide

98 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
 cost effective, reliable energy and heating at high levels of efficiency and relatively low levels of
pollution. CHP engines are already used at a number of Council-sponsored and private sector
buildings in the Borough, including the Waterfront Leisure Centre, Woolwich, the Glyndon Road
Estate and Amylum UK Ltd, Tunnel Avenue. Community Heating is in use in the Greenwich
Millennium Village.
5.29 Applications should include an energy assessment which sets out the predicted energy requirements
of the development, and how it is proposed to supply at least 10% of this requirement from
renewable resources.Alternatively, a full and complete explanation would be required of the reasons
why this target could not be met. London Renewables publication Integrating renewable energy into
new developments; Toolkit for planners, developers, and consultants provides guidance on assessing
energy requirements and the cost and feasibility of different technologies.
(http://www.london.gov.uk/mayor/environment/energy/docs/renewables_toolkit.pdf) Proposals of a scale
or nature likely to have a significant environmental impact should be supported by an environmental
assessment, as required by Circular 02/99: Environmental Impact Assessment and the Town and
Country Planning (EIA) Regulations (England and Wales) 1999.

Hazardous Materials
E10 Proposals which concern the storage, handling, production and disposal of hazardous materials
will only be permitted subject to conditions to safeguard public health and if safety and the
ecology of the natural environment can be maintained. The Council will seek to control the
location of new establishments where hazardous substances are present and the development of
land within the vicinity of such establishments.

Reason
5.30 Hazardous materials can compromise the fragility of the natural environment and present a risk to
public health and safety. Proposals involving such materials on development sites will be subject to
conditions including a safety audit and survey for hazardous materials and the advice contained in
Circular 04/00: Planning Controls for Hazardous Substances.

Contaminated Land
E11 A preliminary site investigation, prior to the determination of a planning application, will normally
be required if a site is known or is likely to have been in contaminative uses. Where
contamination is found, the council will need to be assured that the development can be built
and occupied safely without any adverse environmental or health impacts, otherwise conditions
requiring full remedial action will be imposed to deal with:
i. the particular type or types of contamination;
ii. the problems of the ground exhalation of gases; and
iii. the restoration of land to beneficial use.

Reason
5.31 To avoid the health and safety hazards associated with polluted land and to protect the community
and to comply with PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (2004). Contaminated land and
potentially contaminated land is defined as: “land that has substances in or under it, thereby posing
a real or possible risk to humans and their environment, or causing or likely to cause pollution of
controlled waters”. Contaminated land is often found on sites which have a history of landfill, or
which have previously accommodated a polluting industrial use. Once these sites, or sites adjacent
to these areas become available for redevelopment it is essential that a full technical investigation is

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 99
 carried out. Guidelines, as published by the former Department for the Environment,Transport and
the Regions concerning contaminated land and the Borough’s Land Use Registry of Contaminated
Sites place a requirement upon Local Planning Authorities to prepare a strategy detailing how the
sites identified in the registry will be dealt with. The Council’s Contaminated Land Strategy was
published in 2002. The strategy also provides advice on investigation and remediation measures,
including defining levels of pollutants that constitute land as being contaminated and what levels
could result in significant harm. Contaminated sites may have archaeological value; this should be
taken into consideration when conducting investigation / remediation works, in accordance with
Policies D30 and D31 and PPG16 (Archaeology and Planning).

Site Servicing
E12 The Council will seek to ensure the provision of satisfactory services to areas where new
communities are being established. New development should take place where it can take
maximum advantage of spare capacity in existing infrastructure. Where this is not possible
development will be phased to give sufficient time for new infrastructure to be provided. The
Council will insist on the provision of adequate services before giving permission for
development or redevelopment and may require developers to contribute to off-site and on-site
works so that sites can be properly serviced.

Reason
5.32 To ensure that community need for up-to-date services is met. While in general development, sites
can be adequately serviced there may be cases where development should be phased or
developers should contribute to service provision. Prospective developers should ascertain the
adequacy of services at an early date, in particular the electricity suppliers should be contacted
about development in Thamesmead, and in the area between the Woolwich Road and the Thames.

Electromagnetic Fields
E13 The Council will have regard to the current advice as given by the National Radiological
Protection Board concerning the electromagnetic effects from radio frequency and power
frequency electromagnetic fields when deciding applications for housing or other sensitive land
uses on adjacent sites.

Reason
5.33 The Council and the public are concerned that there may be a risk to the health of residents in
close proximity to electromagnetic fields.The National Radiological Protection Board has a statutory
duty to advise on such risks. Telecommunications Development is covered by Policy D11 and
Satellite Antennae by Policy D12.

Waste Disposal
5.34 PPS10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (2005) and the Government’s national waste
strategy ‘Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000’ set out the Government’s planning policies
relating to waste management.They set out a policy framework for sustainable waste management
within which stakeholders can plan and take waste management decisions, which reduces the
amount of waste we produce, and, where waste is produced, deals with it in a way that contributes
to the economic, social and environmental goals of sustainable development.The ‘Waste Hierarchy’
outlined within the Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000 is a step towards tackling waste
disposal within the principles of sustainable development. Policies regarding waste should place an
emphasis on those options at the top of the hierarchy.The waste management options are:

100 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

 • Reduction
• Re-use
• Recovery, including recycling, composting and energy recovery
• Disposal.
5.35 The Council will apply the principle of The Best Practicable Environmental Option (BPEO) when
considering waste management options. This procedure establishes the option that provides the
most benefits or least damage to the environment, in both the long and short terms.
5.36 The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy: Rethinking Rubbish in London was published
in September 2003, and will also be a consideration when making planning decisions on Waste
Management facilities. The Mayor published ‘Recycling and recovery facilities: sites investigation in
London’ in July 2005 as part of a London-wide review of waste sites. It is expected that this will
inform the proposed Sub Regional Development Framework for East London, to be published in
2006.The Borough is part of the South East London Waste Disposal Group (SELWDG). SELWDG
maintains close liaison with other WDAs.
5.37 The development of South East London Combined Heat and Power (SELCHP), at Deptford, as part
of the Borough’s association with the SELWDG has provided the Borough with a facility that both
processes non-hazardous waste and reduces reliance upon landfill sites. This is a preferable option
to landfill disposal, as the waste hierarchy in the Government’s Waste Strategy for England and Wales
2000 indicates. In addition, SELCHP contributes towards energy recovery, with energy generated
through incineration, being sold onto the National Grid, and some materials are also recycled.The
Council is contractually committed to using the SELCHP Waste Disposal Facility until 2024, which
has sufficient capacity for the predicted level of non-recycled waste in the Borough. No further
incineration capacity or landfill capacity is required during the Plan period; other sites for waste
disposal either within, or outside of the Borough, will not be sought.
5.38 The Council have contractual arrangements to process 105,000 mt of waste a year at SELCHP until
2024, and to process up to 30,000 mt of mixed dry recyclate a year at the Materials Recycling Facility
(MRF). The Council are allocated permits to consign waste to landfill under the Landfill Allowance
Trading System (LATS); the annual LATS allocation varies over the Plan period from 35,000 mt to
53,000 mt.The proportion of the Borough’s municipal waste sent to landfill is about 30% compared
with the London-wide rate of 73% (London Plan Table 4A.).
5.39 The forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for 2003/4 are 124,000 mt, rising to 159,000 in
2010/11. The Council have sufficient capacity for the forecasted yearly municipal waste arisings for
the Plan period and will have unused LATS permits which can be sold to other Boroughs. The
Council are investigating the possibility of developing an anaerobic digestion facility in the Borough,
which will enable a greater proportion of green and kitchen waste to be processed.The existing and
proposed waste facilities have sufficient capacity for the Plan period. It is therefore not considered
necessary to identify new sites in the UDP.
5.40 However the Council will also, through the review of its Waste Disposal Plan and Recycling Plan,
seek to increase the use of the more sustainable options of waste reduction, reuse and recycling.
The land use policies in this Plan seek to ensure that the Borough’s land resources are managed so
that the Waste Disposal and Recycling Plans can be implemented.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 101

 Waste Reduction, Reuse, Recovery and Disposal
E14 The Council will encourage waste reduction, reuse, recycling, energy recovery - with waste
disposal as a final option. In addition, the Council will apply the ‘proximity principle’ and seek to
minimise the effect of developments on the surrounding area; encouraging rail and river
movement and optimising location to minimise environmental impact.This will apply in particular
when considering applications for:
i. Recycling facilities;
ii. Waste transfer facilities;
iii. Developments involving the handling, transport treatment, storage, recovery and disposal of
hazardous wastes;
iv. Waste transportation.

Reason
5.41 The Mayor’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should apply
the proximity principle and the hierarchy of waste management.
5.42 An increased emphasis is now placed upon the minimisation of waste production, the reuse and
recycling of waste materials, and that waste disposal is environmentally responsible. The
Environmental Protection Act 1990 sets out a framework and targets for waste management
policies and planning policies. The Government aims to have 30% of household waste recycled or
composted by 2010 (Waste Strategy for England and Wales 2000). Statutory Borough targets are
to recycle 10% of household waste by 2003/4 and 18% by 2005/6 (Guidance on Municipal Waste
Management 2001).The London Plan targets are to exceed 25% by 2005, 30% by 2010 and 33%
by 2025.The Public Service Agreement target is to recycle 19% of household waste by 2004/5.The
Council is on course to achieve these targets; in June 2004, the proportion of household waste
recycled was 16%
5.43 There is an existing Licensed Waste Transfer Station at Nathan Way, Thamesmead. A Materials
Recycling Facility (MRF) opened on the adjacent site in November 2004. The Mayor’s Municipal
Waste Management Strategy proposes that waste authorities should make household recycling
collections of at least three materials; the MRF will enable the kerb-side collection of 5 mixed dry
recyclables (glass, cans, plastic, paper and cardboard) from every property in the Borough.The MRF
will also serve neighbouring Boroughs and will enable residents of this Borough and the sub-region
to recycle more materials more easily.A re-use and recycling centre, which will enable the processing
and re-use of discarded electrical goods and furniture, is due to open in August 2006.This will assist
manufacturers and retailers to comply with the Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment Directive.
5.44 The provision of handling plants close to the source of waste (‘the proximity principle’) is desirable.
However this needs to be balanced against the need to ensure compatibility with surrounding land
uses and that the proposal does not have a detrimental effect on the environment from processes
producing noise, dust or fumes. Major developers on riparian sites should first consider the use of
river transportation for the removal of demolition spoil and import of materials. Alternatively, sites
should have good access to rail or river transport.

Minimise Waste at Source

E15 The Council will encourage on site provision for the reduction of waste and the separation of
recyclable materials when considering large-scale commercial, industrial, health and major
residential applications.

102 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

 Reason
5.45 The London Plan states that Boroughs should work to minimise the level of waste generated and
should apply the principles of the Best Practical Environmental Option, which requires that waste
be treated as close to source as possible.
5.46 Proposals which include provision for the reduction of waste, or the separation at source for
recycling in terms of storage spaces and access for specialised vehicles will help to reduce damage
to the environment. Greenwich Environmental Management Services [GEMS] operates a Waste
Exchange database for businesses wishing to trade rather than dispose of waste arisings. Residential
schemes should incorporate measures for community recycling that minimises waste disposal. All
new residential developments should provide refuse bins and recycling boxes.

E16 Where large-scale development takes place land should be set aside for the duration of the
construction period to facilitate the sorting and storing of waste inert material. Such land shall
be sensitively sited in relation to local communities and businesses.

Reason
5.47 Such facilities will allow material suitable for recycling to be separated and leachate and methane
producing material to be deposited in less environmentally sensitive land fill sites.

Drainage and Flood Protection

E17 All development will be controlled so as not to give rise to flooding or surface, groundwater or
aquifer pollution. Surface water should be disposed of as close to source as possible, or
attenuated before discharge to a watercourse or surface water sewer. Surface water should not
be allowed to enter the foul system.

Reason
5.48 To avoid the risk of flooding, pollution and other detrimental impacts on the environment, to protect
public health and to safeguard sources of extractable water.
5.49 The Government through PPG25’ Development and Flood Risk’, the Environment Agency and the
London Plan promote the use of “soft” sustainable drainage systems (SuDS) as the most sustainable
form of surface water drainage for new developments. This involves moving away from traditional
piped drainage systems to engineering solutions that mimic natural drainage processes. SuDS
control surface water run-off as close to its origin as possible before it is discharged to a
watercourse or to the ground. There are a wide range of techniques; including water butts,
permeable / porous surfaces, grassed swales and balancing ponds, that aim to reduce problems of
river pollution and flooding caused by conventional urban drainage systems. To implement these
techniques effectively developers need to consider their use at the earliest possible stage. The
Environment Agency can advise on site specific requirements for developments on sites larger than
0.5 hectares.
5.50 This is particularly important in catchment areas (Map 7) and on riverside sites. Without careful
consideration the siting and design of development can increase the likelihood of flooding in areas
downstream.

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 103

E18 Areas within Zones 2 and 3 at risk from fluvial flooding are identified on the Proposals Map.Areas
at risk from tidal flooding, but protected by existing flood defences, are shown on Map 7. Planning
applications for development on sites of more than 1 hectare within these areas must be
accompanied by a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale of and nature of the
development, the level of flood risk, and the protection afforded by the existing defences.
Development in undeveloped areas at risk from fluvial flooding will only be permitted in
exceptional circumstances. In developed areas at risk from fluvial flooding, development will only
be permitted where appropriate flood defence measures are taken, and it can be demonstrated
that there is no increased risk of flooding to other sites.

Reason
5.51 Development within an area at risk from fluvial flooding can have two adverse effects. Not only can
the development itself be put at direct risk but through a reduction in the storage capacity of the
flood plain and an impeding of the flow of water, other areas can be subjected to an increased risk
of flooding.The areas at risk from fluvial flooding are shown on the Proposals Map and the areas at
risk from tidal flooding are shown on Map 7.This information is taken from the Flood Zones Map
produced by the Environment Agency. In Flood Zone 2, flooding is predicted to occur at least once
every 1000 years but not more than once every 100 years (i.e. 0.1-1% probability). In Flood Zone
3, flooding is predicted to occur at least once every 100 years (i.e. >1% probability).The tidal flood
risk areas are protected by existing defences to a 1:1000 level (i.e. 0.1% probability of flooding). It
should be noted that as flood alleviation works are carried out the areas at risk will change.
The Council will consult the Environment Agency on planning applications for development in flood
risk areas.
5.52 Government Advice is contained in PPG25: Development and Flood Risk (2001).This sets out the
responsibilities of all parties. Where development is proposed in a flood risk area, the guidance
requires a flood risk assessment appropriate to the scale and nature of the development, the level
of flood risk, and the protection afforded by the existing defences to be carried out. A sequential
test should be carried out where development is proposed on an unallocated site within a flood
risk area.This must demonstrate that there are no reasonable options available in lower flood risk
areas.

E19 The Council will, in consultation with the Environment Agency, ensure that new developments
safeguard existing tidal and fluvial flood defences.Where works are being carried out in proximity
to a tidal or fluvial flood defence the Council will seek to safeguard and where possible extend
public access to the waterfront and protect and enhance existing ecological features. Generally
consideration will be given to maintaining and/or improving the existing ecological features, the
existing flood defences and access to flood defence facilities for operational and maintenance
purposes.

Reason
5.53 The tidal and fluvial defences are an essential means of protecting low-lying areas from flooding.
Where development relating to the tidal defences is permitted the Council may use this
opportunity to extend the public access to the waterside in support of its policy to promote
opportunities for leisure, tourism, riverside walks and cycle ways along the Thames. In light of
anticipated sea level rise and climate change the Council will encourage riverside development
proposals to examine the opportunity to retreat flood defences to increase flood storage,
biodiversity and visual connections with the river (See Policy W2).
5.54 The relevant flood defence levels are:-
Bugsby’s Reach (upstream of the Thames Barrier): 5.18m ODN

104 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

 Map 7: Flooding and Attenuation Areas
© Crown copyright

Area in Ravensbourne Catchment in which additional run-off must be attenuated

Area draining to Marsh Dykes in which additional run-off must be attenuated and/or stored

Areas at risk from a o nce-in-a-hundred years’ tidal flooding event, but protected
by existing defences against a ‘once-in-a-1,000 years’ event (until 2030, works ongoing
to extend protection to 2100).

ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION 105

 Woolwich Reach and Gallions Reach (Downstream of Thames Barrier): 7.2m ODN Barking Reach:
7.1m ODN.
Greenwich Reach, Blackwall Reach: 5.23 ODN
These flood defence levels are likely to increase in the light of anticipated sea level rise. Existing tidal
flood defences are designed to protect London at a 1:1000 flood risk level until 2030; the
Environment Agency is working to ensure protection until 2100.
5.55 Adequate access to flood defence facilities such as embankments, tidal sluices and pumping stations,
must be retained, and where appropriate improved, for operational, maintenance and emergency
purposes.

106 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

 6. DESIGN & CONSERVATION
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
6.1 The quality of the external environment affects residents, visitors, and those who work in and travel
through the Borough. It has an impact on the Borough’s image, its economy, and the way the
Borough is seen by the outside world as well as by those who live here. Higher standards of
environmental quality and design are important in assisting the regeneration of the Borough and
contributing to the quality of life.The Greenwich Strategy recognises how the role of a high quality
environment contributes to the health, safety and wellbeing of all communities and aims to make
the most of Borough’s historic heritage.
6.2 This chapter is concerned with environmental quality in terms of urban design; the external
appearance of buildings, the design, appearance and usefulness of urban space and the quality of the
townscape. New development should be seen as contributing towards a better quality environment
as part of a coherent urban design framework which looks at how the urban environment is used
and how it has an impact on the way development is planned. It is also concerned with conservation
and heritage issues, and contains policies designed to promote a high standard of design, to preserve
and enhance the existing character, to ensure the creation of a safe and accessible environment, to
promote environmental improvements, and to ensure that the natural environment is not adversely
affected. Specific policies on the natural environment and its protection and conservation are
included in the Environmental Protection and Open Space Chapters.The general policies on design
and conservation are:

SD1 The Council will encourage a high quality of design in all new developments and alterations to
existing developments which positively contribute to the improvement of their accessibility,
safety and the built and natural environment.

SD2 To preserve or enhance areas of recognised and valued character; for the Borough, and London
as a whole, including historic landscapes, fine views, open land, wildlife habitats, woodland, trees,
wetlands and wildflower meadows.

SD3 To preserve or enhance Conservation Areas, and to protect Listed Buildings of architectural or
historic interest and their settings.

SD4 To improve areas of poor quality environment.

SD5 To promote the use of previously developed land and to ensure new developments make efficient
and appropriate use of land.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

6.3 The Borough contains areas of unrivalled townscape quality and buildings of national importance, a
royal heritage stretching back several centuries, and the longest waterfront of any London Borough.
It also contains areas of poor environment, areas of deprivation, and older industrial and commercial
areas with environmental problems.
6.4 Maritime Greenwich is an inscribed World Heritage Site, there are 20 Conservation Areas, almost
1000 statutory Listed Buildings, historic gardens and parks, sites of ancient monuments and areas of
special character.The control of development has to be seen in the context of the need to conserve
this heritage whilst encouraging appropriate new development. This sustainable approach will

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 107

 facilitate economic and social development that also safeguards the environment in which we live; a
process endorsed by the Council’s Local Agenda 21 Strategy.The Council attaches great importance
to the need to encourage and promote a higher quality environment through design and
conservation policies, by carrying out environmental improvements, by achieving high standards of
design in new developments, by preserving the best of the past, and by helping to provide safe and
secure environments for all. The World Heritage Site Management Plan (2004) considers
sympathetic design and conservation for the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site.The Council
has produced design guidelines to provide more detailed guidance for achieving a coherent and co-
ordinated urban fabric. Design advice is available for specific Conservation Areas, in an Urban Design
Strategy for Woolwich Town Centre and a Streetscape Manual for Greenwich Town Centre.
6.5 Changes to the existing environment should help meet the needs of local people and should help
to promote good living and working conditions generally. New development in particular should
take note of urban design principles and specific guidelines set out in the policies, including respect
for the locality, and topography, character of adjoining buildings, local materials, context and scale, a
proper relationship with the street, the creation of a legible environment, and concern for the needs
of local residents. A high quality of development will assist in the regeneration of the Borough by
making it more attractive to investment as well as to residents and workers.
6.6 The Borough has and continues to undergo, significant change resulting from inward investment and
regeneration. The northern part of the Borough has seen developments along the Waterfront in
particular, and redevelopment on a scale unrivalled in the Region. Sites including the Peninsula and
Royal Arsenal have provided the Borough with the unprecedented opportunity to incorporate
quality design with integrated transport links and new developments. Elsewhere, the pressures may
be less intense, but no less important for residents who value their surroundings and wish for a
pleasant and safe environment. It is important on this context to promote, in line with Government
guidance, the reuse of previously developed land and the efficient and appropriate use of land.The
target is that over 90% development will be on brownfield sites.
6.7 There are, also, areas of poor environment and deprivation where not only does good design need
to be encouraged but where environmental improvements need to be targeted and promoted.The
character of the Borough and the guidelines for design should not be used to prevent good
imaginative design, for in appropriate locations, high quality buildings in a modern idiom will be
welcomed. With its 13 kilometre waterfront, the Borough can offer opportunities where the very
best modern designs can rival their historic counterparts in their imagination, style and ability to
create a new environment worthy of the historic context.
6.8 The detailed policies are set out below in a number of distinct, but interrelated categories. Firstly,
there are policies relating to urban design. Secondly, Environmental Quality policies cover heritage
issues including Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings, and thirdly Environmental Improvement
policies conclude this chapter.

108 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Policies
Urban Design
D1 Development proposals should be of a high quality of design and will be expected to:
i. Provide a positive relationship between the proposed and existing urban context by taking
account of:
- topography, landscape setting, ridges and natural features;
- existing townscape, local landmarks, views, and skylines;
- the architecture of surrounding buildings;
- the quality and nature of materials, both traditional and modern;
- established layout and spatial character;
- the scale, height, bulk and massing of adjacent townscape;
- features of architectural, historical, archaeological, biodiversity and their setting;
- the effective use of land;
- the potential for a mix of uses;
- patterns of activity, movement and circulation;
- the cultural diversity of the area.
ii. Promote local distinctiveness by providing a site-specific design solution.
iii. Demonstrate through proposed land uses, layout and design that the development
contributes to a safe and secure environment for users and the public. (Policy D7)
iv. Achieve accessible and inclusive environments for all, including disabled people.
v. Integrate with existing path and circulation networks and patterns of activity.
vi. Create attractive, manageable well-functioning spaces within the site.
vii. Maintain adequate daylight and sunlight to adjoining buildings and land.
viii. Maximise energy conservation, through effective layout, orientation, use of appropriate
materials, detailing and landscape design.
ix. Achieve the Building Research Establishment’s BREEAM excellent rating which addresses a
wide variety of environmental issues

D2 Major development proposals and new build developments proposed for sensitive locations
should be accompanied by a Design Statement setting out:
- an analysis of the site and its environs;
- how the design relates to and enhances its urban context;
- how the development would relate to established patterns of movement and activity in
the wider area;
- the implications of the development for urban sustainability;
- the principles behind the architectural and landscape design.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 109

 Developments and sensitive locations requiring a Design Statement include:
- developments of more than 25 dwelling units;
- developments of more than 5,000 sqm;
- sites fronting the River Thames;
- within the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site;
- within or adjacent to conservation areas;
- within the setting of a listed building or scheduled ancient monument;
- within or affecting historic landscapes;
- within an area of special character.

Reason for D1 and D2

6.9 The Council attaches great importance to the achievement of high quality design that adds to the
high quality of the Borough’s environment and to Greenwich distinctiveness.The above policies are
a basis for achieving good urban design and provide a benchmark from which development
proposals can be assessed. They seek to ensure that new development is designed individually for
the specific site and urban context in question.The Borough is not of uniform character but is made
up of areas with distinct identities and developments should reflect this. Good and imaginative design
for individual schemes can make a direct contribution to upgrading overall townscape quality. A high
quality environment can be produced by careful design of townscape elements layout, massing,
materials, safety, relationship of buildings to each other and their surroundings, accessibility and
treatment of spaces between buildings. The Building Research Establishments Environmental
Assessment Method (BREEAM) is a flexible and independently verified environment assessment
method, with environmental performance expressed on a scale of pass to excellent. To achieve
sustainable development, developers are encouraged to attain the excellent standard.The particular
requirements for residential extensions are set out in Policies D9 and D10 and Advice Note 2.
6.10 Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) states that high quality and
inclusive design should be the aim of all those involved in the development process. Good design
should contribute positively to making places better for people. Design which is inappropriate, or
which fails to take the opportunities available for improving the character and quality of an area and
the way it functions, should not be accepted.‘By Design: Urban Design in the Planning System – Towards
Better Practice’ provides advice on implementing the Government’s commitment to good design.
(DETR/CABE, 2000).The London Plan acknowledges that good design is central to all the objectives
of the plan.
6.11 Design Statements are intended to explicitly demonstrate that a range of design issues have been
taken into account in key locations and circumstances, that the development reacts to its urban
context, that there has been an appropriately qualified and experienced design input, and account
has been taken of creating a sustainable environment. The statement should include sufficient
material to fully illustrate the design and impact of the proposal. From 10 August 2006, under the
Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act (2004), listed building consent applications (except for internal
works) and planning applications (except for changes of use and most minor householder
developments) must be accompanied by a design and access statement.

110 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

D3: Development proposals will be expected to take account of ecological factors as well as display
a high standard of landscaping, in particular paying attention to the needs for:
i. The regard for the biodiversity and geological features of the site and the surrounding area,
including protected species (See Policy O22). These features should be respected and the
area’s natural character enhanced.
ii. A survey of flora and fauna on sites of defined ecological importance and on sites over 1
hectare to enable decisions to be made regarding their conservation.
iii. An appropriate level of survey to enable decisions to be made about the existing trees on
the site. Development decisions will be based on the requirement:
a. To protect trees and their root systems from damage as a result of the development both
during and after building operations;
b. To achieve an appropriate replacement of trees taking account of size, coverage and
species where it is agreed that existing trees can be felled;
c. That landscaping schemes should include environmentally appropriate planting using
locally native species and demonstrate appropriate irrigation plans for landscaping.
d. To ensure that planting design does not impact negatively on personal safety and
accessibility.
iv. The retention of trees and the protection and enhancement of natural and ecological
features, tree ridge lines, green corridors, wildlife habitats, boundary walls, surface materials,
hedges and other features where these will contribute to the development.
v. The protection and enhancement of natural river features and corridors by appropriate
landscaping and design. (See Policy O21)

Reason
6.12 Development sites that pay insufficient regard to existing ecological and natural landscape features
can lead to an incoherent urban form and the unnecessary destruction of existing nature
conservation interest. Layouts need to be designed around existing vegetation and landscaping
proposals should be an integral part of the application.The emphasis will be to soften the impact of
the development in its setting and provide visual interest in the street scene and to contribute to
nature conservation. The Council will consult the Environment Agency on development proposals
that directly affect the Boroughs rivers and watercourses.

D4 The Council will seek to achieve improvements to both the urban and natural environment in
line with Policy SC2, e.g. street trees, footways, signs, provision of public art, creation and possible
management of ecological habitat and interpretation projects.

Reason
6.13 The Council’s overall approach to community benefits and planning obligations is set out in Policy
SC2. This policy recognises that there may be developments where it will be relevant for
improvements to the urban and natural environment to be included. Examples of such
improvements are given in the policy and would be secured by legal agreements where appropriate.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 111

 Parking and Access Arrangements
D5 The design and layout of access roads, cyclepaths, footpaths, parking and service areas should be
attractive, safe, convenient and appropriate to the type and scale of the development. Parking and
service arrangements should work effectively and be designed to minimise their visual impact,
ensuring that the amenity of neighbouring properties would not be unduly affected.

Reason
6.14 The success of a development depends to a considerable extent upon the ease of access for
pedestrians and vehicles. In residential areas, emphasis will be placed on providing for the safe and
convenient movement of pedestrians in an attractive, well lit environment, particularly for people
with disabilities, older people and people with young children. Parking can cause considerable
problems in terms of noise, pollution and loss of amenity, particularly in residential areas. Parking
should be provided in accordance with the parking standards set out in the Movement Chapter
(Policies M23 to M27).The conversion of large residential dwellings should regard parking provision
as an important consideration. (See Policies H5 and H6 and Advice Note 3: Planning Standards for
Conversions). Commercial developments should also incorporate significant landscaping within their
design to ensure the parking provision does not dominate the site. Advice on the colour used for
cyclepaths should be sought from the Council to ensure conformity with cycle networks’ standards.

Access for People with Disabilities

D6 Applications for development (including the alteration, extension or change of use) of buildings
and land to which the public have access should, where practical and reasonable, provide suitable
access for disabled people.

Reason
6.15 Many buildings and open spaces are inaccessible to disabled people. Developers and other agencies
should consider the needs of disabled people who might use the building or outdoor spaces as a
place of work, or as visitors or customers. Proposed developments must comply with the guidelines
on access for the disabled ‘Designing for Accessibility’ (published by the Centre for Accessible
Environments and available from the Council’s Access Officer). The Disability Discrimination Act
1995 contains provisions to improve access to services for disabled people. Safety and Security in
the Environment

112 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Safety and Security in the Environment
D7 The Council will require all development to be designed to provide and improve personal safety
and security in the environment particularly for women, children, minority ethnic communities,
lesbians and gay men, older people and people with disabilities.The design of new developments
can contribute to personal safety by:
i. Ensuring that paths, play areas and open spaces are overlooked by inhabited buildings, while
maintaining the privacy of the inhabitants of these buildings;
ii. Avoiding the creation of spaces with ill defined ownership and ensuring there is a clear
distinction between public and private space. Buildings and spaces around them should
contribute towards developing public perception of the environment and their use of the
spaces within it;
iii. Ensuring the development is well integrated into the existing pattern of pedestrian and
vehicular movement and extends links with existing public routes;
iv. Ensuring that landscaping, planting and building does not create dark or secluded areas; and
v. Ensuring that good quality lighting is provided for streets and paths;
vi. Ensuring that community safety measures such as CCTV are provided where it is practical
and appropriate.

Reason
6.16 People’s use of their environment is restricted by both the reality of danger to personal safety and
their fears of insecurity.This is particularly so for disadvantaged groups. It is therefore both desirable
and important that new developments should both provide a safe environment and improve it in
areas where it is poor. Design that enables a building and its surrounding space to function and be
used effectively is important. Good design will help people find their way around. Entrances for
example should be clearly visible, path networks to link buildings and spaces should follow natural
desire lines that people expect to take.Traditional street patterns rather than cul-de-sac designs for
example, enforce this, and contribute towards natural surveillance. An Advice Note ‘Designing for
Personal Safety’ gives further guidance.This advice is supported by guidance from the Department
for Transport, notably ‘Places, Streets and Movement’ (1998) and Design Bulletin no.32: Residential
Roads and Footpaths. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development (2005) advises that development
plan design policies should aim to create safe and accessible environments where crime and
disorder, or fear of crime, does not undermine the quality of life or community cohesion.
6.17 It is not the intention of this policy to promote development in the form of ‘defended enclaves’
protected by security gates, accessible only to residents. Generally security is better promoted by
ensuring that developments are permeable and overlooked as much as possible. Secure ‘enclave’
developments are not considered to generally reduce crime and the fear of crime because such
developments do not address the public realm and do not provide lively frontages.

Trees
D8 The Council will seek to maintain tree coverage, and will encourage tree planting in appropriate
places, especially in areas of deficiency, and the care of existing trees. The planting of trees,
particularly as part of new developments and townscape improvement schemes and particularly
of native species, is encouraged. Tree preservation orders will be used to protect trees of
environmental importance and visual amenity where their health or amenity is threatened.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 113

 Reason
6.18 The Borough’s trees are important elements of the landscape and contribute to its visual and
ecological character.Tree planting will not be encouraged in places where this would be detrimental
to existing nature conservation interests, such as valuable grasslands. In Conservation Areas work to
or the felling of trees requires consent.

Residential Extensions
D9 All new roof extensions should be designed to respect the scale and character of the host
building, the street scene and the surrounding area and respect the amenities of adjoining
occupiers.

Reason
6.19 To ensure that roof extensions do not have an adverse effect on the appearance of the building or
street scene and do not detrimentally affect residential amenity. Detailed guidance for extensions are
set out in Advice Note 2.

D10 Proposals for rear, side and other additions should be limited to a scale and design appropriate
to the building and locality.They will need to meet the following criteria:
i. Two storey extensions to the side of semi detached houses will not be permitted unless
they are designed to avoid a ‘terracing effect’ in conjunction with adjacent extensions.
ii. Rear extensions will not be permitted where these could cause an unacceptable loss of
amenity to adjoining occupiers by reducing the amount of daylight, sunlight or privacy they
enjoy, interfere with a pleasant outlook or result in an increased sense of enclosure.
iii. In most cases a pitched roof will be required on side or rear extensions when they would
be visible from the public highway.

Reason
6.20 Inappropriately designed extensions can adversely affect residential amenity, privacy and outlook.
Detailed guidance for extensions are set out in Advice Note 2.

Telecommunications Development
D11 Planning permission will normally be granted for telecommunications development provided
that:
i. consideration has been given to locating a site which causes minimal visual impact subject
to operational needs;
ii. any proposal is sited, designed, coloured and landscaped so as to minimise visual impact on
its setting and local environment;
iii. the special character and appearance of the Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site, listed
buildings, conservation areas and historic landscapes are preserved or enhanced;
iv. the possibility of sharing facilities, such as site, masts, and erecting antennae on existing
buildings or other structures has been fully explored and demonstrated;
v. technologies to camouflage telecommunications apparatus have been fully explored; and
vi. any proposal meets International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
(ICNIRP) guidelines for public exposure.

114 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Reason
6.21 Modern telecommunications are an essential and beneficial element in the life of Greenwich’s
residents and workforce. Telecommunications have the potential to contribute to sustainable
development by enabling more people to work and carry out other functions from home, thus
reducing the need to travel, traffic levels and pollution. However, the Council, and the Government,
are concerned about the impact of telecommunications on the environment and the Council will
seek to ensure that the townscape will not suffer an unnecessary proliferation of
telecommunications structures and the lowering of environmental quality.
6.22 Much minor telecommunications development is covered by permitted development rights and
therefore does not require planning permission, although is subject to prior notification procedures.
Such procedures allow the local planning authority to consider, within 56 days, the siting and
appearance of the proposed development.
6.23 The Council realises that there are concerns about the health risks telecommunications masts may
pose. The Stewart Report (2000), considered concerns about the health effects from the use of
mobile phones, base stations and transmitters. It concluded that “the balance of evidence does not
suggest that mobile phone technologies put the health of the general population at risk.” However,
while finding that the balance of evidence suggested no health risk, the group did recommend
tightening planning control over mast erection. The report also states that the possibility of harm
cannot be ruled out with confidence and that the gaps in knowledge are sufficient to justify a
precautionary approach to mobile phone technologies. It recommended compliance with
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) guidelines for public
exposure. PPG8: Telecommunications (2001) confirms that emissions from mobile phone base
stations should meet ICNIRP guidelines for public exposure. Proposals for telecommunications
masts will be required to demonstrate compliance with these guidelines. However, as a result of the
Stewart Report and PPG8, there are no grounds for additional planning controls on
telecommunications masts on health grounds.
6.24 PPG8 encourages planning authorities to include policies on telecommunications development in
their development plans.The benefits that these developments bring are recognised and the policy
seeks to allow such developments subject to criteria which aim to minimise their visual and
environmental impact and to encourage the shared use of facilities. Detailed guidance regarding the
siting and appearance of mast and ancillary apparatus is given in PPG8.

Satellite Antennae
D12 Satellite antennae must be sensitively positioned on buildings in order to minimise their impact
on the environment.They are not considered acceptable on Listed Buildings where the character
of the building is adversely affected. In Conservation Areas satellite antennae are not normally
acceptable when located on front or side walls or on chimneys, to buildings where they will be
open to public view. New development should examine methods of reducing the need for
satellite antennae by introducing centralised facilities.

Reason
6.25 The installation of satellite antennae can have an adverse visual impact on the facades of individual
buildings and the overall townscape, particularly in residential areas, Conservation Areas, and on
blocks of flats, where the cumulative effect can be particularly severe.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 115

 Shopfronts and Signs
D13 The Council will require applications for planning permission for shopfronts and express consent
for signs to take into account the following criteria:
i. New shopfronts including fascias and signs should be designed to respect established
proportions in the immediate area.
ii. New shopfronts should not adversely affect highway and pedestrian safety.
iii. The proposed replacement of traditional shopfronts should respect the features and
proportions of the original shopfront, using traditional materials as far as possible. Modern
materials may be acceptable where the appearance of a traditional shopfront can be created.
iv. Illuminated fascias and external lighting will not be permitted where they affect the
character of the building or the amenities of the adjacent area.
v. All new shopfronts must be accessible to people with disabilities. Where the proposed
replacement of traditional shopfronts is concerned this objective will be pursued where it
is practicable.
vi. Where proposed, security grilles should be of the open mesh variety.
vii. Externally located grilles or security shutters will not normally be acceptable on traditional
and historic shopfronts, or in Conservation Areas.

Reason
6.26 Well designed shopfronts and signs can contribute towards the overall environmental enhancement
of an area. Where traditional shopfronts contribute to the character or appearance of an area,
especially a conservation area, their retention and repair will be encouraged. Solid metal grilles over
shopfronts are particularly inappropriate as they are perceived to make a street appear more
dangerous, creating problems and fears about personal safety.The Council has produced an Advice
Note “Design Guidance for Shopfronts”, which provides additional guidance for shopfronts within
the borough. For shopfronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced
two design guidelines, “Design Guidance for Shopfronts in Greenwich Town centre” and “Design
Guidance for Shop Signs, Advertisements and Illumination in Greenwich Town Centre”.

Street Furniture
D14 The Council will encourage street furniture to be of a good quality, consistent and attractive in
design that is sensitive to the local character of the area. Street furniture should be purposeful;
sited to minimise visual clutter and obstruction, particularly for those with mobility restrictions.

Reason
6.27 Street furniture plays an important role in our built and natural environment, however it is important
that it is designed and sited to be both functional and visually attractive. Particular areas within the
Borough may also advocate a style of street furniture relating to their historic connection or tourism
function. Where design guidelines have been prepared for such areas, i.e. Greenwich Town Centre
Streetscape Manual, these should be given due regard. The Council will also seek to influence the
design and siting of street furniture provided by other authorities i.e. telephone boxes, public utility
boxes, through normal consultation procedures.

116 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Advertisements
D15 The Council will normally give express consent for large poster or other advertisement displays
provided they:
i. Do not adversely affect the amenity of residential areas, open spaces, Conservation Areas
or Areas of Special Character and are not in a position where they would have an adverse
effect on the setting of a Listed Building.
ii. Harmonise with the scale and character of the surrounding area and are not fixed to flank
walls where they would be unduly dominant.
iii. Do not adversely affect public safety including pedestrians and drivers.

Reason
6.28 Advertisement displays can often be unsightly, detract from the character of an environment and
have an adverse effect on the amenity of the area, particularly the sensitive locations identified in
the policy. Their size can often look out of place with their surroundings and they are sometimes
located where they are likely to create a road safety hazard. PPG19: Outdoor Advertisement
Control (1992) emphasises outdoor advertising is essential to commercial activity but can be
prominent and unsuitable in some locations. TfL will be consulted where they are the designated
Highway Authority.

Conservation Areas
D16 Planning permission will only be granted for proposals which preserve or enhance the character
or appearance of Conservation Areas, taking into account local scale, the established pattern of
development and landscape, building form and materials.Where the character or appearance of
a Conservation Area is threatened by inappropriate development the Council will seek to
control these through the use of Article 4 Directions. Development on sites in the vicinity of a
Conservation Area and which would have a visual effect on its character or appearance, should
respect the setting of that area.

Reason
6.29 National policy on Conservation Areas and Listed Buildings is found in PPG15: ‘Planning and the
Historic Environment’’. Circular 14/97 also places a requirement on Local Planning Authorities to
pay special attention to preserving or enhancing the historic environment. PPG15 and the Circular
direct the designation of Conservation Areas in recognition of the area’s “special architectural or
historic interest, the character or appearance of which it is desirable to preserve or enhance”.
6.30 The Borough’s Conservation Areas have special qualities and character which could be adversely
affected by inappropriate development (see Map 8 and Proposals Map). Applications for the
erection of buildings within Conservation Areas should in most cases be submitted in full. Where
outline applications are appropriate they will normally be required to provide details of siting, design
and the means of access. In any instance where it is decided that an application ought not to be
considered separately from all or any of the reserved matters, the procedure specified by Article
3(2) of the General Development Procedure Order (1995) will be invoked.
6.31 Article 4 Directions will be used to control changes to the appearance of buildings and their settings
that would otherwise not require planning permission, and which might cumulatively harm the
character or appearance of the area e.g., window replacement.Article 4 Directions have been issued
for West Greenwich (Randall Place & Churchfields), Progress Estate, Ashburnham Triangle,
Shrewsbury Park Estate, East Greenwich, Rectory Field, Trenchard Street and Greenwich Town

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 117

 Centre.The Council will also promote the enhancement of conservation areas by the preparation
of character appraisals and statements.

D17 Demolition of buildings and structures that positively contribute to the character or appearance
of a conservation area will be resisted. Conservation Area consent for the demolition of buildings
will normally be given only when planning permission has been granted for redevelopment which
complies with the requirements of Policy D16. When demolition is permitted it will be subject
to the building remaining until a contract for redevelopment is let.

Reason
6.32 Conservation Areas will contain a number of buildings which are not listed but do contribute to the
character and appearance of the area and are worthy of retention. The policy also enables the
Council to assess the comparative quality of existing and proposed development and ensure that
new development will enhance the character and appearance of the Conservation Area.

Listed Buildings
D18 There will be a presumption in favour of the preservation of Listed Buildings. Listed Building
Consent will only be granted for demolition or partial demolition in exceptional circumstances,
and will be assessed against the following criteria:
i. The condition of the building and the cost of repairs relative to its importance.
ii. The adequacy of efforts made to return the building in use.
iii. The merits of alternative proposals for the site.

Reason
6.33 Listed Buildings make an important contribution to the townscape of the Borough and the Council
attaches great importance to their protection and preservation. Any application for substantial
demolition will be required to produce convincing evidence to demonstrate that every effort has
been made to sustain existing uses or find new ones. In line with the guidance in PPG15 (paras 3.16-
3.19) applicants for listed building consent must be able to fully justify their proposals and will need
to demonstrate why works which affect the character of an existing building are desirable or
necessary.

D19 Proposals for external or internal alterations or additions to Listed Buildings should respect the
integrity of the buildings, and harmonise with their special architectural or historic character.
Where consent is required for internal alterations, features of interest should be respected and
left in-situ wherever possible.

Reason
6.34 Repairs and alterations, even on a small scale, can jeopardise the architectural integrity of the
building. The Council will need to be satisfied that any such works will not lead to this result.
Applications for Listed Building consent should be accompanied by plans to scale, indicating all the
proposals in detail, including elevational drawings where appropriate, to clearly show the
development in the context of the street scene.

D20 The Council will resist proposals for development which would detract from the setting and
proportions of a Listed Building or group.

118 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Map 8: Conservation Areas

13

17

11
10 20 14
7
16
4
12 8
1 2 15

18

3 5

9
19

6
© Crown copyright

1 West Greenwich 6 Eltham Palace 11 Plumstead Common 16 Rectory Field

2 Blackheath 7 Charlton Village 12 Ashburnham Triangle 17 East Greenwich

3 Blackheath Park 8 Woolwich Common 13 Royal Arsenal, Woolwich 18 Sun in Sands

4 Greenwich Park 9 Eltham Green 14 Goldie Leigh Hospital 19 Well Hall Pleasaunce

5 Progress Estate 10 Deptford High Street 15 Shrewsbury Park Estate 20 Westcombe Park

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 119

 Reason
6.35 The setting of a Listed Building can be fundamental to its character and appearance and often forms
part of its original design and layout.

D21 Proposals for changes of use of Listed Buildings will only be granted planning permission if it is
no longer in its original or other established historic use and the new use is beneficial to the
building and is compatible with its character and features of historic interest. Such a change of
use should not conflict with other policies in the Plan.

Reason
6.36 The use for which some Listed Buildings were originally designed is sometimes no longer tenable. If
buildings in this situation are left empty there is a danger they will fall into disrepair. In order to secure
their continued beneficial use other plan policies may be applied more flexibly should the individual
circumstances dictate.

D22 The Council will assist English Heritage to maintain and revise regularly, a Register of Listed
Buildings at risk from neglect and decay. The Council will promote action, including the use of
building repair notices and urgent works notices, where appropriate, to bring about the reuse
and repair of buildings on the register.

Reason
6.37 English Heritage in London, in conjunction with the Boroughs maintains a Register of Listed Buildings
at risk from neglect and decay.The Council will assist English Heritage in revising the Register and in
promoting appropriate action to bring about their repair and reuse. Grants from English Heritage
may be available for this purpose.

D23 In considering proposals affecting buildings on the Local List of Buildings of Architectural or
Historic Interest, substantial weight will be given to protecting and conserving the particular
characteristics that account for their designation. Consequently, proposals for the demolition or
unsympathetic alteration of Locally Listed Buildings will be discouraged.

Reason
6.38 Whilst not benefiting from the same degree of protection afforded to statutory listed buildings,
locally listed buildings are an important part of the Borough’s built heritage and consequently every
effort will be made to ensure their long term retention, maintenance and use.Where these buildings
are located within a Conservation Area, Policies D16 and D17 apply.The Local List will be updated
on a regular basis.

World Heritage Site

6.39 The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997. It was the 16th such site in the
UK.The policy for the Site is included in the Greenwich section of the town centre chapter. (Policy
TC7).

Historic Landscapes
D24 Proposals which would adversely affect the character or appearance of historic landscapes will
not be permitted.

120 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Reason
6.40 Historic landscapes, which include parks, gardens and their settings, are an essential part of the
Borough’s heritage too. Their unique character should be protected from the adverse effects of
development. English Heritage has prepared a register of parks and gardens of special historic
interest.The three sites in Greenwich, which are listed on the register, are Greenwich Park,Well Hall
Pleasaunce and Eltham Palace.

Strategic Views
D25 Strategic views of St. Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point shown on the
Proposal Map will be protected from the intrusion of new developments:
i. By limiting all proposed developments within the viewing corridor from Greenwich Park to
a height of 30 metres A.O.D. (Above Ordnance Datum).
ii. By the careful consideration of proposals which could infringe on the development plane
from Blackheath Point.

Reason
6.41 Government directions require the Council to protect the designated strategic views and wider
setting of St. Paul’s Cathedral seen from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point. In order to preserve
the integrity of existing views but allow sufficient scope for redevelopment it will be necessary to
control the height of new buildings or structures within reasonable parameters. In the London Plan
it is proposed to replace these views with a London Protection Framework which will include the
strategic views as ‘London Panoramas’ and also include ‘River Prospects’ and ‘Townscape and Linear
Views’.The Framework is to be published as Supplementary Planning Guidance to the London Plan
incorporating Management Plans for each of the views.

D26 The setting of St. Paul’s Cathedral in relation to both the skyline and the foreground of views
from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point will be protected and enhanced. In the case of the
Greenwich Park view a height threshold of 30 metres (A.O.D.) will be applied, whilst the
development plane from Blackheath Point will be applicable in considering the impact of the
proposal on these areas. Development within the wider setting consultation area, which would
exceed the height thresholds and which would seriously detract from the views of St. Paul’s
Cathedral, will not normally be permitted.

Reason
6.42 The foreground of the view(s) is important to the setting of the Cathedral, and development that
would adversely affect this, even if not directly obstructing the views will be resisted.The foreground
of views from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point consist of the historic areas of Greenwich Town
Centre and Deptford, including Deptford Creek. It is characterised by the sharp change in levels
from the Blackheath plateau down to the low-lying riverside areas.
6.43 The setting of the Cathedral in the skyline will be maintained by ensuring that the height, location
and materials of proposed buildings within the defined wider setting and backdrop consultation
areas do not adversely affect its prominence. Careful consideration of building materials and tone
can make a proposal more sympathetic in long distance views.
6.44 The Council will consult other local authorities when a planning application is submitted for a
development that exceeds the 30 metres (A.O.D.) threshold from the Greenwich Park view, and
the development plane in the case of the Blackheath Point view, in the protected areas.
6.45 The strategic views of St. Paul’s Cathedral from Greenwich Park and Blackheath Point cross the West
Greenwich conservation area. From there they traverse the Boroughs of Lewisham, Southwark,

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 121

 Map 9: Local Views

k
g
h

i b

a
d
c

j
© Crown copyright

a Shooters Hill to Central London f Winns Common to the lower Thames

b Shrewsbury Park to the lower Thames
Local View Zone c Castlewood towards SE London
d Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards
Bexley and the lower Thames
e Eltham Park North to Central London
g Thames-side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space
h St. Marys Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond
i Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument
j Eltham Palace to Central London
k Millennium Dome from Central Park (from Pilot P.H. forecourt)

122 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 Camden,Tower Hamlets and the City of Westminster and the Corporation of London. Consultation
between these authorities and the Mayor of London is essential to secure the objectives of this
policy.

Local Views
D27 Planning permission will be given for development which would not have a seriously adverse
effect on the overall perspective and essential quality of the Local Views as listed below and as
identified on Map 9:
a. Shooter’s Hill to Central London;
b. Shrewsbury Park towards the lower Thames;
c. Castlewood towards S.E. London;
d. Eaglesfield Recreation Ground towards Bexley and the Lower Thames;
e. Eltham Park (North) to Central London;
f. Winns Common to the lower Thames;
g. Thames side panorama from the Thames Barrier open space;
h. St. Mary’s Churchyard towards Mast Pond Wharf and beyond;
i. Docklands panorama from the Wolfe Monument;
j. Eltham Palace to Central London;
k. Millennium Dome from Central Park.

Reason
6.46 These views are an important element in the character of the Borough, particularly where these
provide views of the River Thames and its banks (see also Thames Policy Area W2). All these views
are from publicly accessible spaces and offer panoramas, vistas and other views of landmarks and
water-space recognised for their contribution to the local built and natural environment.
Inappropriately designed or sited buildings or structures within the views can have an adverse
impact on the quality of the view.The London Plan encourages Boroughs to designate and manage
local views.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 123

 High Buildings
D28 Planning permission for high buildings will be granted within Woolwich Town Centre,
Thamesmead Town Centre and at key locations in the Waterfront area. Planning applications for
high buildings will be assessed using the following criteria:
i. Proposals should be of outstanding architectural and urban design quality and act as a
landmark.
ii. Proposals should secure a complete and well-designed setting, including hard and soft
landscaping, to facilitate interaction at street level.
iii. Proposals should be set in a Borough (or wider) urban design analysis.
iv. Proposals should take account of proximity to public transport facilities/interchanges.
v. Proposals should take account of visual impact on:
a. conservation areas;
b. metropolitan open land and other open spaces, their settings and views from them;
c. listed buildings and their settings;
d. strategic views;
e. local views;
f. historic parks and gardens; and
g. the world heritage site.
h. the River Thames and other waterways
vi. Proposals should emphasise or contribute to a point of civic or visual significance or a
centre of urban activity or regeneration, both locally and in relation to the local and wider
area from which it will be visible.
vii. Proposals should relate positively to topographical features and other high buildings and
contribute positively to the image and built environment of London.
viii. Proposals should enhance the skyline by ensuring that the roof top design is of high quality.

Reason
6.47 High buildings and structures are inappropriate in most areas of the Borough due to being out of
scale and character with their surroundings. The Borough’s character comprises extensive areas of
low-rise townscape including suburban residential areas and large areas of green open land. Other
areas also particularly sensitive to the presence of high structures and buildings are set out below.
However, in certain locations high buildings may be considered appropriate, assessed in particular
on their standard of urban design, architecture and the need to meet functional considerations and
can make a positive contribution to the environment. Guidance on tall buildings (2001) published
by English Heritage and CABE gives further advice. Areas considered to be particularly
inappropriate for high buildings are:
i. Areas with a visual relationship to important and famous buildings (e.g. Old Royal Naval College/
National Maritime Museum, Charlton House, Royal Artillery Barracks).
ii. Areas within or with a visual relationship to areas of special character (e.g. World Heritage Site
and buffer zone and Conservation Areas), high environmental quality, or major open landscape
(e.g. Blackheath, Greenwich Park, the Green Chain)

124 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 iii. Areas where high buildings would spoil traditional, famous or locally important views (see
Policies D25, D26 & D27)
iv. Major high points, tree slopes and ridges, including developed sites where protection of the
skyline is paramount (e.g. Shooter’s Hill, Bostall Ridge, Eltham Ridge).

Areas of Special Character

D29 Within Areas of Special Character defined on the Proposals Map, special consideration will be
given to the safeguarding, restoration and enhancement of character, scale and quality of open
spaces and associated buildings. Skylines and distant views both to and from the Areas of Special
Character will be protected.

Reason
6.48 Areas of special character are areas that form a key part of the landscape character of the Borough.
They are defined on the Proposals Map and the policy seeks to ensure development proposals do
not adversely affect their character. In Greenwich these include the Blackheath/Greenwich Park
open spaces, Shooters Hill, Abbey Ridge and Bostall Woods areas (Bostall Woods, Castle Wood,
Eltham Common, Oxleas Wood, Shooters Hill Golf Course, Eltham Park,Woolwich Common,Avery
Hill and sports-ground). The Countryside Commission in its document “Strategic Guidance for
Heritage Land in London” has identified the Shooters Hill Ridge area as Heritage Land due to its
high landscape value, historic parks, ancient countryside, and nature conservation value. A landscape
strategy for the improvement of the Blackheath open space has been prepared (2004).
6.49 The Thameside area is covered by the Thames Policy Area designation (See Policy W2)

Archaeology
D30 The Council will expect applicants to properly assess and plan for the impact of proposed
developments on archaeological remains where they fall within ‘Areas of Archaeological Potential’
as defined on the constraints Map 10. In certain instances preliminary archaeological site
investigations may be required before proposals are considered.The Council will seek to secure
the co operation of developers in the excavation, recording and publication of archaeological
finds before development takes place by use of planning conditions/legal agreements as
appropriate.

D31 At identified sites of known archaeological remains of national importance, including scheduled
monuments, there will be a presumption in favour of the physical preservation of the remains in
situ and to allow for public access and display and to preserve their settings. For sites of lesser
importance the Council will seek to preserve the remains in situ, but where this is not feasible
the remains should either be investigated, excavated and removed from the site, or investigated,
excavated and recorded before destruction. Appropriate conditions/legal agreements may be
used to ensure this is satisfied.

Reason
6.50 Archaeological remains are a finite and fragile resource vulnerable to modern developments. PPG16
gives guidance on how archaeological remains should be preserved or recorded. It recommends
that UDPs should include policies for the protection, enhancement and preservation of sites of
archaeological interest and of their settings, as well as a map defining where these policies apply.The
Borough’s archaeological heritage represents a local community asset that is desirable to preserve
and utilise both as an educational and recreational resource.The objectives of new development can
often conflict with the need to preserve, or to remove and record such remains. Potential

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 125

 Map 10: Areas of Archeological Potential
© Crown copyright

Areas of High Potential

NB Thames riverfront Area of High Potential has

been extended to the low water mark

126 DESIGN & CONSERVATION

 developers should be alerted early on in the planning process of likely remains so as to secure their
preservation. Early discussion with the Council and English Heritage is encouraged.The support of
local archaeological groups is essential to this process. The potential for discovery of significant
remains in large areas of the Borough is high, whilst the opportunity to record and preserve such
finite resources is usually restricted to one occasion.The Greenwich Heritage Centre is a potential
location for the retention of remains.
6.51 The Council will also:
i. Pursue land use policies which are sensitive to the potential threat development can pose to
archaeological remains and adopt a flexible approach to the design of new development in areas
where the preservation of archaeological remains is paramount.
ii. Encourage co-operation amongst landowners, developers and archaeological groups by
promoting the principles laid down in the British Archaeologists and Developers Liaison Group
Code of Practice.
iii. Encourage developers to allow an appropriate level of archaeological investigation where
significant remains are unexpectedly discovered during construction, and if applicable make
provision for the preservation or recording of such finds by a recognised archaeological
organisation.

Environmental Improvements
D32 Subject to the availability of resources the Council will initiate environmental improvements, and
will work with voluntary groups and other agencies to encourage environmental improvements
in areas of poor environment, particularly in the Waterfront, areas of deprivation, and industrial
and commercial areas, and assist in nature conservation schemes.

Reason
6.52 The Council recognises the importance of such improvements as contributing towards overall
environmental enhancement of areas and improving the quality of people’s lives.

D33 The Council will encourage the temporary use of vacant land awaiting development, particularly
by local groups, for appropriate uses, e.g. nature conservation purposes.

Reason
6.53 To overcome problems of unsightliness and blight. However the temporary use is not intended to
prevent the long-term use and/or development of the site.

DESIGN & CONSERVATION 127

128 DESIGN & CONSERVATION
 7. MOVEMENT
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
7.1 The overall aim for transport is to achieve a more sustainable relationship between land uses,
people’s activities and the transport network that serves them in order to reduce the need to travel.
The main emphasis of policy is to achieve a sustainable transport system and not necessarily to
secure greater mobility, which is often not a desirable achievement in a world of finite resources and
environmental concern.The emphasis is therefore on the importance of reducing the need to travel
and carefully locating new development, particularly major generators of travel demand, where it
can be served by public transport. Policy emphasises better provision for walking and cycling,
encouraging other environmentally friendly transport and appropriate traffic management and
calming measures.The general movement policies are:

SM1 To effectively link major transport generators and attractors to the current and foreseeable
transport network, at no or minimal cost to the environment.

SM2 To seek equitable levels of mobility and accessibility for all groups of people, particularly for those
presently disadvantaged in mobility terms. Generally, the following priorities should be
considered in preparing development proposals and transport policies and projects:
i. pedestrians, people with disabilities, cyclists and public transport users first; then
ii. users of cars and powered two wheeled vehicles.

SM3 To encourage the use of sustainable forms of transport, such as walking, cycling and public
transport, by restraining road traffic, meeting the requirements of the Road Traffic Reduction Act
and Local Air Quality Management Plans, and safeguarding the environment through mechanisms
such as traffic management, parking control and development control, particularly in respect of
sensitive local areas.

SM4 To promote safe transport in general, and particularly safe and convenient movement for
pedestrians and cyclists, particularly in respect of safer journeys to school.

SM5 To promote a fully integrated public transport system that is extensive in coverage and meets
the needs of residents, businesses, workers and visitors in the Borough. This would include
necessary new infrastructure and services; a high frequency Metro style rail network of turn up
and go services; improved interchanges; and common high standards.

SM6 To safeguard the Crossrail route, changes to the strategic public transport and road networks in
respect of Deptford Church Street junction realignment, Thames Gateway Bridge and to have
regard to notification requirements in respect of a third Blackwall crossing (to Silvertown Way
in L.B. Newham) Woolwich Rail Crossing and DLR (Woolwich) Extension. Greenwich Waterfront
Transit is another strategic scheme the Council supports, and will be safeguarded as and when
appropriate.

SM7 To assist the local and London economy commensurate with safeguarding the environment, the
Council will promote the movement of freight by more sustainable modes such as water and rail.

MOVEMENT 129
 Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies
7.2 The 2001 Census indicated that 41% of households do not have access to a car or van. But this
disguises significant differences between areas with wards in the north of the Borough having very
high rates of car and van non availability e.g. 55% in Woolwich Riverside and 51% in Woolwich
Common, in contrast to 27% in Coldharbour and New Eltham. Public transport is therefore an
essential form of movement for travel to work and services for a large proportion of the population.
Walking also makes up an important element of all journeys for which provision needs to be made.
7.3 The main areas of public transport deficiency are the limited cross-river service, links between
North and South in the Borough and Thamesmead.The only cross-river facilities for non-car owners
are the foot tunnels, the Woolwich Ferry and the bus service through the Blackwall Tunnel. These
cross-river facilities have been improved by the completion of the Jubilee Line Extension to
Greenwich Peninsula and the Docklands Light Rail Extension from the Isle of Dogs southwards to
Greenwich and Lewisham. There is an existing capacity problem on rail routes, especially on the
North Kent Line, which prevents an increase in services. The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001)
includes various proposals for improving rail services in London including a new rail crossing of the
Thames at Woolwich (DLR), and a London Metro, turn up and go, service. Proposals are already
under consideration for a South London Metro which would include the rail services in the Borough
provided by South East Trains – the North Kent Line is a pilot scheme for South London Metro.
Construction has started on the DLR extension to Woolwich; this is scheduled to open in early
2009.
7.4 Transport for London are responsible for procuring and subsidising bus services provided under
tender by private bus operators. Most services in the Borough are provided by London Central and
Stagecoach Selkent.A major problem facing the travelling public in the Borough can be deterioration
in service provision as bus routes are re-organised, reduced or simply scrapped.This has the effect
of forcing more people into private cars, further reducing the revenue collected and increasing
congestion on the roads. Bus links to the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station from the South of
the Borough need to be improved; as do links to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital. Express and orbital
routes also need to be developed. Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich) extension also
need comprehensive public transport (server) strategies as part of the scheme.
7.5 Road transport is seriously affected by the amount of traffic commuting through the Borough. For
example 76% of traffic travelling North through the Blackwall Tunnel in the morning peak hour
originates outside the Borough.This traffic puts increased pressure on local, environmentally sensitive
roads, adds to problems with local air quality, creates more hazards for both cyclists and pedestrians,
causes traffic accidents and injury and reduces the efficiency of bus services.The Council would like
to see better enforcement of traffic restrictions. Many areas of the Borough are also in need of
comprehensive traffic calming and problems associated with parking around stations and in town
centres needs to be addressed. It is primarily road traffic which has caused the whole of the Borough
to be declared an Air Quality Management Area.
7.6 The objectives of Government guidance in PPG13 - Transport are to integrate planning and
transport at the national, regional, strategic and local level to:
i) promote more sustainable transport choices;
ii) promote accessibility to jobs, shopping, leisure facilities and services by public transport, walking
and cycling; and
iii) reduce the need to travel especially by car.
This planning guidance, the Mayor’s London Plan and Transport Strategy, and providing for Borough
needs are reflected in the range of Movement policies in the Plan. For example road improvement
benefits the motorist. However, the claims of the car are restrained in order to safeguard the

130 MOVEMENT
 environment and the legitimate demands of those without access to a car.The emphasis in the Plan
towards sustainable forms of transport such as public transport, walking and cycling is also to ensure
that the mobility needs of women, younger and older people, minority ethnic groups, people with
disabilities and non-car owners are catered for.
7.7 The Council’s transport policy of prioritising reduction in the use of private cars and increasing the
use of public transport and walking or cycling, can make a substantial contribution to achieving
improvements in outdoor air quality. In addition the policy will have additional benefits for health,
including meeting Health of the Nation targets for coronary heart disease, stroke and obesity, as well
as reducing the number of road traffic accidents. The policies may also help improve the
environment by reducing traffic jams, reducing the divisions between communities made by major
urban routes, and increasing the number of ‘safe’ places for children to play. Reliance on motorised
transport is not simply a cause of air pollution and traffic congestion, it has also resulted in a
significant decline in “physical activity”. The best method to increase physical activity is to try to
incorporate it into the normal daily routine by promoting walking or cycling to the shops or to work
and by promoting accessible public transport. Increased provision of ‘safe’, well-lit walking areas and
cycle lanes may be necessary prerequisites for persuading people to make more journeys by these
means.
7.8 Transport policies and provision also play a key role in serving the main Council objectives of
regeneration, anti poverty and equal opportunities. The needs of the Dome and Waterfront pose
particular opportunities and challenges in respect of transport.

Policies
Development and Transport - General Principles
M1 When planning transport provision for single large developments and extensive sites where
comprehensive development can take place, developers should pay regard to:
i. designing for the needs of pedestrians, people with disabilities, cyclists and public transport
users first;
ii. arranging highways networks after these priorities;
iii. building into highways networks traffic calming and design criteria for speeds no greater
than 20 mph and the creation of home zones;
iv. locating major activities such as schools and shops at public transport, cycling and pedestrian
nodes;
v. as relevant, building into development costings provision for segregated roadways for
Waterfront Transit (see Policy M10) as well as more conventional highways, cycle networks
and pedestrian networks.
vi. Existing and proposed utilisation of public transport and impact upon capacity of networks.
Close liaison with Transport for London (TfL) and the relevant railway undertakers will be
necessary.

M2 The Council will normally require a Transport Assessment of developments that employ a large
workforce and/or attract significant numbers of trips.The scope of the assessment will reflect the
scale of the development and the extent of the transport implications.

MOVEMENT 131
 Reasons
7.9 In order to provide development and its consequent transport requirements in a sustainable way
this policy is geared towards securing sustainable development compatible with the wider objectives
of the UDP.The Council will use its powers through conditions on planning permissions and S106
agreements to secure the outcomes described in this policy in line with Policy SC2.There will be an
onus placed on developers that they demonstrate the compatibility of their plans to this policy when
submitting a development proposal. In the early stages of any major development proposal, the
developer will be expected to liaise with the Council to determine an appropriate transport
strategy for the scheme. Single large developments and extensive sites are defined as being of more
than 25 dwelling units or more than 500m2.

Travel Plans
M3 Development proposals that will have a significant transport implication will be required to be
accompanied by a Travel Plan before any granting of planning permission.The implementation of
Travel Plans will be secured through a condition or planning obligation on the planning
permission in line with Policy SC2.

Reason
7.10 Travel Plans (TPs) are useful tools to ensure that a development minimises the adverse
environmental consequences of the travel demand that it generates. As such they contribute to
meeting sustainability, reduced parking and traffic reduction targets in this UDP. PPG13 promotes the
widespread use of travel plans amongst businesses, schools, hospitals and other organisations. It goes
on to state that “the Government considers that travel plans should be submitted alongside planning
applications which are likely to have significant transport implications”. TPs are appropriate for a
range of development types which generate a significant level of travel demand, including
employment, retail, leisure, education and health uses.A TP should aim to minimise the need to travel
to and from the site, minimise the need for car-based trips (especially single-occupant trips) and,
where travel is necessary, maximise the use of sustainable forms of transport, including walking,
cycling, use of public transport and car sharing. Co-ordination of TP’s between different sites can
bring benefits, especially through economies of scale.Travel Plans are secured and agreed as part of
the planning process; they are individually tailored to the development and achievable targets, in line
with those of the Mayor’s Transport Strategy, are sought. Annual monitoring (for a 5 year period)
allows mechanisms to be put in place to check and improve rates of reduction if necessary.

Public Transport
Extension of the Public Transport Network
M4 The Council will advocate and work in partnership with relevant agencies to extend public
transport into the following under-served parts of the Borough. Planning agreements and
conditions on planning permissions in line with Policy SC2 may be used in pursuit of this policy;
i. Thamesmead;
ii. between residential areas in the South of the Borough and employment areas in the North,
including the Jubilee Line North Greenwich Station;
iii. to poorly served areas of deprivation to ensure these are not isolated by the absence of
affordable and reliable services, thus re-enforcing the poverty trap; and

132 MOVEMENT
 iv. to the Queen Elizabeth Hospital
v. generally, improvements to and expansion of bus and rail services will also be sought,
especially to provide improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups. Capacity
and frequency improvements to public transport networks will also be sought.

M5 Such major new transport developments as the Thames Gateway Bridge and DLR (Woolwich)
extension should be accompanied by comprehensive public transport server network strategies.
Good server networks to existing transport hubs will be promoted.

Reason
7.11 These areas are poorly served by public transport.This causes problems for existing population and
industry, hinders further development and regeneration and it can exacerbate poverty and social
exclusion. Public transport generally is sustainable and more available to all and it should be
promoted as such. In particular improved access to public transport for disadvantaged groups is
sought, especially to provide access to health and other services.
7.12 New transport schemes should also be accompanied by comprehensive public transport proposals
in order to maximise their catchment potential.

Accessible Public Transport

M6 When considering developments that generate and/or attract significant amounts of public
transport need/demand the Council will take into account accessibility to and from and of public
transport. For relevant developments the Council will also examine the scope for planning
obligations for public transport infrastructure in line with Policy SC2. As a guide to developers
and public transport operators, a 400 metre maximum walking distance from a bus stop and an
800 metre standard from a railway station, will be sought for housing developments. Public
transport operators will also be urged to improve the accessibility of their vehicles and rolling
stock for the use of people with disabilities and to provide new or improved services.

Reason
7.13 Land uses and transport facilities must be integrated.The existing network of public transport should
be fully exploited in the interests of efficiency and maximising accessibility. It is appropriate that
where developments will make significant demands on public transport their scope for contributing
to public transport provision should be assessed. (See Policy SC2).
7.14 Approximately 7% of the population have difficulties using public transport, according to a survey
by the Greater London Association for Disabled People. Of these 53% never went out of their
homes in a given week.The transport needs of people with disabilities should be integrated into the
forward planning and development of the public transport system. At present many people with
disabilities experience specific barriers which either stop or restrict their use of conventional public
transport.The Disability Discrimination Act requires all buses to be accessible by 2017 and Transport
for London intend to achieve this objective sooner.

Use of the River

M7 The Council will safeguard land and otherwise support the introduction of public transport
services on the river, particularly between Central London, Greenwich, the Waterfront,
Woolwich and Thamesmead.

MOVEMENT 133
 Reason
7.15 At present the river is under-used for transport. Public transport provision, including riverbus
services, can give links across the River as well as along it to Central London and will give expanded
opportunities for work, leisure, tourism etc. Development of the Waterfront areas must allow for
the introduction of a service (see Movement Schedules). The Woolwich Ferry is an important
existing cross-river link. New piers have been provided at the Royal Arsenal in Woolwich and on
the Greenwich Peninsula. Policy M37 considers the use of the river for freight.

Safeguarded and other Rail Schemes

M8 The Council supports the following rail schemes which it will pursue with the relevant agencies:
i. DLR Extension to Woolwich (see proposals map/site schedule m4)
ii. Crossrail Project
iii. Orbital Rail Services between Abbey Wood and Victoria Station; and
iv. Capacity improvements for passengers on rail lines through and at interchanges in the
Borough.

Reason
7.16 All schemes will be developed with due regard to safeguarding amenity and the environment.The
DLR (Woolwich) extension will overcome the barrier effect of the River Thames, promote a modal
shift from the car and help the area’s regeneration. It is due to open in 2009. The capacity of the
DLR between Bank and Lewisham will be improved by increasing the length of trains from 2 to 3
cars. (The Docklands Light Railway (Capacity Enhancement) Order 2005). Crossrail is a Hybrid Bill
proposal for national rail links from Maidenhead and Heathrow in the west to Shenfield and Abbey
Wood in the east, with connections to existing lines in the Thames Gateway at Abbey Wood. It has
the potential to reduce overcrowding on rail services in the Borough and open up new routes
across London. Crossrail Safeguarding Directions were issued by the Secretary of State for Transport
on 22 February 2005.
7.17 An orbital rail service is needed to overcome the problems associated with a predominantly radial
system, to link centres and cater for unmet demand in South London. A route from Abbey Wood
to Victoria via Woolwich, Lewisham and Peckham should be considered. Capacity limitations on
existing networks need to be resolved to ease overcrowding and promote greater use of the
system. Because of the long development times involved in rail schemes, bus services have great
potential to make good rail network deficiencies. There is need for better bus linkages along the
South Circular Road and these and other opportunities for improved east/west public transport will
be examined with Transport for London. All new infrastructure should be accessible for people with
disabilities.
7.18 Safeguarded rail routes are shown on the Proposals Map. Planning applications affecting safeguarded
land will be notified to the appropriate promoting bodies.

134 MOVEMENT
 Bus Priority
M9 The Council will:
i. Implement the London Bus Priority Network and London Bus Initiative in its area and
otherwise encourage the introduction of suitable bus priority measures in order to improve
the reliability and efficiency of bus services. Measures assisting buses in making the most
effective use of road space could include bus lanes, exemption from banned turns, bus
termini and turning points and bus priority at signals.
ii. Support other measures that assist passengers in using buses. Developments may give
opportunities in this respect.

Reason
7.19 Priority for buses, which carry large numbers of people, increases the efficient use of road space.
Where possible the Council will press for physical segregation to enforce priority. Bus lanes also
benefit cyclists and must allow for use by them. Special attention may be needed for buses at points
of traffic congestion and at important junctions. Development and redevelopment gives opportunity
for such improvements, as well as for passengers to use buses in general. The Council will put
forward specific measures in its Interim Local Implementation Plan (ILIP) as appropriate and
resources allow.

Greenwich Waterfront Transit

M10 The Council will promote Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) and ensure that it is fully
integrated with development proposals along the route by means of:
i. interim public transport arrangements;
ii. planning agreements with developers in line with Policy SC2;
iii. land reservations for Transit routes; and
iv. appropriate design of transit stops and access to them.

Reason
7.20 GWT is a public transport system characterised by high levels of route segregation and priority,
clean fuel systems, quality vehicles and stops, and level access/boarding with step free/gap free
platform stops. The network will run west to east along the whole Waterfront from Greenwich
serving North Greenwich Jubilee Line Station, Woolwich and Thamesmead to Abbey Wood. The
system could be a tram or some form of bus and would incorporate the existing segregated bus
route from Charlton to North Greenwich. The Mayor has agreed the scheme proceed as a bus
based system to be built with upgrade capability to tram.The accessibility of any system should be
a major consideration in its design and preferred choice of technology.
7.21 The area through which transit will run is characterised by major areas of comprehensive
redevelopment. This presents major opportunities in developing, funding and implementing the
system by:
• safeguarding of segregated roadways for transit;
• developer contributions to transit in cash (through S106 agreements); or by the developer
actually constructing the transit roadway as part of the development scheme; just as is normally
expected in respect of other site infrastructure such as sewers, water mains, conventional
highways etc; and
• integration of stops with high trip generators.

MOVEMENT 135
7.22 Elsewhere with on-street running, transit will be given high levels of priority to ensure fast trip
speeds, reliability and punctuality.
7.23 Whilst actual implementation of GWT is the highest priority, this should not preclude initial research
into the scope for yet further extension, such as across the River via Blackwall/Thames Gateway
Bridge; southwards to Eltham and Kidbrooke; and westwards to Deptford/Conways Wharf.
7.24 GWT is sought to be in place within the next 5-10 years and developer contributions are time
limited. This will assist securing the contribution, but within a reasonable timescale for all parties
concerned.The scheme, which is one of four new Intermediate Mode schemes proposed in London,
is included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). Consultation on the principle and general
alignment of Greenwich Waterfront Transit (GWT) was carried out in Summer 2001.The preferred
route for part of Phase 1 (Abbey Wood to Woolwich) has been agreed in principle, and this will be
operational by 2010. Further detailed consultation on the alignment of additional phases of GWT
may lead to safeguarding through Supplementary Guidance and subsequent reviews of the
development plan.

Transport Interchanges
M11 Good interchange within public transport and between public transport and private transport
will be sought as opportunities arise. Developments which improve such facilities will be
sympathetically considered by the Council. Consideration should also be given for the provision
of cycle access and parking. A comprehensive programme of interchange improvements at
Greenwich, Woolwich and Eltham Town Centres will also be pursued with relevant agencies.
Development opportunities for this will be exploited where they arise.

Reason
7.25 Integration of public transport as far as possible into an integrated, comprehensible, comprehensive
and seamless system promotes passenger convenience and usage. Physical difficulties deter use, as
do poorly integrated timetabling and different fares and tickets. The Council can only advocate
solutions to the latter problems, but in its development and development control functions it can,
and will, attempt to ease problems of physical interchange. People with disabilities and those coping
with shopping and children, are particularly discriminated against by poorly designed and difficult
facilities.
7.26 In particular, new transport schemes referred to above (See Policies M8 and M10) will be expected
to exploit full interchange with existing services. The new Jubilee Line station on the Greenwich
Peninsula gives a major opportunity for new and expanded bus services to interchange with the
Underground, and this benefit needs to be extended further southwards in the Borough.

Retention and Improvement of Public Transport Facilities

M12 The Council will work with relevant agencies on a programme of safer and improved stations,
and improved buses/bus infrastructure, such as bus garages. In considering proposals for
development the Council will seek to retain and improve bus and rail facilities.

Reason
7.27 Improved facilities encourage use of public transport. Many rail stations need physical improvement;
particularly in respect of personal safety, access for people with disabilities, and integration with other
transport networks (pedestrian, cycle, bus). Also, improvements to bus infrastructure and vehicles
will promote greater usage. Essential bus infrastructure, such as bus garages, is crucial in retaining and

136 MOVEMENT
 improving bus services. Schemes for redevelopment will be examined to see if relevant new
provision could be made.
7.28 The Council will seek particular provision for women. Women are more dependent on buses than
men and form the majority of bus passengers. They have particular need in public places, often
associated with child care, such as rooms for feeding, etc., and for women only to wait, as male
harassment can and does, occur. Parental facilities should also be available for men.

Accessibility
M13 An “Accessibility Map” will be drawn up for the Borough to assess the coverage of the area by
public transport modes.This will enable:
i. further service development and extension to be pursued, particularly for buses, to areas
where coverage is poor;
ii. planning decisions to ensure major and higher density developments are focussed where
accessibility is high;
iii. reduced parking standards where access by alternatives to the car are plentiful and where
the economy of the area will not be adversely affected.
vi Consideration of further service development along routes that are at, or approaching,
capacity.

Reason
7.29 It is necessary to know the existing pattern of public transport in the Borough in order to identify
areas where it is deficient, to promote public transport and to guide decisions about the scale and
location of development. An ‘Accessibility Map’ is an important tool for integrated land use and
transport planning – the Public Transport Accessibility Level (PTAL) map developed by TFL is
available for this purpose as general guide, although the score for each site will need to be assessed
on an individual basis.

Heliports and Airports

M14 Generally, Heliports and like facilities will not be permitted in the Borough, unless material
considerations arise which would justify or enable development in exceptional circumstances.
The whole Borough is considered sensitive to over flying by all types of aircraft due to its
predominantly residential nature, existing or planned.As such, reductions in existing levels of over
flying will be sought and proposals generating an increase in noise and/or frequency will normally
be opposed. Any planning applications for such a proposal would be required to address and
make clear environmental impacts when submitted.

Reason
7.30 In a built-up area like the Borough such forms of transport are intrusive.Transport or other benefits
are generally considered insufficient to outweigh environmental cost and the diversion of resources
from more generally available transport facilities. Proposals in surrounding areas that are likely to
cause over flying, noise, environmental and/or safety problems will normally be objected to. Any
proposals for the extension/intensification of use of London City Airport will be assessed as set out
above. Flights into Heathrow are becoming an increasing issue for the Borough.

MOVEMENT 137
 Roads
Safeguarded Schemes
M15 The Council supports the following road schemes, for which lands will be safeguarded as shown
on the Proposals Map:
i. Deptford Church Street junction realignment. (No Safeguarding required as it is within the
existing highway - see Proposals Map / Site Schedule m6)
ii. Thames Gateway Bridge with a dedicated public transport corridor (for use only by public
transport vehicles such as buses, trams, transit vehicles etc.- specific system to be
determined), (See Proposals Map / Site Schedule m2).
iii. Third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown, (See Proposals Map /
Site Schedule m3).
iv. Shooters Hill Road/Well Hall Road Junction Filter Lane Provision (See Proposals Map / Site
Schedule m7).

Reason
7.31 Some Road improvement is necessary to provide for:
• Strategic movements, especially those related to the economic development of the Borough e.g.
Schemes (ii)(iii);
• Easing congestion and permitting traffic management to relieve surrounding areas, e.g. Schemes
(i), (ii), (iii), (iv); and
• Environmental benefits e.g. Schemes (i), (ii), (iii), (iv).
7.32 The Council does not support road schemes that lead to a generalised increase in road capacity,
especially if they could be used for more radial, car-based commuting. Schemes under this policy are
limited in nature and geared to either specific development/economic aims, and/or adjustment to
the road network to give environmental benefit elsewhere through extensive traffic management.
All schemes supported by the Council are expected to pay due regard to environmental and
aesthetic considerations in their execution and to their potential for creating or improving wildlife
habitat. (See Policy O23). Schemes should also be designed to improve safety and convenience for
pedestrians and cyclists, and to give bus priority (where relevant). Proposals for the existing
Beresford Street/Plumstead Road in Woolwich which creates major problems of environmental
intrusion and severance are considered in the Town Centres chapter (paragraph 8.18). Schemes on
the Transport for London Road Network (TLRN) will need agreement with TFL.
7.33 The continued regeneration of the Docklands area and the Thames Gateway will require the
provision of new river crossings. Three possible river crossing schemes have been proposed, and
these are included in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). These have been developed as a
package that will significantly increase access by rail and will provide an improved level of access to
the London Thames Gateway area for road based modes.The indicative priority order is:
• a DLR extension to Woolwich (see paragraph 7.16);
• a bridge between Barking and Thamesmead, which would have dedicated lanes for public
transport, possibly intermediate schemes; and
• third Blackwall Crossing between North Greenwich and Silvertown. Should this crossing proceed
the Council will require a tunnel, not a bridge.
The Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) states that “It is important for the road crossings to maximise
regeneration benefits while minimising encouragement of additional car use.This will be a key issue

138 MOVEMENT
 in the decision on, and design of, the crossings.” The Borough is totally opposed to any possible
resurrection of, or any future proposal, to link the Thames Gateway Bridge directly to the A2 road
or to threaten Oxleas Wood.

General Criteria for Road Schemes

M16 In general the Council wishes to keep new road building in the Borough to an absolute minimum.
The Council will apply the following criteria to highway planning:
i. Roads will not be sought where they provide merely an increase in capacity for general
traffic;
ii. Roads are only to be constructed or improved when they serve primarily other purposes,
viz, development/regeneration; and/or as part of a programme of traffic management; or in
association with major public transport improvements/priority;
iii. As a general rule the effectiveness of the use of roads should be measured in terms of the
number of people moved rather than vehicles. As such there should be a general
presumption in favour of pedestrians, cyclists and buses in the allocation of (scarce) road
space.

Reason
7.34 Road building alone does not relieve congestion, it just provides for otherwise restrained demand,
and is therefore not sustainable.The presumption should be in favour of the better management of
the (finite) road space available.

Road Hierarchy
M17 The Council will designate roads in the Borough as a hierarchy of strategic, London distributor,
and local distribution and access roads, as set out below:
Strategic roads will be roads whose function is:
i. To provide for longer journeys, and in particular for those by coaches and goods vehicles.
But strategic roads should not be such as to encourage the transfer of trips from public
transport to car.
ii. To link London to the National Road System serving the rest of the country.
iii. To reduce traffic demands on London distributor roads so that, in association with restraint
policies, they can provide an adequate level of service and in turn relieve local distribution
and access roads of through traffic.
London distributor roads are those which:
Link strategic roads, strategic centres, and function as main bus routes. However,
environmental considerations will still dictate their size, the design of junctions and the
amount of traffic they should carry.
Local distribution and access roads are those which:
Are used by traffic passing through a particular area, as well as providing access to land, and
buildings in the immediate vicinity.Traffic here must not overwhelm the character of an area.

Reason
7.35 New road construction can help meet movement needs, but at a financial and land use cost. A
complementary approach is to make the best use possible of existing roads. This can be done by

MOVEMENT 139
 defining roads in the Borough and structuring the use of them accordingly. The relationship of a
development and associated scale of traffic generation/attraction to the roads hierarchy will be a
material consideration in determining a planning application. The roads hierarchy will also guide
traffic management and route signing strategies helping ensure appropriate traffic uses the most
appropriate route. This will help assist and achieve conservation and environmental goals. In
managing the hierarchy, due regard would need to be paid to the more vulnerable users -
pedestrians (especially children), cyclists and people with disabilities. TFL is the Highways Authority
for roads designated as part of the Transport for London Roads Network (TLRN), and is a statutory
consultee on proposals that might affect the network.

Environmental Areas
M18 The Council defines Environmental Areas as those bounded by strategic/TLRN roads; London
distributor roads and local distribution roads. In such areas traffic management schemes will be
devised as necessary to secure the removal of through/extraneous traffic; to improve/conserve
the environment; and/or to promote road safety. An Air Quality Management Area for the
whole Borough has been declared to improve the local environment. Areas for traffic
management will be prioritised and progressed in the context of the Borough’s annual Borough
Spending Plan (BSP) submission to TFL. Developments in such areas may be required, under a
planning obligation, to contribute towards traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic
impacts that may otherwise arise.

Reason
7.36 By definition, in environmental areas, the needs of residents, shoppers, visitors and others will take
precedence over any traffic demands. Opportunities can also be taken to conserve or improve the
physical fabric of such areas. Special regard will be paid to the needs of pedestrians and cyclists when
devising traffic management proposals.
7.37 However, in pursuing schemes of traffic management, resource availability and road capacities can
be a major constraint.Thus the priority of areas for treatment will have to be determined.This will
be done principally by an assessment of the severity of the traffic problem in an area, public demand
and by reference to an area’s character, with residential, shopping and places of town or landscape
value ranking more highly than others in importance.

M19 New roads in new housing developments to be adopted will be required to have appropriate
traffic calming measures incorporated in them before any dwelling is occupied. Further, the
provision of “Home Zones” will be encouraged to change the emphasis of residential roads to
environmentally safer roads.

Reason
7.38 It is desirable, sensible and the right time to require developers to incorporate traffic calming
measures into the design and construction of highways in housing developments that are to be
adopted.This reflects the needs of road safety and the provision of high environmental standards in
residential areas. If introduced at the outset of a development, potential problems will be anticipated
and the need for later remedial measures obviated. See also Policy H7.

140 MOVEMENT
 Specific Improvements
M20 Other specific places where traffic management and environmental improvements will be
pursued are as follows:
• Greenwich, Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres;
• East Greenwich;
• Plumstead;
• Deptford; and
• As part of a comprehensive programme of works to secure safe routes to schools.
Developments in such areas may be required, under a planning obligation, to contribute towards
traffic management schemes to mitigate any traffic impacts that may otherwise arise.

Reason
7.39 These are important residential, shopping and work locations which are suffering badly from the
effects of traffic. The traffic volume is high and comprises a large proportion of heavy vehicles. In
addition, Greenwich is a Conservation Area and World Heritage Site containing buildings and
attractions of international importance, and East Greenwich, Plumstead and Deptford have
considerable areas of deprivation. A safe routes to school programme will encourage less car use,
promote good travel habits in children and give benefits to areas generally where they are sited.

Relationship of Development to the Road Hierarchy and Town Centres

M21 Development proposals generating or attracting significant amounts of traffic must pay full regard
to the Road Hierarchy and environmental areas. Such development will not normally be
permitted in locations other than those immediately or highly adjacent to at least a London
distributor or a higher order road. There will also be a general presumption that major
developments should seek to locate in the first instance at the major transport hubs in the
Borough - Woolwich, Eltham and Greenwich Town Centres; and Greenwich Peninsula / North
Greenwich Station.

Reason
7.40 In order to protect the local environment and the local road system from heavy traffic, development
proposals likely to generate or attract significant amounts of traffic will not normally be permitted
in such areas. For development with significant traffic generation/attraction potential it would assist
the determination of any planning application if the developer were also to submit a statement
showing what considerations have been given to minimising road traffic impacts, and to the
relationship of the development and access to/from it to public transport.Town centre uses will be
subject to the sequential approach set out in Policy TC16.The Council believes that in the context
of environmental sustainability all agencies have a role in the common stewardship of the
environment and should be able to demonstrate that their proposed actions have no significant
detriment.

Relocation of High Traffic Generators

M22 The Council will undertake as need and resources dictate, to relocate existing development
causing traffic generation or attraction problems. Extensions to existing developments that
exacerbate these problems will not be granted planning permission.

MOVEMENT 141
 Reason
7.41 Control and management of land use can help to prevent traffic and environmental problems arising.
This applies not only to new, but also existing, land uses and development.

Car Parking Standards

M23 The standards for car parking for new developments in The London Plan should be applied.These
apply to employment generating development and are maxima. Because of the transitional
character of the Borough the “Inner London” standards should apply to Greenwich Town Centre
and other areas with a high PTAL rating, and “Outer” elsewhere in the Borough viz:
Area One off street space
per m2 gross floor space:
Inner London (Greenwich Town Centre
and areas with a high PTAL rating) 600-1,000
Outer London (Rest of the Borough) 100-600
For the purpose of this policy “employment generating development” will apply to Use Classes
A2; B1; B2; B8.

M24 For Shops (Use Class A1) the following principles and standards will apply. The standards are
maxima.
i. The first principle to be applied is that generally these should be located in town centres
(large and small shops) or established parades (small shops).
ii. Generally, for small shops parking provision off site is not required. Exceptions will be judged
on their merits.
iii. For large shops (in excess of 500 sq. m. gross floor space) the onus should first be on the
developer to justify the scale of provision proposed by reference to parking already available
in the whole town centre; public transport accessibility; and the parking strategy determined
for a town centre. Otherwise standards for retail uses as set out in the Mayor’s London Plan
will apply as set out in Table M2.
iv. For non-food retail warehouses the onus should first be on the developer to justify the scale
of provision proposed. Otherwise standards set out above in (iii) will apply.

M25 For residential developments the maximum provision for parking should be one space per unit.
For conversions one space (maximum) off street for every additional unit should be provided
except:
i. where this would necessitate the complete loss of front gardens. Such gardens are an
important street amenity and their complete loss to parking will not be considered; and
ii. where there is adequate on street parking space.
Generally there should be no specific provision for visitor parking.

142 MOVEMENT
M26 Parking standards for other developments will be as follows:These are maxima.
i. Sheltered/nursing homes: One space for every 3 separate dwelling units;
ii. Hotels, Bed & Breakfasts, Public Houses, Restaurants, Theatres, Leisure Facilities etc., the
developer to provide a justification for parking levels proposed, with each to be considered
on its merits;
iii. Other large institutional developments e.g., hospitals:A comprehensive parking strategy will
be required of the developer, to be determined on its merits.

M27 In all cases decisions on parking provision should also incorporate a consideration of the
following principles:
i. provision for people with disabilities (‘Reducing Mobility Handicaps’ by the Institute of
Highways and Transportation is a relevant guide);
ii. agreement with the developer that pricing and management structures should be subject to
Council approval, particularly in the case of large shopping and mixed use developments;
iii. that spaces provided in a scheme are generally available and not use specific;
iv. monitoring and reviews of usage over time so that as public transport improves and car
usage declines, spaces that are under-utilised can be released and re-used for other purposes
e.g. landscaping, other development, public spaces etc; and
v. in areas of high public transport accessibility standards should be even lower i.e. even less
parking provision than might otherwise be considered acceptable or appropriate. In lieu,
developers would be expected to contribute to public transport, cycle and pedestrian
provision through S106 agreements. In some such circumstances (almost) zero provision of
car parking would be appropriate.

Reasons for M23 to M27

7.42 The London Plan recommends maximum levels of parking for broad classes of development.
Maximum standards should be used as part of a package of measures to promote sustainable
transport choices, reduce the land-take of development, enable schemes to fit into central urban
sites, promote linked-trips and access to development for those without use of a car and to tackle
congestion.
7.43 Parking controls can have a major impact on how people choose to travel. They give opportunity
as an effective tool of traffic restraint and reduction assisting the Council to meet its obligations
under the Road Traffic Reduction Act. There is, however, an inevitable tension with
regeneration/redevelopment objectives which needs to be resolved. The standards described
attempt to strike a reasonable balance between the needs of a development and a reasonable
desire to have car access and considerations of sustainability, the environment, public transport and
other alternatives, equity and the management of the overall stock of car parking provision.
7.44 In residential areas where on street parking is already under pressure, lower than 1:1 provision of
off-street parking may be inappropriate.

MOVEMENT 143
 Community Benefits
M28 Generally, the Council will seek developer contributions and apply conditions on planning
permissions, in line with Policy SC2, for the following community benefits. In particular where it
is not possible or desirable to include parking spaces in a development the Council may consider
an acceptable alternative to be a contribution from the developer towards the following, in
priority order:
i. improvement to Public Transport;
ii. traffic management;
iii. provision for pedestrians;
iv. provision for cyclists;
v. road safety schemes
vi. controlled parking zone(s);
vii road network improvements; and
viii public off street parking.

Reason
7.45 New developments where relevant should contribute to transport infrastructure as a community
benefit in order that they are served in a sustainable way. For some developments no substantive
general parking may be desirable. In these instances alternative provision or alternative contributions
would be sought.

Service Areas
M29 New industrial, housing, shopping and commercial developments will be expected to provide
adequate service areas, as far as possible within the curtilage of the development, and so that
vehicles can leave the site forwards.

Reason
7.46 Adequate space for turning, loading/unloading, sight lines, etc., is necessary to service developments
properly, while, at the same time, minimising intrusion into the street scene and potentially hazardous
manoeuvres on the public highway. Provision for emergency service access must also be made.
Planning permission may be refused if standards are inadequate, especially where emergency vehicle
access is concerned.

144 MOVEMENT
 Off-Street Public Parking
M30 Having regard to the principle of sustainability in modes of transport, the Council will seek to
establish appropriate off-street public parking in the following areas:
i. Transport interchanges (Woolwich, Eltham, Greenwich), adequate Kiss and Ride and taxi
facilities will also be sought at rail and bus stations.
ii. Main commercial/shopping/service centres.
iii. In connection with traffic management schemes.
iv. Where environmental benefits would be gained, especially around rail stations and in areas
of need.
v. In housing estates where on-street parking is a problem, and where scope exists through
the use of parts of estate greens to provide off-street parking commensurate with
safeguarding local environmental standards.

M31 For each town centre a comprehensive car parking strategy will be prepared. Matters to consider
would include the:
i. needs of shoppers/visitors;
ii. prevention of long stay commuter parking;
iii. extension of CPZ areas;
iv. volume of spaces and pricing; and
v. economic vitality of the town centre.

Reason for M30 and M31

7.47 As a corollary to on-street parking restrictions, some provision for off-street public car parks is
necessary. Town Centres, areas of need, environmentally important areas, and certain important
routes would particularly benefit by such a package of control and provision. However, care will be
exercised in not providing too lavish a level of public parking in certain areas where it would
encourage inappropriate levels of car use to the detriment of the environment, where congestion
would arise, and where public transport is an alternative. Necessary parking to facilitate interchange
with public transport is also necessary in the main centres of the Borough. Developments will need
to take into account parking policies in the Borough; in particular compatibility with town centre
parking strategies will be required.
7.48 It is necessary to regard all Parking Policies as being complementary.Together they are designed to
ensure sufficient access to important activities (work, shopping, etc.), by a number of types of
transport, commensurate with safeguarding the needs of local residents, environmental standards
and the beneficial functioning of land and business. Parking can be controlled by a combination of
time and/or price to ensure its most effective and appropriate use.
7.49 Private residential gardens play an important amenity and ecological role in urban areas and make
a positive contribution to the street scene.Their loss to bland tarmac or paved areas is, accordingly,
retrograde. However, such development does not require planning permission and the Council will
therefore seek to bring the conversion of private residential garden space to off-street car parking
fully within planning control. An exceptional circumstance, where such off-street parking could be
contemplated, would be where on-street parking would aggravate the safety and free flow of traffic
and pedestrians in the area.

MOVEMENT 145
 Cycling
M32 Cycling will be promoted in the Borough. The Borough will press relevant agencies to
maintain/provide free cycle carriage on rail/riverbus, and cycle use of bus lanes will be promoted.
The needs of cyclists will be particularly pursued in all new development, road and traffic
management schemes by:
i. Freeing cyclists from the restrictions of existing and proposed traffic management schemes,
as appropriate.
ii. Providing cycle routes in accordance with the London Cycle Network (LCN),Thames Cycle
Route and evolving local network (see Map 11). Where possible these will be physically
segregated from other road users. The use of footpaths in general, the riverside walk and
the Green Chain will be examined in this context, as will their provision in association with
new development and road schemes. Other physical provision, such as improved junction
design will also be implemented where possible and required. In particular, safe cycle routes
to schools will also be implemented.
iii. Providing cycle parking facilities, particularly in conjunction with major traffic
attractors/generators and new developments.These should be sufficient in number, safe and
in well-lit areas.
iv. Provision for secure cycle parking and other cyclists needs will be a condition on planning
permissions for major new developments, (See Table M1), and developer contributions to
cycle provision/networks will also be sought as appropriate in line with Policy SC2.

Reason
7.50 Cycling is beneficial to the individual, quiet, unobtrusive, non-polluting and efficient relative to
resources consumed. Specific provision for the cyclist will encourage greater use of the bike.
However, that use must be made safe. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including
the London Cycling Action Plan. As a standard condition, major new developments will be expected
to provide secure cycle parking and facilities for showers, drying out or changing clothes on arrival
in bad weather. Cycling can give those otherwise less mobile in the Borough, (women, the young,
the unwaged and those residents living in, or experiencing poverty), access to cheap, personal door-
to-door and efficient transport. While segregated cycle routes are often the safest, the provision of
cycle routes will not be conditioned on this, as segregation is often not achievable. Existing, unsuitable
facilities for cycle parking also need to be reviewed. New residential developments, particularly
schemes with flats, will be expected to provide secure cycle storage/parking spaces. Cycle parking
standards are shown in Table M1.

146 MOVEMENT
 Map 11: Cycle Network
© Crown copyright

Proposed London Strategic Network

Existing London Strategic Network

Proposed Thames Cycle Route and links

Existing Thames Cycle Routes and links

MOVEMENT 147
 Pedestrians
M33 High standards of pedestrian safety, accessibility and convenience will be promoted by the
Council. In particular the Council will seek to:
i. Introduce pedestrian (priority) areas;
ii. Expand the development of a network of pedestrian only priority routes, ensuring they are
well lit, signed, safe and well maintained;
iii. Ensure safe and convenient facilities for crossing roads and at transport interchanges;
iv. Generally improve the pedestrian environment;
v. Use its powers of development control in the pedestrian’s interests and in its role as
Highway Authority have regard to the needs of people with disabilities in the design of
highway improvements and pedestrianisation schemes and the requirements of people with
visual impairments in the design of pedestrian crossings;
vi. Support improvement of the river foot tunnels at Greenwich and Woolwich;
vii. In determining planning applications and securing S106 agreements in line with Policy SC2,
ensure the needs of pedestrians and people with disabilities are fully provided for;
viii. When introducing road safety measures, look first of all at mechanisms to modify or calm
driver behaviour rather than restricting ease of pedestrian movement.

Reason
7.51 Walking is an important means of travel in its own right, and accounts for about a quarter of all
London’s journeys. Walking is also an important means of getting to and from public transport
services and is involved in most other journeys.Walking is particularly important for certain people,
such as children and those without direct access to cars. Every trip has a pedestrian element in it,
so provision is important. It will be promoted through a variety of mechanisms including the Walking
Plan for London. Safety and convenience are major objectives. Pedestrianisation will be sought
where possible. So will provision of a segregated network of paths linking major centres and open
spaces by the incorporation of existing paths and the use of opportunities afforded by the riverside,
Green Chain, open spaces, road closure and redevelopment schemes. Pedestrianisation and better
pedestrian facilities can provide major townscape and environmental benefits. Centres where it will
be particularly sought are at Woolwich, Greenwich, Plumstead and Eltham.
7.52 A safe pedestrian environment is particularly important for women and older people who would
otherwise hesitate to go out for fear of harassment and attack. New developments and the
redevelopment of existing public areas should seek to deal with such problems and will be assessed
accordingly. Many pedestrian facilities are capable of shared use with and for the benefit of cyclists.
Schemes should allow for this as appropriate. Careful design of the pedestrian environment to
enable access for people with disabilities is also particularly important.

People with Disabilities - Access in Public Areas

M34 The Council will take into account the needs of people with disabilities in the exercise of its
functions that affect the environment (including planning and development control). In particular,
new development to which the public will have access, as appropriate but especially in Town
Centres, should make provision for reserved parking and setting down/picking up points for
vehicles for people with disabilities and less mobile people and suitable waiting areas should be
provided.

148 MOVEMENT
 Reason
7.53 The Council constructs and manages public buildings, streets, leisure facilities, open spaces, etc. As
resources allow and where necessary, these will be changed to permit access and use by people
with disabilities. For example, the programme of dropped kerbs initiated by the Council will be
sustained, as far as possible. By 2000 almost 70% of pedestrian crossings in the Borough were
accessible to people with disabilities. Development proposals need to allow for reserved parking
and setting down points near the centre of towns. While conventional public transport remains
inaccessible to many people with disabilities, adequate provision must be made for the parking of
vehicles to set down and pick up passengers close to Town Centres. (See Policies D1 and M27).
7.54 Opportunities to provide reserved parking spaces for Dial-a-Ride and community transport vehicles
adjacent to seated waiting areas for older people with disabilities in developments will be examined
where relevant.

Mobility Schemes
7.55 The Council will support, as resources permit, the provision of community transport initiatives such
as Dial-a-Ride, Gadabout, Taxi-Card and the community transport scheme, which are designed to
meet the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities. Many people with
disabilities need specialist, door-to-door transport to get about at all. Often this need can only be
met by organisations with specific expertise and operating outside the framework of more
conventional forms of transport.
7.56 It is recognised that the transport needs of community groups and people with disabilities are
inadequately served by other forms of transport.The Council recognises that for reasons of safety
and cost effectiveness, the provision of grants to purchase and operate mini buses for community
and voluntary sector groups is best achieved in partnership with local community transport
operators.

Freight
Restriction on Road Freight
M35 Road freight movements should be confined to suitable routes, residential roads being used only
in the last resort for direct access.This will involve consideration with other road authorities of:
i. designation and signing of lorry routes; and that Strategic and London Distributor roads are
the main freight network;
ii. local area lorry bans;
iii. pinch points;
iv. road improvement; and
v. encouraging developments that minimise freight movement by road, and conditions on
relevant planning permissions that require the applicant to have a freight movement policy
that is approved by the Council.

Reason
7.57 Lorries using narrow, difficult roads in conjunction with land use areas of high sensitivity
(Conservation Areas, residential streets, etc.) are particularly intrusive and environmentally
damaging. In general, only Strategic Routes are really capable of accepting major lorry flows. Where
lorry traffic is considered acceptable, the provision of noise insulation for properties adversely
affected will be sought.TFL is a key partner in developing freight strategies.

MOVEMENT 149
 Rail Freight
M36 In association with the Strategic Rail Authority, Network Rail and the rail freight operators the
Council will do all in its power to encourage the greater use of the rail system to carry freight.
The use to be made of the rail system for freight will be an important consideration in
determining relevant planning applications

Reason
7.58 Generally, movement of freight by rail is more environmentally acceptable and resource efficient.
Transference to rail can help ease traffic congestion on roads. Some development sites could be
integrated into the rail network and grant aid for new track, buildings, sidings, etc. should be
considered as available. The main rail freight facility in the Borough is at Angerstein Wharf. This is
within the Borough’s designated Aggregates Zone and is used for the transshipment of aggregates.
Land west of White Hart Road is also designated as a rail freight site.

Water Borne Freight

M37 The Council will support proposals which increase the proportion of freight in the Borough that
is water borne. The use to be made of existing or proposed wharves will be an important
consideration in determining relevant planning applications. (See Policy W5),

Reason
7.59 The advantages of water borne freight are similar to those of rail. Much industrial land has water
access and existing wharf facilities. Proposals using these may be given more sympathetic
consideration than those which do not, subject to appropriate environmental and amenity
safeguards. Policy W5 provides specific policy guidance on wharves which are formally safeguarded
for river-based freight traffic.

Areas of High Freight Accessibility

M38 Developments generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic will normally be expected
to locate within areas of high freight accessibility.These will be designated in due course through
supplementary planning guidance. Relevant proposals may be refused planning permission if they
are poorly related to such areas.

Adverse Effect of Freight on the Environment

M39 Existing land uses generating or attracting large amounts of freight traffic to the detriment of the
environment of sensitive areas will be examined, if necessary, with a view to their relocation, or
the provision of more satisfactory means of access.

Reason for M38 and M39

7.60 Many problems of freight traffic can be avoided by appropriately locating relevant land uses to begin
with. Areas of High Freight Accessibility are most likely to be those where close access is possible
to the strategic road network, rail sidings and wharves without detriment to the environment.

150 MOVEMENT
 Coaches
M40 Developments generating/attracting coach traffic (leisure and/or commuter) will need to make
provision for dropping off and picking up, coach manoeuvring and parking on site. The scale of
coach traffic generated will need to be justified, and may be a reason for refusal of planning
permission.

M41 Generally, provision for commuter coach parking will not be made in the Borough.At key tourist
locations appropriate drop off and layover provision will be sought for visitors coaches.

M42 Coach Parking Strategies will be drawn up for Greenwich Town Centre/World Heritage Site,
Eltham and Woolwich Town Centres, and other locations that attract significant numbers of
tourist coaches, to accommodate the needs of visitor/tourist coaches commensurate with
safeguarding the local environment.

Reason
7.61 Coach traffic passing through the Borough and stopping/parking on the street is a problem,
particularly at visitor attractions such as Greenwich Town Centre. Coach layover has been removed
from the Cutty Sark environs as part of an environmental upgrade of the area. Suitable permanent,
replacement off-street provision is required but has yet to be secured. Developments may give
opportunities to achieve this as a partnership with the Council.

MOVEMENT 151
 TABLE M1: CYCLE PARKING STANDARDS

Location Land Use Location Cycle Parking Standard

Category Category

Places of Work B1/A2 Business Offices, Services 1/125m2 with minimum of 2 space
B1 Light Industrial 1/250m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
B2 General Industrial 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
B8 Warehouses 1/500m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
Shopping A1 Food Retail Out of town 1/350m2
Town centre/local shopping centre 1/125m2
A1 Non-Food Retail Out of town 1/1500m2 with minimum of 4 spaces
Town centre/local shopping centre 1/300m2
A1 Garden Centre 1/300m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
Educational D1 Primary Schools 1 space per 10 staff
D1 Secondary Schools 1 Space per 10 staff/students
D1 Universities, colleges 1 space per 8 staff/students
Entertainment A4 Pubs, Wine Bars 1/100m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
A5 Fast Food Takeaway 1/50m2 with minimum of 2 spaces
A3 Restaurants, Cafes 1 space per 20 seats with minimum of 2 spaces
D2 Theatres, Cinemas 1 space per 50 seats with a minimum of 2 spaces
D2 Leisure, Sports Centres, 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space per
Swimming Pools 20 peak period visitors
Housing C2 Student Accommodation 1 space per 2 students
C3 Flats 1 space per unit
Community D1 Doctor and Dentist Surgeries, 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space per
Health Centres and Clinics 5 staff for visitors
D1 Libraries 1 space per 10 staff plus 1 space
per 10 staff for visitors
C2 Hospitals 1 space per 5 staff plus 1 space
per 10 staff for visitors
Transport Rail Stations See DOT 1996 TAL 3/96
Bus Stations Meet local demand
Source: London Cycle Network Design Manual (1998)

152 MOVEMENT
 TABLE M2: RETAIL CAR PARKING STANDARDS
PTAL

6 inner / 5 outer 4 to 2 1 maximum

London & 5
Retail land use 1 space per X square metres gross floor area
Smaller food store
(up to 500 sqm GFA) 75 50-35 30
Food supermarket
(up to 2,500 sqm net sales
or 4,000 sqm GFA) 45-30 30-20 18
Food superstore
(over 2,500 sqm net sales
or 4,000 sqm GFA) 38-25 25-18 15
Non food warehouse 60-40 50-30 30
Garden centre 65-45 45-30 25
Town centre / shopping mall 75-50 50-35 30
Source: London Plan (2004)

MOVEMENT 153
154 MOVEMENT
 8. TOWN CENTRES
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
8.1. The Plan promotes the regeneration and revitalisation of the Borough’s network of Town (Major,
District and Local Centres) and Neighbourhood Parades. By virtue of their accessibility and existing
diversity of use, they are considered the most appropriate locations for a range of activities that
attract and serve Borough residents, including retailing; leisure and entertainment; residential, arts,
cultural and community facilities; commercial and public services. The general policies for Town
Centres and retailing are:

STC1 To safeguard and improve the vitality, commercial viability and sustainability of the Borough’s
Town Centres as retail, leisure, employment, service and residential centres for residents, visitors
and the business community.

STC2 To support the Borough’s Town Centre hierarchy of Major, District and Local Centres, and its
network of Neighbourhood Parades, as set out below and in Tables TC1,TC2 and TC3:
i. Woolwich and Eltham are designated Major Centres, and the Borough’s largest and second
shopping and office employment centres respectively.They are preferred locations for larger
scale development in retail, leisure and other town centre uses.
ii. Six District Centres offer a significant range of both comparison shopping and a
supermarket or range of food shops. They are appropriate locations for a variety of town
centre uses scaled to serve the population of their sub-region without harming the vitality
and viability of Woolwich or Eltham. Greenwich is the Borough’s largest District Centre, and
in addition a major visitor destination and an inscribed World Heritage Site. Proposals that
serve this wider market must respect both its heritage and its service role to local residents.
iii. Seven Local Centres offer a moderate range of shopping and service activities, usually
including a small supermarket, and are suitable locations for appropriately scaled town
centre uses to serve their local catchment. A new Local Centre will be developed by
Kidbrooke Station, as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area.
iv. 32 Neighbourhood Parades complement the formal retail heirarchy and typically have less
than 20 shops offering basic convenience goods and services within walking distance. Retail
developments will be subject to need and sequential testing. Provision of a minimum range
of retailing and services will be safeguarded.

STC3 To safeguard and enhance safety, access, comfort, security, amenity, and the environment within
the Borough’s town centres for residents, workers and visitors.

STC4 To promote a high standard of design in town centre buildings and public and civic spaces, and
to preserve and enhance historic buildings, and other important heritage features.

STC5 To improve town centre accessibility by a choice of means of transport, and to reduce congestion
and pollution in town centres by promoting public transport, walking, cycling, and linked trips.

TOWN CENTRES 155

 TABLE TC1:TOWN CENTRE HIERARCHY AND TOTAL RETAIL (A1/2/3) FLOORSPACE

Location Total Durable / Convenience Service / Vacant Planning

floorspace comparison Other Permission
(m2 gross)

Major Centres 1
(50-100,000 m2 floorspace)
Woolwich 2 71,350 35,250 8,600 15,750 11,750 14,000
Eltham 53,450 37,050 5,950 8,600 1,850 0

District Centres 1
(10-30,000 m2 floorspace) 3
West Greenwich 4 21,400 9,180 2,930 9,050 400 22,530
East Greenwich 12,300 4,220 3,460 3,050 1,570 0
Blackheath 5 11,300 3,000 3,000 5,000 300 0
Lee Green 5 16,300 5,000 6,000 4,300 1,000 0
Plumstead High Street 12,500 3,500 3,000 4,000 2,000 0
Thamesmead 21,850 6,850 10,420 4,100 500 0
Larger town centres 220,450 104,050 43,360 53,850 19,370 41,200

Local Centres &

Neighbourhood Parades 6
7 Local Centres, 32 Parades 6 66,950 12,830 21,260 25,030 7,830 n/a

ALL CENTRES / PARADES 287,400 116,880 64,620 78,880 27,200

Out-of-centre 7, 8
All superstores /
retail warehouses 78,550 61,000 11,300 1,000 5,250 2,400
Greenwich Peninsula 9 50,350

TOTAL 365,950 177,880 75,920 79,880 32,450 91,550

Sources: GOAD, Borough records and estimates 2003/4

Notes to Table TC1

1. Major/district centres as defined in the London Plan, plus East Greenwich
2. Permission at Woolwich Royal Arsenal: 12-14,000 m2 , mostly A3 with ancillary/non destination A1 only.
3. See table TC2 and Proposal Map
4. Permission granted in 2000 at Greenwich Reach East, of which up to c.10,000 m2 could be A3.
5. Blackheath and Lee Green are mainly located in Lewisham.
6. See tables TC2,TC3 and Proposal Map.
7. Retail warehouses and supermarkets, mostly on Woolwich Road or Bugsby’s Way.
Excludes stand-alone local shops.
8. Permission (outline) for non-food retail off Brocklebank Road/Bugsby’s Way, Site rear / west of Lidl.
9. Outline planning permission granted to Meridian Delta Limited for up to 31,000 sqm (gross)
A1 and A2 and up to 19,350 sqm A3 on Greenwich Peninsula including within the Millennium Dome.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

Background
8.2 Town centres provide an important social and economic focus for the districts and communities
they serve. Collectively they offer a broad mix of facilities, services and jobs in locations accessible
to the widest range of people by a choice of modes of transport. Reviving the Borough’s town
centres is a key objective of the Greenwich Strategy (2003).While retailing normally underpins these

156 TOWN CENTRES

 other activities, the Borough’s town centres face stiff competition from out-of-centre retail
developments that provide extensive free car parking.These include Bluewater and concentrations
of retail warehousing such as Charlton. Some of the Borough’s town centres have experienced a
decline in both convenience and durable goods shopping, and increasing vacancy levels that threaten
their retail role and viability.
8.3 Curbs on further out-of-centre development following introduction of the Sequential Approach in
PPS6 Planning for Town Centres, in conjunction with other social trends and a buoyant economy in
the late 1990’s, have led to a selective resurgence in town centre fortunes. UK leisure spending
doubled in real terms in the last quarter of the 20th Century. An increasing number of people are
working hours that differ from the traditional working week, creating a demand for extended
opening hours for retail and leisure activities.
8.4 In this regard the threat to the retail role of some of the Borough’s centres is also an opportunity.
The redevelopment of redundant sites and conversion of underused premises can allow
diversification into more sustainable roles. Activities such as tourism, leisure, community, employment
or residential use can in turn boost a flagging retail sector by attracting new customers. It is therefore
important that on the one hand planning policies for the Borough both promote retail investment
and protect the retail activity that remains. On the other, they must also facilitate the emergence of
complementary, alternative or ‘niche’ roles where this would benefit the overall vitality and viability
of a centre, without unduly compromising local services accessible to less mobile residents.

Borough Town Centres

8.5 Woolwich is the Borough’s main centre for shopping, civic and community services, and office
employment. It is designated as a Major Centre in the London Plan, and recognised to be in need
of regeneration. Woolwich is the Borough’s priority location for major retail and multiplex
development, and a preferred location for employment, tourism and leisure uses. Woolwich is
constrained to the north by the Thames, yet access to the Royal Arsenal, Riverside walk and
Riverside Park is hampered by the busy A206.
8.6 After a difficult period of general decline and retail contraction in the early to late 1990’s,Woolwich
is experiencing renewed investment and interest stimulated by regeneration of the historic
Woolwich Royal Arsenal, other regeneration programmes and the planned extension of the
Docklands Light Railway. The Arsenal is being redeveloped for a mix of uses including heritage
tourism. It offers a major opportunity to diversify and transform Woolwich by stimulating the re-use
of town centre development sites and redundant buildings.
8.7 The Council is using its role as planning authority to ensure that the Arsenal integrates with and
complements the existing town centre, rather than competing with existing retail functions in
Woolwich. Through the Woolwich Regeneration Agency the Council is also taking a more proactive
role, in partnership with the London Development Agency, including the assembly and compulsory
purchase of key development sites.The western end of the Arsenal and the adjacent Warren Lane
development site are being promoted for mixed-use development including commercial leisure uses
such as a multiplex cinema. In addition the Arsenal redevelopment, office conversions and planning
permissions elsewhere in the town centre provide a development pipeline of at least 3,000 new
dwellings within the town centre, a figure likely to be significantly exceeded as other sites come
forward over the Plan period. However, the Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 Update) notes that
Woolwich remains vulnerable to competition and needs to improve its retail offer and market share
to consolidate its recovery.
8.8 Greenwich is the most significant of the Borough’s District Centres as designated in the London
Plan. Part of the town centre falls within the inscribed Greenwich Maritime World Heritage Site,
internationally famous for its historic monuments, including the National Maritime Museum, the
Royal Observatory and the former Royal Naval College (a campus for Greenwich University and

TOWN CENTRES 157

 Trinity Music College).The majority of the area within the defined town centre boundary falls within
either the West Greenwich or Greenwich Park Conservation Areas. Greenwich is a visitor
destination of international status. Architectural attractions are complemented by the historic
Greenwich Market and a wide range of pubs and restaurants.
8.9 Greenwich received a major boost with the completion of two new stations on the Dockland Light
Rail extension to Lewisham, providing direct access to Canary Wharf and the City of London, and
will benefit further from plans to increase the DLR’s passenger capacity. This is helping to bring
forward a range of development proposals. The DLR has also created new opportunities for
commercial, cultural and creative activities on nearby sites in underused parts of Deptford Creek.
These are identified on the Proposals Inset Map, and discussed further in the West Greenwich
Development Framework, adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance (April 2000,
to be updated).
8.10 Greenwich also suffers from heavy through traffic and other environmental problems, and conflicts
between its roles as a major visitor destination and a local shopping centre.The Plan seeks to balance
protection and enhancement of the historic environment, the needs of visitors, and the interests of
local residents and businesses. In addition to the policies in this Plan, further guidance on design
issues in the public realm it set out in the Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999).
8.11 Eltham is a designated Major Centre in the London Plan, is a significant employment centre and
secondary office location, and the Borough’s second largest retail centre.The Greenwich Retail Study
(2002 & 2005 update) noted it has a stronger retail role than Woolwich, concluding that the centre
is relatively healthy - although its modest size leaves it vulnerable to competition from larger,
competing centres. It complements Woolwich by providing a community focus for residents in the
south of the Borough, a role that will be enhanced during the seven year South Greenwich SRB5
regeneration programme. Additional retail and leisure refurbishment or redevelopment will be
supported within the town centre, on identified sites and elsewhere as opportunities arise.
8.12 Eltham is also conveniently located for the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions
including Eltham Palace, Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce. There is scope for tourism
development to capitalise on these historic assets.
8.13 District Centres, Local Centres and Neighbourhood Parades primarily offer convenience and ‘top
up’ shopping and services to their localities. They play an essential role in maintaining a sustainable
pattern of retailing and service provision within walking distance of the communities they serve, of
particular benefit to the less mobile and the large number of households in the Borough that do
not have access to a car. In general the smaller centres contain a lower level of retail activity than
larger centres, and have higher levels of service uses and vacancy. Some such as Plumstead High
Street and Blackheath perform niche roles, with specialist Asian shopping and an extensive range of
restaurants respectively. Others such as Blackheath Hill are in prolonged decline with little remaining
retail function, despite having a relatively large number of units.

Policies
CENTRE-SPECIFIC POLICIES
TOWN CENTRE
TC1 The Council will seek to ensure that the reuse and redevelopment of the Woolwich Royal
Arsenal and Warren Lane site integrate and connect with, and complement and enhance,
Woolwich as the Borough’s most important centre.

158 TOWN CENTRES

 Reason
8.14 The 31-hectare Royal Arsenal site is a designated Mixed Use Area (see Policy W3). It is a unique
part of Britain’s military and industrial heritage, containing 18 listed buildings, and most of it is also
designated as a Conservation Area.The Royal Arsenal redevelopment is progressing in accordance
with the approved Master Plan (1998, revised 2000).The Warren Lane (‘teardrop’) site is designated
for mixed use, leisure led development (Site Schedule mu13). It adjoins, and is being jointly marketed
with, the southwestern part of the Royal Arsenal, where heritage uses are concentrated. It occupies
a pivotal position between the Arsenal and Macbean Street, a natural route into Powis Street.
Collectively these schemes will substantially extend and diversify the town centre.The Council aims
to ensure that those elements that have yet to be finalised also complement, rather than compete
with, the centre’s existing functions, and in particular its retail role.These principles formed the basis
of the Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1998 & 2000 update, currently under review),
adopted as Supplementary Planning Guidance.

TC2 The Council seeks to revitalise Woolwich as the Borough’s primary shopping centre, by
facilitating increases in the quality, quantity and variety of retail floor space in the centre.

Reason
8.15 Woolwich has the largest retail floor space of any centre in the Borough, but has experienced
persistent shop vacancy in its western fringes, and despite environmental and shopfront
improvements is in need of further modernisation. It is therefore the Borough’s priority location for
major retail investment, and has potential to consolidate its existing role in value retailing - a market
niche that is growing in importance. The Greenwich Retail Study (2002 & 2005 update) identifies a
need to claw back substantial trade leakage to surrounding centres. There is expenditure capacity
based on current trends to accommodate a significant increase in both convenience (supermarket)
and High Street comparison-shopping, equivalent to a 40% increase above currently trading
floorspace. A range of potential development sites are identified in the Site Schedules, and further
guidance is provided in The Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (2002 Draft, under
review).

TC3 The Council will support developments in tourism, culture, leisure, the evening economy and
town centre living that contribute to the diversity, vitality and viability of Woolwich, and enhance
its appeal as a destination for Borough residents and visitors.

Reason
8.16 Woolwich will become a major visitor focus but currently lacks appropriate facilities to complement
its retail and service functions. It also has a number of underused, older office buildings, which are
suitable for mixed use, two of which are being converted to residential use. Increasing the resident
town centre population will in turn support and boost its shops and businesses. These issues are
examined in more detail in the emerging revised Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework.
Follow-up work in 2007/8 will also look at opportunities in, and wider integration with, the
surrounding area.

TC4 The Council will seek to ensure that the former Greenwich University Calderwood Street site
in Woolwich Town Centre (Site Schedule mu27) is developed for a mix of uses to include activity-
generating town centre uses.

Reason
8.17 The Council is seeking replacement uses that will make a similarly broad contribution to the
Woolwich economy within a comprehensive mixed-use development. Town Centres are
acknowledged to be suitable locations for retail, office, residential, leisure, entertainment, and

TOWN CENTRES 159

 education functions (PPS6 Planning for Town Centres). Woolwich Town Centre is a suitable location
for such major trip generating uses due to its accessibility to staff and the public by a variety of forms
of public transport. Part of the site is Grade II Listed.

TC5 The Council will seek to secure safer and more convenient pedestrian and cycle access
to and within the town centre, and between the town centre, the waterfront and the
Royal Arsenal.

Reason
8.18 To improve the accessibility of Woolwich by public and non-motorised transport, especially for
residents without access to a car, to reduce the need to travel by car, and to improve safety and
environmental quality in the town centre.The severance of the Royal Arsenal and Warren Lane sites
from the town centre by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road is an impediment to their
redevelopment to support town centre regeneration. The Council is pursuing a package of
measures to reduce the severance caused by Beresford Street/Plumstead Road including traffic
calming and visual improvements.

TC6 The Council will safeguard the alignment of Crossrail and the extension of the Docklands Light
Railway to Woolwich, and will promote and support the provision of Greenwich Waterfront
Transit to serve Woolwich town centre. The Council will seek to secure provision of an
integrated transport interchange incorporating Woolwich Arsenal station, and to capitalise on the
opportunity for associated retail and commercial development.

Reason
8.19 The Council has expressed its formal support for the proposed Docklands Light Railway Extension
to Woolwich from City Airport and the Royal Docks, safeguarded under Policy M8.The Council also
formally supports the Greenwich Waterfront Transit route Abbey Wood, via Woolwich, to
Greenwich. The safeguarded trans-London Crossrail routes are supported in principle (see Site
Schedule m5), and the Council is promoting inclusion of a Crossrail station at Woolwich. These
schemes are promoted in the London Plan and the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). A site has
been identified for a new transport interchange with the DLR near Woolwich Arsenal station, which
also presents an opportunity for associated retail/commercial development (see Site Schedule mu14
and the Woolwich Interchange Planning Brief, 2002). Safeguarding also remains in place for a rail link
by tunnel between Silvertown and Woolwich (See also Policies M8, M10 and M11).

Greenwich Town Centre

TC7 The Council will protect and enhance the site and setting of the Maritime Greenwich World
Heritage Site, as defined on the Proposals Map. Development within it should preserve and
enhance its essential and unique character and appearance. Views and vistas to and from the
World Heritage Site will also be protected by ensuring that developments in the buffer zone of
the Site or directly visible from it are visually sympathetic.

Reason
8.20 The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site was inscribed in 1997 under the 1972 World Heritage
Convention. It formed the sixteenth World Heritage Site in the UK, in recognition of its outstanding
and internationally significant universal value. It comprises one of the finest and most dramatically
sited architectural and landscape ensembles in the British Isles. It includes the historic centre of the
town with the architectural masterpieces and designed landscape of the Old Royal Naval College,
National Maritime Museum and extending outside the town centre to include the Royal Park.The
strong historical association of the area with shipbuilding, seafaring, the navy, royalty and the

160 TOWN CENTRES

 measurement of time and distance, combine with the brilliant architectural expressions of them
within a historic landscape, to make Greenwich unique.
8.21 PPG15 Planning and Historic Environment states that the inclusion of a site on the World Heritage
List highlights its outstanding international importance as a key material consideration to be taken
into account by local planning authorities in determining planning applications and listed building
consent applications. Guidance stresses that sites should be protected for the benefit of future
generations, and that development proposals affecting sites or their buffer zones require careful
scrutiny for their likely effect on sites, or their settings in the longer term. To achieve this planning
authorities are advised to formulate specific planning policies for protecting World Heritage Sites.
8.22 The Maritime Greenwich World Heritage Site Management Plan (2005) provides a framework for the
activities that take place in the Site, whilst ensuring that they do not conflict with the need to protect
the heritage qualities that make Maritime Greenwich such a special and unique place. It sets out aims
and objectives for the Site and a programme of long and short-term actions. Both the Site and the
buffer zone are also protected by Conservation Area designation.

TC8 The Council will preserve and promote the enhancement of historic Greenwich town centre.
Refurbishment or new development in Greenwich must be appropriately scaled, respect existing
form and character, and demonstrate the highest standards in design, landscaping, detailing and
finishing.

Reason
8.23 To maintain and preserve the architectural integrity and identity of the town centre, and to ensure
that new development complements its existing form and character. Supplementary Planning
Guidance on streetscape design is provided in The Greenwich Town Centre Streetscape Manual (1999)
and Greenwich Town Centre Colour Guidance Note (2002). The Stockwell Street Planning Brief (2000)
provides advice for the largest development site in the core of the town centre (Site Schedule mu3).
For shop-fronts and signs within Greenwich Town Centre the Council has produced two design
guidelines, Design Guidance for Shop-fronts in Greenwich Town Centre and Design Guidance for Shop
Signs, Advertisements and Illumination in Town Centre.

TC9 The Council will support and promote the multi functional role of Greenwich town centre.The
Council will seek to capitalise on its cultural strengths as a visitor destination and centre for
tertiary education, and will seek to expand and diversify its business base. Employment, retailing,
tourism, culture, leisure, hospitality, education and residential developments will be supported
where they preserve and enhance its heritage and environment, maintain its diversity and provide
a balanced range of opportunities and services for residents, the business community, students
and visitors.

Reason
8.24 Greenwich is a well-established international, national and regional tourist and visitor destination by
virtue of its world-class heritage features and specialist markets. To a significant extent this role
shapes its wider commercial functions in retailing, hospitality and leisure uses, although its role in
providing convenience shopping, services and leisure activities for the local community is also vitally
important (see Policy TC10). At present Greenwich has limited success in attracting overnight
visitors, and there is a need to improve the range of accommodation and evening hospitality and
leisure uses.
8.25 This visitor destination role is complemented by a growing presence in further and higher education,
a sector that offers scope to bring further economic and educational benefits to the Borough.The
growing prominence of the University of Greenwich and Trinity College of Music (incorporating the
Laban Centre for contemporary dance) are helping to improve the profile, vitality and viability of

TOWN CENTRES 161

 Greenwich town centre.These two universities accommodate about 10,000 students in Greenwich.
Their operations, staff and students provide opportunities for Greenwich companies including local
retailing and leisure facilities, and are helping to attract new business investment in the town centre
area.There are also a number of smaller, specialist or independent colleges and halls of residence in
the wider vicinity including Deptford.
8.26 Greenwich also offers opportunities to expand its currently modest role as a business and office
location, in particular around Deptford Creekside. Additional factors include surplus industrial land,
good transport accessibility, proximity to Canary Wharf and the ‘marketability’ of Greenwich. This
necessitates striking an appropriate balance between Greenwich’s various roles and utilizing or
moderating pressures for residential development. Protection of existing industrial uses, start up and
small business premises will continue to be important where they are viable and well utilized. On
the other hand there is a need to increase, modernize and diversify the business space available,
particularly for office and studio workshop-based activities including creative industries. See the West
Greenwich Development Framework (2000, to be updated in 2007/8).

TC10 The Council will safeguard A1 shopping facilities and encourage their development in Greenwich
Town Centre to meet the needs of residents, workers and visitors. Applications for change of
permitted use from retail (A1 or A2) to restaurants (A3) bars (A4), and take-aways (A5) will only
be permitted within defined shopping frontages in accordance with Policy TC18. In new
developments with prominent pedestrian frontages food and drink uses (A3, A4 & A5) should
form part of a balanced mix.

Reason
8.27 The range of shops in Greenwich barely meets the needs of local residents. Whilst the number of
restaurant, bar and take away facilities is more than sufficient (approximately 35 units, or 23% as at
2001, within core and fringe frontages alone), the Council wishes to manage the overall provision
of food and drink uses to secure a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer a good quality
evening dining. In accordance with flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for
restaurants that cater to this market, to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike. Significant
commercial development sites elsewhere in the town centre should include a reasonable balance
of uses.
8.28 Greenwich also experiences problems with un-permitted encroachment of snack-oriented A3
activity within A1 shops, and the Council will use its enforcement powers where appropriate. For
clarity it should be noted that A3 use applies to the use of a unit for the primary purpose of the
sale of food or beverages for consumption on the premises. Under the General Development
Order (1987 as revised) such activity is only allowable in A1 shops where it is functionally linked
with, and ancillary to, the main retail activity taking place.

TC11 Market development will be strictly controlled in Greenwich town centre to protect the
amenities of residents and the qualities of the Conservation Area.

Reason
8.29 Markets are a traditional part of the character of Greenwich town centre and a popular attraction
for visitors. However, poor management and their proliferation can cause environmental problems.
The Council will seek improvements in the management and facilities of the town centre’s markets
through the cooperation of landowners and stallholders.

162 TOWN CENTRES

TC12 The Council will seek to introduce traffic management, traffic restraints, bus priority and
pedestrian priority schemes to reduce the effects of through traffic on Greenwich town centre
and surrounding areas whilst improving convenience and safety for pedestrian, improving journey
times by public transport, and reducing pollution. Additional parking provision will be restricted
to an essential minimum.Waterfront Transit will be promoted and sought to serve the area.

Reason
8.30 Greenwich town centre suffers badly from congestion, pollution and vibration due to its position
astride a major traffic route.Although the lorry ban has improved the situation, heavy traffic volumes,
including coaches, still pose a threat to the structure of historic buildings, and to the health and safety
of residents, employees and visitors. See also Polices M20, M28 and M42.
8.31 Given improved public transport connections to the town centre and through the north of the
Borough, it is considered that visitors and commuters traveling by private vehicle should be
encouraged to use public transport, and therefore that road use priorities in the town centre should
prioritise pedestrians and those using more sustainable forms of transport.

Eltham Town Centre

TC13 The Council will support and promote Eltham as a vibrant community and cultural centre for
south Greenwich.

Reason
8.32 Eltham town centre would benefit from a more clearly defined social and cultural role to
complement and enhance its commercial strengths. The SRB5 South Greenwich programme will
provide opportunities to improve Eltham’s profile, positively address its image, and forge stronger
connections with its catchment area and communities.

TC14 The Council will seek to safeguard and improve the range of shopping, restaurant and leisure
facilities in Eltham, and will encourage the provision of facilities to take better commercial
advantage of its tourism potential.

Reason
8.33 Eltham is the Borough’s second largest but strongest retail centre for comparison or durable goods.
Vacancy rates are very low within the defined retail frontages (6% in 2001 compared to 11% in
1998), and A1 retail representation is stable at 60% (town centre surveys, 1998 and 2001, by
number of units).The Greenwich Retail Study (2002) confirms earlier research findings that Eltham is
under provided in food retailing. It also currently lacks adequate leisure and youth facilities in relation
to the area it serves. Provision of a new leisure centre is an objective in the Greenwich Strategy, and
planning permission has been granted for one on Site Schedule mu2. Eltham could take greater
advantage of its proximity to the Green Chain Walk and important visitor attractions including
Eltham Palace,Tudor Barn and Well Hall Pleasaunce.
8.34 The Council wishes to manage the overall provision of A3, A4 and A5 food and drink uses to secure
a greater choice of A3 seated restaurants that offer good quality evening dining. In accordance with
flexibility offered under Policy TC18 exceptions may be made for restaurants that cater to this
market, to benefit residents and the tourism economy alike.
8.35 Development opportunities have been identified in the Eltham Town Centre Development Guidelines,
1997, under review) and the Site Schedules (mu12, mu15), although scope for expansion in the
town centre is limited due to its close proximity to residential areas. In the event that the identified
Eltham sites prove unable to accommodate all the capacity identified, the preferred alternative

TOWN CENTRES 163

 location for additional supermarket floorspace in the south of the Borough is the new Local Centre
as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (See Policy H4).

TC15 The Council will support and promote measures for bus priority, to reduce traffic congestion,
and improve public and pedestrian safety and comfort in Eltham town centre, and will seek to
improve its streetscape and environmental quality.

Reason
8.36 Eltham suffers from heavy through traffic, and would benefit from further environmental
improvements in addition to the town centre square project for Passey Place (2000). As resources
permit, the Council will investigate traffic calming, parking controls, bus priority schemes, CCTV
installation, and streetscape improvements in partnership with the local community and the Eltham
Town Centre steering group.

DEVELOPMENT IN TOWN CENTRES

Key Town Centre Uses and the Sequential Approach
TC16 Town centres are the preferred location for retailing, leisure and other key town centre uses that
attract or serve the public including offices, hospitality, tourism and cultural facilities. These
activities will be permitted in town centres, providing the type and scale of development is
appropriate to the size and role of the centre in the Borough’s town centre hierarchy.
Retail or indoor leisure developments or extensions on edge-of-centre or out-of-centre sites will
only be acceptable where:
i. There is a need for the development;
ii. There are no sequentially preferable sites;
iii. The proposal would not demonstrably harm the vitality and viability of an existing shopping
centre, individually or cumulatively with recent or committed developments. Planning
conditions or legal agreements will be employed on new developments including
reconfigurations to minimize impacts on town centres.
iv. Proposals are, or will be made, conveniently accessible by a choice of modes of transport
including walking and cycling.
v. The proposal would not unacceptably impact on residential amenity, the environment, traffic
patterns or road congestion.
vi. Parking provision is consistent with the relevant standards and principles in Policies M23,
M24, M26 and M27.
Reconfiguration of existing out-of-centre retail and leisure floorspace will be considered against
Criteria (iii) – (vi).

Reason
8.37 The importance of supporting and enhancing town centres is emphasised in PPS6 Planning for Town
Centres and the London Plan. Town centres tend to be the focus of public transport networks,
offering affordable and sustainable access to a range of facilities and services for all sectors of the
community, reducing dependence on the private car.
8.38 Promoting and protecting diversity can contribute to the vitality and viability of town centres,
particularly those suffering from retail decline, by attracting additional customers, simplifying multi-
purpose trips, and extending trading opportunities into the evening and weekends.The nature and
extent of these uses will vary between centres, but would typically include some of the activities

164 TOWN CENTRES

 identified in the policy, falling within uses A2, A3, A4, A5, B1, C1, D1 and D2 of the Use Classes Order
(1987 as amended 2005).These activities can both benefit from and reinforce proximity to a healthy
retail sector, although other locations have also been identified as suitable for some of these uses
(see also Policy T1 for hotels, C1 for community facilities, and Policies J4, J7 and W3 for offices).
8.39 Town centres are generally underpinned by retailing, are thus vulnerable to out-of-centre retail
development.This policy will therefore apply to all retail uses including retail warehouses and other
formats open to the visiting public, unless the retail element is both ancillary and minor in terms of
both floorspace and especially turnover. See also Policy J8 for wholesale uses. Hybrid uses which
combine wholesale and retail activity will considered individually against the most relevant parts of
both policies. PPS6 Planning for Town Centres confirms that indoor leisure uses (Use Class D2) are
also subject to need assessment and the sequential approach.
8.40 Retail (and leisure) proposals at edge or out-of-centre locations must first demonstrate need. The
Greenwich Retail Study (Donaldsons 2002) examines retail provision, town centre performance and
shopping patterns in the Borough, to establish whether there is need for any additional retail
floorspace in the period to 2011.This Study is also specifically intended to serve as a capacity model
and baseline information source to be updated for any significant retail applications submitted during
the Plan period. It concludes that there is capacity underpinned by a need for regeneration for a
significant increase in both convenience and comparison shopping floorspace in the Woolwich
catchment, moderate capacity for both in the Eltham catchment, but limited capacity in the
Greenwich catchment (which includes Charlton and also Greenwich Peninsula, where planning
permission has been granted for approximately 31,000 sqm of additional retail floorspace within a
major mixed development including 10,010 new dwellings).The Retail Study Update (August 2005)
will also be material.
8.41 The Mixed Use Site Schedules identify a range of sites to accommodate new town centre retailing,
and there is also scope to provide a medium to large supermarket and other local retail facilities as
part of the Kidbrooke redevelopment (see Policy H4). In terms of retail warehousing, DIY was the
only sector where need was identified up to 2011, alongside overcapacity in some other sectors.
Reconfiguration of existing retail warehousing may help redress this imbalance e.g. on Site Schedule
mu29.
8.42 Given the conclusions of the Greenwich Retail Study and Update it is not envisaged that further
significant retail development will take place outside town centres in the Plan period. In the event
need can be established, proposals outside or on the edge of town centres must demonstrate that
there are no sequentially preferable sites available, taking a flexible approach to store formats in
relation to the sites available (see PPS6). For ‘top up’ convenience shopping an assessment of need
based on a demonstration that there is a local gap in provision of adequate top up shopping in
walking distance of the proposed site will be sufficient. Charlton Business Park (see Policy J3)
accommodates the borough’s main concentration of out-of-centre retailing and offers scope for
linked trips, and is thus preferable to other free-standing out-of-centre locations.
8.43 Planning conditions and/or legal agreements will be applied to out-of-centre retail planning
permissions to limit the range of goods sold, and to define a maximum floorspace permitted. In
defining a location as ‘out-’ or ‘edge-of-centre’, centre size, distance from defined core shopping
frontages and barriers to pedestrian movement will be relevant considerations.

TOWN CENTRES 165

 Protected Core, Fringe and Local Shopping Frontages
TC17 The Council will seek to protect the overall viability of town centres by designating Core
(Primary) and Fringe (Secondary) Shopping Frontages in major and district centres, and by
designating local centres in their entirety as Local Shopping Frontage. At ground floor level a
minimum of 70% of Core Frontage, and 50% of Fringe and Local Frontage, should be available for
A1 retail use.

Reason
8.44 The Council seeks to protect both retail activity and central areas within town centres where
retailing is the dominant use. In larger centres fringe areas complement core retail frontages by
providing locations for specialist shops and services which cannot afford core rents.This best serves
the interests of shoppers, and protects the long-term viability of town centres for retailing. Core,
fringe and local shopping frontages are identified on the proposals maps or in Table TC2.
8.45 The calculation of the percentage limits on non-A1 uses will be based on linear length of designated
shopping frontage. In district and local centres the calculation will be applied to the entire frontage
designated by core, fringe or local category. In major centres, it will be applied to an individual block
of frontage, relevant to the application site. This policy will also be applied to new units within
designated frontages, or where they form a logical extension to an existing frontage.
8.46 The 50% threshold in fringe and local frontages is intended to limit the loss of retail units in fringe
frontages and local centres, to protect retail choice, vitality and viability without unduly constraining
opportunities for an acceptable level of diversification.These thresholds reflect existing trends in the
Borough. A1 retail occupancy in core frontages of the Borough’s larger centres declined slightly from
72% to 66% between 1993 and 2001, while the level of non-retail facilities in the fringe has risen
from 31% to 45% (Council surveys, based on number of units).
8.47 Core frontages are not designated in Local Centres. Being smaller they tend to offer basic
convenience or ‘top up’ retailing and local services, rather than comparison shopping opportunities
for larger items. Retail (A1) representation across all local centres was 52% in 2001. In
Neighbourhood Parades retail representation may be low, and greater emphasis will be placed on
safeguarding essential local services (see Policy TC19).

Non-retail (A1) Uses in Protected Shopping Frontages

TC18 The Council will support the provision of a range of activity generating non retail uses in town
centres, including evening activities where environmentally appropriate, subject to the ground
floor retail thresholds set out in Policy TC17. Non retail proposals:
i. Should directly serve visiting members of the public, generate and not impede pedestrian
activity, and keep the shopping frontage active and viable;
ii. Should include the installation and retention of a display window of good design;
iii. Must not result in the loss of an occupied A1 retail unit where reasonable alternative
premises are available elsewhere in that centre;
iv. Will not be permitted if as a result breaks between occupied A1 premises exceed two units
in core frontages or three in fringe or local frontages; and
v. Will not be permitted if as a result either the Use Class category proposed or the combined
total of A3,A4 and A5 uses would occupy more than 25% of all designated frontage premises
within that centre

166 TOWN CENTRES

 Reason
8.48 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that encouraging a diverse range of Key Town Centre Uses
within town centres can enhance their vitality and viability.Through diversity town centres can better
meet the needs and aspirations of local communities, and provide a range of local employment. In
turn diversity is underpinned by a vital retail sector, which provides a focus of activity for other uses.
8.49 The policy applies limits to the extent and co-location of non-A1 uses to avoid the loss of a ‘critical
mass’ of retail activity in protected frontages. It is intended to avoid stretches of ‘dead’ frontage
lacking in pedestrian activity, and to avoid the fragmentation of retail areas, which could undermine
the centre as a whole.
8.50 Subject to other relevant policies, exceptions to retail safeguards may be made for community uses,
or where retail premises are vacant and cannot be let or sold for retailing, to facilitate transition to
more sustainable patterns of use. In such cases the general levels of vacancy in a centre or frontage
block, the letting history of the premises, and evidence of active and realistic marketing of the unit
for retailing will be relevant considerations. Exceptions may be made to criterion (iii)–(v) for A3
restaurants, particularly in Eltham and Greenwich (see Policies TC10 and TC14). Exceptional cases
must offer regular evening dining, and operators may be required to enter into a legal agreement to
ensure this remains the case.The Council will consider producing more detailed advice on food and
drink uses in a Supplementary Planning Document.

Essential local facilities in Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding premises

TC19 In considering proposals for Neighbourhood Parades and freestanding neighbourhood shops the
Council will seek to safeguard existing A1 retail uses and the provision of a minimum range of
essential local facilities including a general grocer, newsagent, post office, chemist, doctor and
dentist. Change of use in any such facility will be opposed if it would result in the loss without
replacement of a valued local service, or its loss would place the surrounding area more than 400
metres from the nearest alternative.

Reason
8.51 Local shops, social and health facilities within walking distance of residential areas are a valued
element of the social fabric and help to minimise social exclusion.They particularly benefit residents
without cars or with constrained mobility, who might otherwise be effectively deprived of the
services they provide. In determining applications for premises in neighbourhood parades or
freestanding local shops the Council will firstly seek to safeguard existing essential local services, as
defined in the policy. The second objective is to ensure the provision of any essential local service
not currently provided within a 400-metre radius.The third objective is to safeguard other existing
A1 retail uses. Changes to other environmentally suitable uses will be considered where premises
are vacant, and it can be demonstrated that there is no demand or market for the permitted use
or an alternative essential local service not currently represented. Evidence of active but unsuccessful
marketing on realistic terms will be relevant in such cases. Exceptions will be made for the loss of
health facilities as part of a managed modernisation programme (see Policy C2).

Arts, Cultural and Entertainment facilities

TC20 The Council will seek to retain premises for arts, cultural or entertainment activities for their
intended or an equivalent use, particularly purpose-built facilities of borough-wide significance,
providing their use does not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or traffic levels.

TOWN CENTRES 167

 Reason
8.52 The Greenwich Strategy seeks to promote improved access to, and facilities for, arts and cultural
use. The Policy seeks to prevent the loss of sites and premises for social, arts, cultural or
entertainment uses, providing such use is environmentally appropriate.These are of cumulative social
and recreational benefit to local communities, and can generate civic spirit, tourism, alternative
sources of employment, and other economic benefits. Such facilities are typically located in or near
town centres. See also Policy J9 for arts-related workspace.

Use of Premises Above Shops

TC21 The use of vacant or under-used floor space above shops for offices, community activities or
other Town Centre Uses will normally be permitted, except where:
i. It would result in the loss of reasonable residential accommodation with separate access;
ii. It would unacceptably harm the amenity of neighbouring residents; or
iii. Parking, site servicing and access arrangements are inadequate for the intended purpose.

Reason
8.53 There is a need to increase commercial viability, generate jobs and find premises for small business
and community uses in these locations. This needs to be balanced against the need to retain
residential accommodation as far as is practicable.

Town centre living

TC22 The Council will promote town centre living through supporting mixed use town centre
developments that contain a residential element above ground floor level. Residential conversion
of premises above shops, and vacant town centre buildings or parts of buildings outside
protected shopping frontages that cannot be let or sold for their permitted use, will normally be
acceptable, providing:
i. Premises in current office or community use are not lost (see Policies J5 and C2);
ii. Dwellings offer a good quality and secure living environment, incorporating where
appropriate measures to reduce to reasonable levels noise, vibration and other forms of
pollution; and
iii. Separate and secure access to residential areas is provided, and dwellings overlook public
areas wherever practical.

Reason
8.54 PPS6 Planning for Town Centres notes that increasing town centre population can make a contribution
to vitality and viability, foster development of the evening economy, and improve personal safety
outside normal business hours. Housing can also sustainably re use town centre buildings which are
vacant or no longer suited to their original purpose (see Policy H1), providing a good quality and
secure living environment can be created (see Policies D7 and E3). To ensure that offices are not
prematurely lost to housing, evidence of reasonable and active site marketing for the permitted use
will be required (see Policy J5). Affordable housing will be sought in developments providing 15 or
more dwellings (see Policy H14).
8.55 Due to the close proximity of shops and other facilities, town centre housing may particularly suit
the less mobile including wheelchair users, and provision of dwelling suited to their needs will be
encouraged wherever practical.Town centres also tend to be highly accessible by public transport,
and suitable for car free housing. In centres with good public transport access, parking provision

168 TOWN CENTRES

 other than for occupants with disabilities is considered unnecessary and undesirable. Access to on
street parking permits may be restricted by legal agreement, and commuted payments may be
sought to improve public transport (see Policies H19, M25, M26-M30).

URBAN ENVIRONMENT
8.56 Improving the quality of the built and natural environments of town centres is a policy priority.
Controlling congestion and pollution, and promoting quality in design, materials and the layout of
buildings and public space, will benefit residents, employees and customers by creating a more
pleasant, accessible, safe and efficient backdrop for retail and other activities.
8.57 The Design and Conservation and Environmental Protection chapters, and in particular Policies (D1-
D8, E1 and E2), sets out the Council’s detailed policies to achieve quality in urban design and to
safeguard and enhance the built, natural and historic environments. The supplementary policies
below seek to minimise adverse environmental impacts from retail and town centre activities,
enhance customer facilities, improve movement and improve servicing within town centres.

Environmental protection
TC23 Town centre developments will be required where necessary to install or implement appropriate
measures to control or mitigate to acceptable levels noise, vibrations, fumes and smells, dust,
refuse storage and litter, or other environmental impacts. Proposals will be refused where their
environmental impacts would unduly impact on the operation of local businesses or the amenity
of nearby residents.

Reason
8.58 The Council seeks to balance general support for commercial activities in town centres with the
need to safeguard and enhance their environment, comfort and appeal to benefit local residents,
customers, employees, and businesses.The Policy aims to prevent, minimise or mitigate unacceptable
environmental and amenity impacts (see also Policies E1 and E2), whilst acknowledging that
background levels of disturbance and/or pollution in town centres should reasonably be expected
to exceed those in ‘suburban’ areas.

Civic Spaces
TC24 Development proposals that would diminish the character and use of town centre civic spaces
will be resisted.

Reason
8.59 Civic spaces such as Cutty Sark Gardens (See The Cutty Sark Gardens Planning Brief, 2006), General
Gordon Square, Beresford Square, Dial Arch Square and Passey Place make a valuable contribution
to the character, townscape and activity of the Borough’s town centres.They provide a focal point
for day-to-day activities, and a venue for outdoor arts, cultural and entertainment events.

TOWN CENTRES 169

 Site Access, Servicing and Parking
TC25 Provision should be made for customer access, servicing and cycle parking in all significant new
town centre developments, including wherever feasible and appropriate drop off points, ramped
access and/or lifts for people with reduced mobility. Car parking requirements will be considered
in accordance with principles of traffic reduction, existing public parking and the standards in the
Movement Chapter. Recycling facilities should be provided in car parks of more than 200 spaces.

TC26 The Council will seek to improve delivery access, vehicle turning and waste storage
arrangements in existing shopping frontages when considering applications for new uses, and will
likewise expect safe and hygienic arrangements in new developments. It will look for
opportunities to remove conflicts between on street servicing and bus movements, and where
necessary to consider imposing restrictions on delivery hours.

Reason for Policies TC25 & TC26

8.60 The Council seeks to balance traffic reduction priorities with the need to improve the
environmental quality, safety, and accessibility within town centres. Excessive parking provision is a
waste of land and can encourage further car use. On the other hand, facilities and buildings should
be safely accessible to all, including people in wheelchairs, carers and parents with buggies, young
children and older people.The right balance will help to reduce car use overall whilst also reducing
illegal parking by customers and delivery vehicles. Such obstructions cause traffic congestion, disrupt
bus routes, and can create pedestrian hazards such as vehicular movements on footpaths. See
Policies M23-M35.

Markets and Car Boot Sales

TC27 Where planning permission is required, proposals for market stalls, new markets and or car boot
sales will be permitted unless they would unacceptably impact on:
i. Residential amenity, the character of a conservation area or setting of a listed building, or
on the natural environment;
ii. The usual use of the proposed site and the operation of permanent businesses located in
the vicinity;
iii. Pedestrian and highway safety, parking congestion or the flow of traffic especially public
transport.
Conditions may be imposed to control hours of operation and to ensure that adequate
arrangements are made for parking, servicing, storage, site restitution, and the disposal and/or
recycling of refuse.

Reason
8.61 Markets are a popular form of traditional retailing, and play an important role in Woolwich and
Greenwich town centres (see also Policy TC11).They provide a range of benefits and help to meet
local shopping needs, but can generate problems for the environment, residential amenity and other
local businesses. Car boot sales are an alternative retail form increasing in popularity, but one often
involving a significant intensification of use on open land, and high levels of car trip generation - often
very early in the morning. Council policy aims to protect nearby residents and businesses, as well as
customers, by controlling, minimizing or mitigating potential environmental problems, especially noise
at antisocial hours and litter, and potential traffic and parking congestion, especially in residential
streets. It also seeks to ensure temporarily occupied sites remain fit for their usual purpose.

170 TOWN CENTRES

8.62 Under the General Permitted Development Order (1995) Part 4 Class B, markets and car boot
sales may operate without the need for planning permission for up to 14 days in any calendar year
unless there is an Article 4 Direction in force (removing General Permitted Development rights), or
unless the land in question is a building or is in within the curtilage of a building. In effect this means
that planning permission will always be required unless the site is on undeveloped land, that is land
with no associated buildings or with no permitted or established use (for the avoidance of doubt
car parking and playing fields constitute development).

Hot food take-away outlets including drive-through restaurants

TC28 Town Centres and Neighbourhood Parades are the preferred location for hot food take-away
establishments including drive-through restaurants (Use Class A5). Hot food take-aways will be
permitted providing:
i. The proposed use and the level of activity it generates is appropriate in the location
proposed, and would not unacceptably impact on residential or workplace amenity, nor on
the environment or the character of the area;
ii. Customer visits by car would not unacceptably impact on existing or proposed public
transport provision, traffic movements, road or pedestrian safety; and
iii. The proposal complies with applicable retail frontage policies and does not jeopardize the
provision of an essential local service (see Policies TC17-TC19).
iv. Proposals outside Major, District and Local centres predicated on serving a wider than
‘walk-in’ catchment demonstrate that:- they serve a need not generally met by existing
facilities, that there are no sequentially preferable sites available and that they are
conveniently and safely accessible by public transport as well as by cycle and on foot.

Reason
8.63 Hot food take away premises fall within Use Class A5. They often attract significant numbers of
customers, and are also commonly associated with environmental and amenity problems such as
litter, waste disposal, fumes, late night noise and traffic. For this reason they are best located in town
centres in accordance with the sequential approach and due to their potential for linked trips to
local shops, and because background activity levels are usually higher. Hot food uses will need to be
designed and sited with additional care in areas of special character.
8.64 The number of premises in designated centres and parades in food and drink use (A3, A4 and A5)
increased from 15% to 18% between 1993 and 1998, creating pressures on premises in other uses.
It has since dropped back to 16% in 2001.The overall level of food and drink use (including A5 take-
aways) in any centre will be limited by policies for core, fringe and local frontages (TC17 and TC18).
These apply a maximum threshold of 25% of premises for all food and drink uses to safeguard
retailing and ensure a reasonable mix of facilities are available to local residents.
8.65 Safeguards on amenity and the environment are set out in Policy TC23 (see also E1), and in relation
to hot food uses can normally be mitigated by installation of suitable ducting and waste storage
facilities, and restrictions on opening hours. Additional safeguards may be sought in relation to
parking and traffic issues to reduce problems arising from illegal short term parking by customers.
This can unacceptably reduce safety and increase congestion by impeding traffic, bus movements,
cyclist and pedestrians.

TOWN CENTRES 171

 Retail facilities in Petrol Stations
TC29 The Council will normally permit forecourt retailing in Major, District and Local Centres, and in
Neighbourhood Parades on sites abutting or within the existing shopping parade, providing:
i. The proposal will not unacceptably impact on public transport operations, traffic levels,
traffic congestion or highway safety;
ii. The proposal will not unacceptably impact on residential amenity or the environment;
iii. The shop is safely and conveniently accessible to pedestrians and cyclists; and
iv. Dedicated parking is provided for shop customers without obstructing the forecourt, site
servicing or other on-site activities.
v. On sites outside defined retail centres and parades, forecourt retail (Use Class A1)
floorspace shall not exceed 150 m2 (net) unless the proposal meets a demonstrable local
need not served by existing local convenience shops, and it is demonstrated that there are
no sequentially preferable sites available sufficient to accommodate the retail element on a
stand alone basis.

Reason
8.66 The Council seeks to maintain and support the existing network of town centres and shopping
parades by focusing new retail investment within such locations, in accordance with Guidance in
PPG1, PPS6 and PPG13.These are defined on the Proposals and Inset Maps, or in Tables TC2 and
TC3. The policy supports forecourt-retailing proposals where they contribute to the vitality and
viability of town centres, and opposes them in out-of-centre locations where they do not.
8.67 Recent changes in filling station operations have seen retail functions expand from ancillary to
general retailing, often including a small supermarket. Accordingly considerations such as need and
the sequential approach are applicable. In this respect the Council has defined ‘ancillary’ as less than
150 m2 net floorspace, as above this figure it is considered that the retail function is a use in its own
right, is comparable to ‘stand alone’ retail units being twice the size of a typical cornershop, and will
therefore generate shopping trips in its own right. Policy TC16 and its Reasons provide further
advice on need and sequential testing. Paragraph 8.42 notes that the test of need for small
convenience shopping proposals will take account of gaps in local provision.
8.68 The Policy will be interpreted more strictly where proposals would adversely affect Neighbourhood
Parades, where existing shops tend to be much smaller than 150 m2. Whereas competition within
the parade is acceptable, retail development on a site that is not abutting or wholly within it could
undermine the parade by functioning as a rival destination and overwhelming existing convenience
stores. Other local shops and services that rely on customers attracted to existing convenience
shops in the parade then become vulnerable. Major, District and Local Centres are less vulnerable
to competition from forecourt retail premises by virtue of their existing size and range of retailing.

172 TOWN CENTRES

 TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1

Name Street Numbers

District Centres
1 Blackheath Blackheath Village Core: 1 - 13 (odd)
(Mostly in LB Lewisham) Fringe: 15-19 (odd)
Lee Road Fringe: 1-17 (odd)

2 East Greenwich Trafalgar Road Core: 142 - 232 (even),

155 - 177 & 187 - 213 (odd)
Fringe: 92 - 110 (even),
71 - 153 & 179 - 183 (odd)
Woolwich Road Fringe: 1 - 39 & 47 - 53 (odd)

3 Greenwich See Proposals Inset Map

4 Lee Green Lee Road Fringe: 121 - 167 (odd)

(Mostly in LB Lewisham) Eltham Road Fringe: 1-7 (odd)

5 Plumstead High Street
Plumstead High Street
Lakedale Road
Core: 100 - 118A & 126 - 156 (even)
97 - 119 (odd)
Fringe: 2 - 32 & 44 - 98C (even)
63A - 79 & 137 - 139 (odd)
Core: 2A - 14 & 18 - 30 (even)
13 - 33 (odd)
Fringe: 35 - 57 (odd)

6. Thamesmead Twin Tumps Way Core: western side (Cannon Retail Park)
Joyce Dawson Way Core: 2 – 4b (even)
1 – 5 (odd)
Fringe: 6b – 20 (even)
7-21 (odd)
Aldi, site between Aldi & Core
Iceland, Safeway superstore Core

TOWN CENTRES 173

 TABLE TC2: DISTRICT AND LOCAL CENTRES SHOPPING FRONTAGES1 continued

Name Street Numbers

Local Centre Frontages (no core/fringe)

1 Blackheath Hill Blackheath Hill Odd: 1 - 13. Even: 2a - 6
Greenwich South Street Odd: 125 - 143
Lewisham Road Odd: 1 - 33

2 Charlton Village The Village Odd: 1- 45. Even: 2-32

3 Herbert Road Herbert Road Odd: 1 - 43. Even: 2a - 74

Plumstead Common Even: 24, 34 - 44. Odd: 57, 59 - 71
Sandy Hill Road Even: 150 - 158

4 Mottingham Court Road Odd: 275 - 281. Even: 276 - 288

(mostly in LB Bromley) Mottingham Road Odd: 77 - 93

5 New Eltham Footscray Road Odd: 369 - 401, 405 - 413

Even: 336 - 380, 396-404
Station Approach All: 1-5

6 Royal Standard Old Dover Road Odd: 5 - 15. Even: 2 - 26

Stratheden Parade All: 1-17
Vanbrugh Park Odd: 43a. Even: 44 - 48
Westcombe Hill Even: 156 - 192

7 Well Hall Odeon Parade All: 1 - 5

Tudor Parade All: 1 - 16
Well Hall Parade All: 12 - 20
Well Hall Road Odd: 53 - 69. Even: 134 - 170
Notes to Table TC2
1. Additional local centres are likely to be provided as part of Gallions Urban Village (outline planning permission),
and as part of the Kidbrooke Development Area (see Policy H4).

174 TOWN CENTRES

 TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES

Name Street Numbers

1 Abbey Wood Wilton Road Odd: 1 - 21

Abbey Wood Road 183, 185, 185a

2 Avery Hill Avery Hill Road Odd: 61 - 81. Even: 38-40 (PFS), 42 - 48

3 Bexley Road Bexley Road Even: 150 - 198

4 Brewery Road Brewery Road Odd: 1 - 15, 15a. Even: 2, 2a, 2b

Waverly Road (corner) Odd: 23 - 25

5 Charlton Church Lane Charlton Church Lane Odd: 25 - 47. Even: 10 - 12, 22, 44 - 74a

6 Charlton Road Charlton Road Odd: 211 - 229. Even: 58 - 60, 64 - 78

7 Conway Road Conway Road Odd: 11 - 13. Even: 12 - 28

8 Court Road Court Road Even: 188 - 200.

9 Eltham Common Well Hall Road Odd: 369 - 379. Even: 416, 416a - 436, 436a

10 Eynsham Drive Eynsham Drive Even: 164 - 178, 184 (cnr Penmon Road)

11 Fiveways Southwood Road Odd: 129 - 139, 143 (cnr Sidcup Road)
Sidcup Road Odd: 731 - 753. Even: 728(PFS),
Crossways PH, 740 - 758.

12 Hill Reach Hillreach 50, 52, 55, 56, 58 (PO), Woodman PH

13 Holbourne Rd Holbourne Rd Odd: 201, 203

Whetstone Road Odd: 91 - 95, 107, 109

14 Humber Road Humber Road Odd: 103 - 115

Station Crescent Odd: 1 - 7, 11. Even: 2 - 4

15 Kidbrooke Rochester Way Even: 122 - 144

16 Kingsman Parade Kingsman Parade Even: 2 - 16, Greyhound PH

17 Leslie Smith Square Leslie Smith Square All: 1-7

18 McLeod Road McLeod Road Even: 70 - 84, 106 - 116

19 Middle Park Newmarket Green All: 1 - 17

20 The Mound The Mound All: 1 - 13

William Barefoot Road Even: 72 - 74, 96 - 102, 120 - 122

TOWN CENTRES 175

 TABLE TC3: PREMISES IN NEIGHBOURHOOD PARADES continued

Name Street Numbers

21 Plumstead Common Plumstead Common Road Odd: 117 - 129, 183 - 203
Even: 122a - 158, 160 - 168, 182, 196 - 212

22 Royal Hill Royal Hill Even: 18-26,46,52-56, 66, 70, 72, 76, 80,86-94

23 Shooters Hill Shooters Hill Road Even: 170 - 202

24 The Slade The Slade All: 1 - 10

25 Southend Crescent Eltham High Street Odd: 251 - 279

26 Swingate Lane Swingate Lane Odd: 141 - 155

27 Teleman Square Teleman Square All: 11 - 31

28 Waterdale Road Wickham Lane Odd: 239 - 245, 251 - 263

Kings Highway 79 (NW corner), 94 (superstore)

29 Westhorne Avenue Westhorne Avenue Even: 546 - 562

30 Westmount Road Westmount Road Odd: 95 - 101b. Even: 92 - 132, 142 - 152

31 Wickham Lane Plumstead High Street Odd: 293 - 317.

Wickham Lane Odd: 1 - 13, 25 - 27. Even: 2a (PFS)

32 Woolwich Road Woolwich Road Odd: 117 - 133. Even: 8, 22 - 46

176 TOWN CENTRES

 9. TOURISM
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
9.1 The Plan promotes the protection of the concentration of tourism activities around key sites,
particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich Town Centre, and the expansion of tourism in the Borough.
The general policies for Tourism are:

ST1 The Council supports and promotes tourism, recognising that it has a positive and significant role
to play in securing the economic and environmental regeneration of the Borough particularly in
the Waterfront areas.

ST2 To promote the provision of facilities for tourists in appropriate locations, subject to the need
to:
i. protect the housing stock, the amenities of the local community and the environment of the
Borough;
ii. ensure that tourism is managed to provide benefits for local communities and businesses;
iii. diversify the tourism base of the Borough’s economy by seeking facilities which embrace a
wide range of arts, culture, sporting and entertainment activities for participation and
enjoyment by all sections of the community; and
iv. that major tourist facilities are well served by public transport.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

9.2 PPG21 Tourism (1992) and the London Plan (2004) stress the benefits of tourism and the need to
ensure that tourism is sustainable.The latter supports the diversification of tourism across London
and that the benefits are dispersed, and recognises Greenwich Riverside as a Strategic Cultural Area.
PPS6: Planning for Town Centres (2005) and Policy TC16 promote retail, leisure and other key town
centre uses which attract large numbers of people to locate within the Town Centres. The
Greenwich Strategy aims to reinforce Greenwich as a world renowned and welcoming tourist
destination, making the most of historic heritage, ancient woodlands, the riverside locations and
creative potential.The Borough’s Tourism Strategy for 2004-2010 ‘Greenwich: A Place to Visit?’, both
interacts with the UDP and aims to focus tourism delivery agencies towards achieving a sustainable
tourism economy.
9.3 The policies in the UDP welcome tourism in appropriate locations and support the provision of
hotels and conference centres in the light of the general shortage of hotel space in an area that has
many high profile tourist attractions.The Council wishes to attract new hotel developments, in order
to assist the local economy and increase the number and variety of jobs available locally.
9.4 Greenwich is undergoing great change as its maritime, industrial and military heritage is consolidated
with new roles in providing sustainable communities, modern businesses, education, culture and
tourism sectors. The choice of the Peninsula for the Millennium celebrations brought the Borough
international status that is being drawn upon and channelled further into the local economies and
communities.
9.5 In addition to the new development around the Peninsula, the Borough continues to capitalise upon
its many historical assets, principally the National Maritime Museum, Cutty Sark, Old Royal
Observatory and former Royal Naval College.Visitors come to see the royal, architectural, scientific

TOURISM 177
 and nautical legacy that has made Greenwich a site of World Heritage Importance. Other
attractions including Eltham Palace, Charlton House, the Royal Arsenal, Thames Barrier and the
Green Chain network of open spaces.
9.6 The concentration of tourism activities around key sites, particularly in the vicinity of Greenwich
Town Centre, has caused problems associated with traffic congestion and erosion of the
environment.With 6.9 million visitors to the Borough in 2001, (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism
Strategy 2004-2010) these issues must be addressed, if those attracted to Greenwich are to be
encouraged to lengthen their stay.The current level of spending per visitor is low; with a key factor
being the under supply of visitor accommodation. Greenwich has an average of 3,500 serviced and
non-serviced bedspaces available year round, however this includes seasonal University
accommodation and a caravan park (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010).
Since 2000, the number of graded bed and breakfast spaces has fallen by approximately 5% and
there is a shortage of specialist types of business tourism facilities.
9.7 The full benefits of this growth can be achieved as a result of inward investment into the Borough.
The connection of Greenwich Town Centre to the DLR and to the underground network at
Greenwich Peninsula has provided stronger links between the Borough and Central London. The
development of a Waterfront Transit link complements the picture, by linking areas across the
Borough by a sustainable transport mode. Skill shortages and training needs have and continue to
be met through training schemes, educational establishments and the Greenwich Local Labour and
Business initiative. In addition, efforts must be made to use the Borough’s strengths and take
advantage of the opportunities available, including linking waterfront sites through design,
environmental improvements, walkways, cycleways and improved public transport, promoting the
World Heritage Site Status of Greenwich and seeking development of tourism support industries.

Policies
Location and Criteria
T1 The Council will welcome proposals for major tourism development including hotels (over 10
bed spaces), conference facilities or interactive attractions in town centres, within areas listed in
the Mixed Use Schedules and in identified Waterfront locations with good public transport
access (Policy W3). Such development will need to satisfy the following criteria:
i. a high standard of design which complies with the policies contained in the Design and
Conservation and Waterfront Chapters;
ii. that parking, cycling and (where relevant) coach facilities be provided on site to accord with
Policies M23, M26, M27, M32, M40 and M41;
iii. that the level of traffic generated by the development will not adversely impact on the
surrounding environment (especially air quality) or on traffic congestion or bus services;
iv. that there will be no significant harm to the amenity of neighbouring residents and land
users, particularly as a result of noise or disturbance. See also Policies E1 to E3 and E5 to
E7;
v. that all aspects of the development are accessible to those with sensory or mobility
impairments;

178 TOURISM
 vi. that facilities associated with the development, such as hotel leisure facilities, can be used by
local residents and businesses;
vii. that planning agreements are used as appropriate to secure community and workplace
benefits, in accordance with Policy SC2; and
viii. that where development is proposed on sites adjacent to the River Thames or Deptford
Creek, the Council will seek to ensure that the development uses the river for visitor
transport.

Reason
9.8 Tourism development in the past has tended to be opportunistic rather than planned. This has
resulted in the Borough experiencing many of the environmental problems associated with intensive
tourism related uses whilst receiving few of the benefits. The sequential approach towards major
tourist development, will help to structure future provision, and focus the efforts of the Council, in
actively promoting major tourist development e.g. hotels and visitor attractions in the Borough. In
meeting the demand for accommodation in particular, and securing economic benefits for local
people, the identification of sites for tourism development will also help avoid piecemeal
development, enabling them to be co-ordinated with other areas of economic regeneration,
particularly on the Waterfront (see Policy SW1).
9.9 This approach has a number of advantages; it raises the profile of the area, encourages
environmental improvements and induces investment, facilitates links between attractions,
encourages joint marketing and provides a strong base for facilities serving the tourist market,
particularly shops, hotels and restaurants.
9.10 The Council has prepared a guide of Hotel Sites for the Millennium, as part of its commitment
towards encouraging tourism development within the Borough. It is necessary to assess major hotel
development against criteria as listed above, encouraging sensitive location for what can often
constitute an intensive form of land use and can create severe environmental problems in
surrounding areas if the implications are not fully explored.The Council will continue to review the
need for hotel sites and to identify further suitable locations in future planning briefs.
9.11 Where major tourist development, including hotels and associated ancillary visitor facilities provide
sport and recreation, or other leisure facilities, the Council will seek to secure public access to them,
thus ensuring the optimum use of the site. The use of the River Thames and Deptford Creek for
tourism is supported. Tourism related developments adjacent the Borough’s waterways will be
encouraged to make use of the river wherever possible, be it through design, the siting of buildings
and activity or the use of the river itself.
9.12 Most major tourist developments will provide benefits such as leisure facilities or job opportunities,
although these may not necessarily meet the needs of the community. In trying to maximise the
benefits of such developments towards the community and to avoid any problems arising from new
development the Council will use planning agreements. In particular developers of major tourist
developments will be expected to use Greenwich Local Labour and Business (Policy J14).

Small Hotels, Bed and Breakfast Accommodation and Guesthouses

T2 The Council will give favourable consideration to the development and extension of small hotels
(up to 10 bed-spaces), bed and breakfast accommodation and guesthouses including permitting
conversions of buildings from other uses providing that the following criteria are fulfilled:
i. The site is close to existing public transport facilities.
ii. Criteria i. to v. in Policy T1 are complied with.

TOURISM 179
 Reason
9.13 Over the plan period Greenwich will have established a number of hotels, and other forms of visitor
accommodation that need to be safeguarded for their contribution to the Borough wide tourism
strategy and to meeting local needs. According to the London Plan (2004), a further 36,000 hotel
rooms should be provided in the period up to 2016 and in particular, there is an identifiable
shortage of ‘value for money’ hotel accommodation. It is not envisaged that this demand could be
fully met through the construction of new hotels. The Borough is home to a range of
accommodation and whilst it has a reputation of good value accommodation for the independent
traveller, there is limited group accommodation provision.The ability to promote Greenwich as an
overnight tourist destination or as an alternative place to stay as part of a London visit is undermined
by a shortage of hotel stock (Greenwich: A Place to Visit? Tourism Strategy 2004-2010). Conversions
should, however, be strictly controlled to ensure that they do not have a negative impact on
adjoining areas, particularly residential areas.

Diversification
T3 The Council will seek to diversify the tourism base of the Borough by encouraging the provision
of a range of tourist facilities and ensuring that a geographical spread of sites are available for
good quality tourism development.

Reason
9.14 This approach seeks to upgrade the quality and diversity of tourism development and by doing so
to improve the quality of tourism related employment available to local people across the Borough
and provide key elements of the local business infrastructure. Diversification of tourism within the
Borough should include developing facilities for conferences, exhibitions and other high revenue
generating developments. The Council has prepared a Cultural Strategy and a Tourism Strategy
which address the need to diversify tourism in the Borough.
9.15 Through managing tourism activities and promoting the attractions found wider afield within the
Borough such as Eltham Palace, Well Hall Pleasaunce, Charlton House and Oxleas Woods, the
benefits of tourism can be dispersed and built upon. It is through this diversification of the tourism
product found in Greenwich that a more sustainable tourism economy could be developed, with
visitors being actively encouraged to lengthen their stay, thus increasing their level of spending.
9.16 In Greenwich Town Centre future effort and resources will be concentrated on improving existing
facilities and relieving congestion. Significant improvements have resulted from the development of
the DLR into Greenwich town centre. Deptford Creek is an area for focused tourism, cultural and
creative development contributing to mixed use policies and wider regeneration (see London Plan,
2004). In Woolwich, the emphasis will be on providing basic tourist infrastructure to establish a
secondary focus for the development of tourism in the Borough. The Royal Arsenal, including the
Firepower Museum and the Greenwich Heritage Centre, has the potential to be a tourism focus for
Woolwich - the variety of buildings, quality of architecture and accessible location lends this site to
development that incorporates tourism facilities. Future tourism development in Eltham Town
Centre should be geared towards providing ancillary facilities serving tourist attractions such as
Eltham Palace in the Eltham area as a whole.

Camping and Caravanning

T4 The Council will seek to provide additional, and protect existing, facilities for camping and
caravanning in the Borough.

180 TOURISM
 Reason
9.17 The existing camping and caravanning site at the Abbey Wood Caravan Club is well used. Camping
and caravanning facilities also help to meet the need for budget accommodation.

TOURISM 181
182 TOURISM
 10. WATERFRONT
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
10.1 The Greenwich Waterfront area stretches from Deptford to Thamesmead, including all land to the
north of the North Kent railway line (see Map 12). It is an area of strategic importance benefiting
from improved transport connections to the West End, Canary Wharf and the Square Mile, other
parts of London and the South East.
10.2 The Waterfront Chapter aims to deliver national and regional planning objectives for sustainable land
use by facilitating the regeneration of large tracts of previously derelict land, set within areas of high
heritage value and thriving residential communities. The policies aim to achieve the right balance
between development, conservation, and community interests to deliver lasting community benefits.

SW1 The Council will facilitate the redevelopment and re-use of remaining redundant land and
buildings in the Waterfront during the Plan period, bringing about the regeneration of the whole
area and realising its economic, social, environmental, cultural and recreational potential, to
secure the sustainable development of balanced waterfront communities.

SW2 The Council recognises and will seek to enhance the value of the River Thames and Deptford
Creek as waterways rich in biodiversity and environmental quality; as Open Spaces, and an
essential part of the Borough’s character and landscape in their own right.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

10.3 The Waterfront is an area of rich diversity. Parts of the Riverside display a distinguished natural and
historical heritage, including the Woolwich Royal Arsenal, majestic buildings like the former Royal
Naval College, National Maritime Museum and the Royal Observatory in the Maritime Greenwich
World Heritage Site, and strategic open spaces such as Greenwich Park.
10.4 The Waterfront is also an area of dynamic change. Major new development and infrastructure
projects contrast with the legacy of dereliction and low investment when the previous Development
Plan was adopted.These include the Millennium Dome, the Jubilee Line and DLR extensions, which
have generated renewed interest and act as a catalyst for further change. The Waterfront also
contains numerous tightly knit residential areas, many dating back to the mid-19th century, and their
intimate scale and character contrast with the Riverside industrial buildings and open spaces. Despite
the changes underway, some still suffer from a poor environment and inadequate community
facilities. However, a range of regeneration initiatives are underway to capitalise and build on the
Borough’s improved profile and infrastructure, to improve the quality of life and opportunities for
local residents.
10.5 The Greenwich Strategy encourages more cultural activity in the Borough, promotes the Waterfront
Area as a transport route, for recreation and leisure, whilst protecting and enhancing their natural
habitats. The characteristics of the principal communities in the Waterfront Area and the
development issues for their localities are set out below.

The River Thames

10.6 The River Thames is a major linear open space that frames some of the Borough’s key historic
buildings. It is a waterway rich in biodiversity, a transport route, and an archaeological and
recreational resource.The Borough contains 14 kilometres of fully tidal river frontage, most of that
will be accessible to the public from the Riverside Walk. The Borough has 6 wharves currently

WATERFRONT 183
 Map 12: Waterfront Area
© Crown copyright

Waterfront Area

184 WATERFRONT
 reserved for cargo-handling use under Safeguarding Direction and two deepwater mooring sites,
near the mouth of Deptford Creek and at Victoria Deep Water Terminal on the west side of
Greenwich Peninsula. Downstream from Deptford Creek the waterfront is undergoing considerable
development, and as far as Woolwich contains large areas that are predominately industrial in
character.
10.7 The London Plan (2004) defines a Blue Ribbon Network that includes the Thames and London’s
other rivers, canals, streams and open water spaces.The Blue Ribbon Network recognises the special
character of river and canal corridors as both a strategic and a scarce resource, and addresses the
competing needs, uses and demands that are placed upon them.

Deptford Creekside
10.8 Deptford Creekside lies to the west of Greenwich Town Centre, and straddles the Borough
boundary with Lewisham. It is an area with a significant maritime heritage, containing local authority
housing estates and a variety of small scale commercial and industrial uses. It is benefiting from
ongoing programmes of environmental improvement and housing estate refurbishment. This will
include the demolition of the New Haddo Estate, and its replacement with a mixture of private and
affordable flats and family homes. It is also an emerging node for cultural and creative industries as
exemplified by the Laban Centre for contemporary dance in the neighbouring Lewisham Borough.
The London Plan identifies Deptford Creek~Greenwich Riverside as an Opportunity Area.
10.9 Deptford Creek is experiencing considerable development pressure. Significant recent projects
include a major new residential development on the Western Reach at the mouth of Deptford
Creek.There is also heightened interest in a number other sites around Deptford Creek. In response
the Council has adopted the West Greenwich Development Framework (2000), incorporating the
Creek area and the western end of Greenwich town centre, as Supplementary Planning Guidance.
The Framework seeks to ensure that emerging opportunities for the arts, commercial, cultural and
creative enterprise are harnessed to further regenerate the area and benefit local communities. It
also seeks to further improve public access between Greenwich Town Centre, Deptford Creek and
the Thames, to improve public transport, and to upgrade community facilities and open spaces. It is
intended to update the framework in 2007/8 possibly with Lewisham Council.

Greenwich Town Centre

10.10 Greenwich Town Centre is a World Heritage Site and a key visitor destination for London.The town
is rich in local history and famous for its historic buildings and monuments. It suffers from traffic
congestion caused by through traffic and visitors, despite a permanent ban on heavy goods vehicles.
10.11 Development in the Creekside area will extend both the size of Greenwich Town Centre and its
range of facilities.The former Royal Naval College and Dreadnought Seaman’s Hospital have been
refurbished as visitor attractions and for use by Greenwich University, and the town centre also
benefits from the Trinity School of Music and the refurbished Cutty Sark Gardens. The extended
Docklands Light Railway is encouraging further investment, and has improved accessibility by linking
the Town Centre with Docklands, Central London, and Lewisham without adding to road traffic. As
part of the DLR project a mixed-use development has brought an improved range of retail and
leisure opportunities to the Town Centre at Cutty Sark station.The proposed Waterfront Transit 2nd
Phase would improve public transport links with other town centres and waterfront visitor
attractions in the Borough.

East Greenwich Riverside

10.12 The East Greenwich Riverside comprises two distinct areas.To the north, on the west of Greenwich
Peninsula, lies a Defined Industrial Area occupied by two of the Borough’s largest industrial

WATERFRONT 185
 employers, Alcatel and Amylum, amongst others. It includes the safeguarded Victoria Deep Water
Terminal, which is expected to remain in use for river-based freight.
10.13 To the south of the industrial area, encompassing land between the Thames and East Greenwich
district centre, East Greenwich Riverside displays a mixed, yet traditional working environment. It has
strong community ties and contains picturesque cottages, old Riverside industrial structures, and
buildings of historic importance. Lovell’s and Granite Wharves, which are either under-used or used
for activities that generate problems for surrounding residential areas, have been designated for
employment-led redevelopment. Part of Badcock’s wharf is operating as a boat repair yard.

Greenwich Peninsula and the Millennium Dome

10.14 The Peninsula is the largest and most important development area in the Borough, and is home to
the flagship Millennium Dome and Millennium Village.The Village is providing over 3,000 new homes,
and a new school and health centre have been built.Associated with the development are new retail
and leisure facilities, public spaces and a Thameside promenade. The Peninsula is served by major
investments in public transport, in particular the Jubilee Line underground station at North
Greenwich, which have improved access to the Peninsula from elsewhere in the Borough and from
London as a whole.The London Plan recognises the Greenwich Peninsula as an Opportunity Area
and the Millennium Village as an example of a new brownfield site urban village development based
on a new public transport interchange, applying the principles of Sustainable Residential Quality and
urban intensification. The potential of the area will be enhanced by the radically improved public
transport networks proposed in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001). The Greenwich Peninsula
Development Framework (2002, under review) sets out a vision and plans for future development
over the next 15 to 20 years.
10.15 A Masterplan for the future of the Peninsula has been granted outline planning permission (the MDL
Masterplan).The Masterplan envisages a new urban quarter based on the principles of sustainable
mixed use, high-density environmental quality. The development will bring significant regeneration
benefits to the Borough and the wider Thames Gateway region. The Dome will become a multi-
purpose entertainment and sports facility and provide large-scale conference capacity. The urban
quarter will provide 10,010 new homes, office, retail and light industrial uses, hotel and community
uses including schools and health care provision. It is expected that the development will be
completed by the early 2020’s.

Charlton Riverside and The Thames Barrier

10.16 The Angerstein Wharf area at Bugsby’s Reach, as defined on the Proposals Map, is a Designated
Aggregates Zone. This includes Angerstein and Murphy’s Wharves, which are protected by a
Safeguarding Direction.The area also benefits from a railhead (see Policy J2).The Council encourages
this area be used more intensively for aggregate production, to take full advantage of its potential
for river and rail for transport of raw and finished products. This also relieves wharves in less
appropriate locations, which whilst currently still safeguarded are proposed for de-safeguarding for
alternative uses by the Mayor.
10.17 The majority of the Charlton riverside area east of the Aggregates Zone is within a Defined
Industrial Area, also designated a Preferred Industrial Location the London Plan. It benefits from
improved accessibility following the Woolwich Road widening, and is generally well separated from
residential neighbourhoods. Regeneration funding is also available for industrial activities and other
improvements (see Chapter 2 Jobs and the Local Economy). It will therefore be protected from land
speculation pressures and safeguarded for long-term business/industrial use, to provide local
employment opportunities and business locations. Continued modernisation and improvements to
its commercial building stock would be welcome.

186 WATERFRONT
10.18 Charlton Business Park is within a Strategic Employment Location identified in the London Plan. It
is a mixed business location and a preferred location for light industry, distributive, and wholesale
trade uses.
10.19 The Charlton Riverside is also home to Riverside Wharf (Safeguarded) and the Thames Barrier, an
important landmark and tourist attraction. The approach to the Barrier has benefited from a
programme of landscaping and environmental improvements, enhancing links to the Green Chain
Walk. It offers scope for employment-based diversification including provision of ancillary local
service facilities for both business and visitor markets.

Woolwich Town Centre and Woolwich Royal Arsenal

10.20 Woolwich contains the Borough’s largest concentration of retail, community and commercial office
activities. Woolwich is identified as being an Area for Intensification in the London Plan and is
undergoing unprecedented change and renewal. The town centre will be complemented by
development of a heritage tourism and leisure quarter on the waterfront in the Royal Arsenal and
adjoining land.The Arsenal is a unique part of Britain’s industrial and military heritage.This, and the
adjoining proposed mixed-use Warren Lane ‘Teardrop’ site (Site Schedule mu13) will substantially
consolidate and diversify the Town Centre, complementing the range of uses in line with the
Woolwich Town Centre Development Framework (1996 & updates; under review).
10.21 During the Plan period the Waterfront Transit will connect Woolwich to other waterfront attractions
and town centres, and to the Jubilee Line. Phase 2 is proposed to extend Transit to the DLR at
Greenwich.The Council also supports the proposed DLR extension from City Airport to Woolwich
opening 2009. These projects are supported in the Mayor’s Transport Strategy (2001) and in the
London Plan.

Thamesmead
10.22 While the rest of the Waterfront area is a mixture of established communities and town centres
and former and existing industrial areas, Thamesmead is a relatively new community undergoing
rapid redevelopment. It is projected that 3,000 new homes and accompanying facilities will be
completed in Thamesmead between 2003 and 2016, including the major new Urban Village at
Gallion’s Reach and a new urban quarter at Tripcock Point.The London Plan identifies Thamesmead
as an Opportunity Area and provides for a range of transport infrastructure works improving
accessibility to the wider Thames Gateway. These include the Waterfront Transit scheme and the
Thames Gateway (Gallions Reach) Bridge.The latter will have segregated public transport lanes to
connect the proposed Greenwich Waterfront and East London Transit schemes.

Policies
10.23 The Waterfront Area is defined on Map 12, and the Sites Schedules identify appropriate uses for
the main waterfront opportunity sites. Waterfront schemes will be subject to the policies set out
elsewhere in this Plan, but the Council has also adopted the following specific policies:

WATERFRONT 187
 Development Principles
W1 Developments in the Waterfront must:
i. Build on and strengthen existing local communities and area character;
ii. Conserve and enhance the area’s historical heritage and biodiversity;
iii. Integrate and connect new proposals with the existing pattern of development;
iv. Assist the improvement and regeneration of existing built up areas, providing new uses for
old buildings; and
v. Encourage active use of the riverfront especially in Town Centres.

Reason
10.24 The Council aims to ensure that physical and infrastructural developments translate into a lasting
social, ecological, physical and economic legacy that enhances the cohesion and character of existing
communities, improves the environment, and gives the area a strong physical and functional identity.
This intention was at the core of the Council’s original vision in the 1991 Waterfront Strategy. It
approached regeneration through a series of development initiatives and new forms of partnership,
and provided a framework for future development in the Waterfront. Urban design guidelines were
the cornerstone of the Strategy.The Strategy is ongoing but has largely been implemented.
10.25 For larger sites, planning for a balance of facilities at an early stage will be encouraged.The Council
also supports construction of buildings that are energy efficient to build and run, that use materials
from sustainable sources, and the inclusion of waste separation and recycling facilities.

Thameside Policy Area

W2 The Council will seek a high quality of design respecting the special character of the River
Thames within the Thames Policy Area defined on the Proposals Map. Proposals within the Area
will be expected to satisfy the development principles under Policy W1 and:
i. Have regard to adopted Council planning briefs, design guides and urban design guidelines
including major development requirement for a Design Statement (see Policy D2);
ii. Develop and enhance the area’s links with the river, and contribute to the completion of a
continuous public riverside footpath and cycleway from Deptford to Thamesmead (Policy
O16);
iii. Incorporate sustainable modes of passenger, freight and tourist transport as appropriate
(see Policies M7, M37);
iv. Consider strategic and local views (Policies D25 - D27); and
v. Protect and enhance the river and its foreshore for wildlife and nature conservation, avoid
unnecessary encroachment and contribute positively to the improvement of the local
environment.

Reason
10.26 The London plan states that the Boroughs must designate a Thames Policy Area, identify detailed
boundaries and prepare character appraisals of the river and its environs. The Plan details the
content of the area surveys, required analysis and recommendations. The appraisals are being
undertaken as part of the Thames Strategy East project. It is anticipated the final report will be
published in 2007/8. The Borough’s Thames Policy Area boundaries have been defined in
consultation with neighbouring Local Authorities and are in general conformity with the London
Plan. Developments within the Borough’s TPA should be of a high quality design, integrated into the

188 WATERFRONT
 existing pattern of development and consider existing ecology, open spaces, transport and
recreation. Encroachment into the Thames or Deptford Creek, including its banks and foreshore,
should be avoided as the progressive narrowing of a river channel increases the likelihood of
flooding and can destroy the essential habitats and food sources for fish, birds and other wildlife. It
can also mar the visual character of the water space.The only exception to this policy will be where
the applicant can demonstrate a requirement for river-dependent use such as for water-borne
transport or to enable water-foreshore recreation. Waterfront locations should be viewed as
opportunity sites for landmark buildings and design innovation, and this should be reflected in the
choice of quality materials. Major proposals should be accompanied by a Design statement as set
out in Policy D2.

Mixed Use Areas

W3 The Mixed Use Areas below, as defined on the Proposals Map, are designated for mixed-use
redevelopment to include business, residential and other appropriate uses.The Council will seek
an overall increase in employment generating uses and proposals that reduce the level of, or
potential for, business/employment activity will be resisted. Proposals must comply with the Site
Schedules, other Plan policies and, where applicable, take into account more detailed guidance in
planning briefs or approved master plans.
i. Deptford Creekside (West Greenwich)
ii. Greenwich Peninsula
iii. Woolwich Royal Arsenal

Reason
10.27 Mixed Use Areas have been designated to facilitate the continuing transformation to more
productive uses of waterfront areas blighted by the physical, social and environmental consequences
of the decline of heavy industry or port activity in the Borough.The designation seeks to capitalise
on the opportunity presented by new transport infrastructure, visitor attractions including the
Millennium Dome and the Firepower Museum, and the changing nature of the East London and
Borough profile and economy. These areas contain many of the most significant waterfront
redevelopment sites remaining in the Borough, so it is critical to ensure that they are re-used in an
appropriate manner to secure the long term regeneration of the waterfront and improve the quality
of life and opportunities for waterfront communities and other Borough residents.
10.28 In Mixed Use Areas, employment-generating uses (i.e. any Use Class that provides employment) will
be permitted provided they comply with relevant Site Schedules and other Plan policies.
Redevelopment proposals for under-used sites often seek greater intensities than those existing,
with uses mixed both horizontally and vertically, sometimes including a substantial residential
element. If residential elements are overly dominant, diversity and business activity can be sterilised.
Accordingly, where redevelopment takes place the Council will seek to ensure that there is a
significant rise in employment, including an overall increase in B-Class floorspace on sites currently
or last occupied by B Class uses and not re-allocated for other uses (see Policy J5).The Council will
also seek to ensure that the scale of development is commensurate with existing or proposed
infrastructure, especially public transport, and that affordable housing and other community benefits
are provided wherever appropriate (see Policy SC2). Upon planning permissions, conditions will be
attached, or legal agreements negotiated, to ensure a development provides a balanced mixed of
uses and range of employment opportunities for existing and future residents within a reasonable
timeframe.
10.29 The Site Schedules, Greenwich Peninsula Development Framework (2002, being updated) and West
Greenwich Development Framework (2000) provide more detailed advice on appropriate uses and

WATERFRONT 189
 other requirements for their respective areas.They seek to ensure future waterfront uses deliver the
Council’s vision for a revitalised and sustainable waterfront. Masterplans that benefit from planning
permission set the tone for redevelopment on Greenwich Peninsula and Woolwich Royal Arsenal.

Thamesmead
W4 The Council supports the ongoing development of Thamesmead to form a distinctive, accessible
and mixed community with a good quality of life and environment, a balanced range of facilities
to serve the local community, public open space and a mix of dwellings including affordable
housing.

Reason
10.30 Over the Plan period the Thamesmead development, including its residential and open space uses
is likely to approach completion (see paragraph 10.22). The most significant recent scheme in
Thamesmead is the Gallions Reach Urban Village, covering 55 hectares in western Thamesmead,
including 2.5 km of river frontage which when complete will be home to over 3,500 residents.The
last major residential area to be developed in Thamesmead will be Tripcock Point.The development
will be characterised by a high quality of sustainable urban design. It will include around 2,000 homes,
a primary school and public open space. Detailed guidance is provided in the Tripcock Point
Development Framework (2003), adopted by the Council as Supplementary Planning Guidance.
10.31 In turn, population growth has stimulated proposals for additional commercial development within
Thamesmead district centre, which has largely preceeded the completion of residential areas which
will support it. Once unimplemented retail permissions are developed, Thamesmead centre will
almost fully utilise its allocated area. Following guidance in PPS6 Planning for Town Centres and the
London Plan, limited additional provision may be appropriate providing it is at a scale in keeping with
Thamesmead’s role as a District Centre and the needs of its local catchment (mostly within 5
minutes drive of the centre), and does not compromise the vitality and viability of Woolwich. A
modest range of neighbourhood shopping and service facilities will also be provided in the Gallions
Reach Local Centre.
10.32 The extension of the Waterfront Transit to Thamesmead within the Plan period is a priority, and the
Council supports the principle of the Thames Gateway Bridge, subject to further consideration and
clarification of matters agreed by the Council in August 2003. Proposals for specific areas within
Thamesmead are set out in the Site Schedules.

Safeguarded Wharves
W5 Angerstein, Brewery, Murphy’s, Riverside,Tunnel Glucose wharves and the Victoria Deep Water
Terminal are safeguarded for river-based cargo handling.Alternative uses will only be considered
if the wharf is no longer capable of being made viable for river-based cargo handling, or
exceptionally for a strategic proposal of essential benefit to London that cannot be provided for
elsewhere in Greater London. Where development takes place on a Safeguarded Wharf or an
adjoining site, the Council will seek to ensure that all practicable measures are employed to
minimise the potential conflicts between wharf operations and adjoining uses.

Reason
10.33 Wharf facilities are a finite resource. The movement of goods by water rather than road can help
reduce traffic congestion, air and noise pollution, and is consistent with the principle of sustainable
developments. The Secretary of State has issued a Direction Notice (1998, as amended 2005)
affecting six wharves in Greenwich, to have regard to their maintenance for cargo use. Development
proposals for all these wharves are referable to the Mayor of London, who has a duty to periodically

190 WATERFRONT
 review wharf safeguarding and make recommendations to the Secretary of State with regards to
existing or possible additional safeguarding directions.The London Plan suggests the Mayor and the
Boroughs identify wharves to be safeguarded against development that could preclude their future
use for cargo handling. Other than in the exceptional circumstances identified in the Policy, proposals
for uses other than river-based cargo handling on safeguarded wharves should be supported by an
operational viability assessment of the wharf against the criteria in the London Plan. On vacant
wharves temporary uses that would not preclude freight use will be considered on merit.
10.34 The policy also seeks to ensure that operations on safeguarded wharves or development adjoining
sites do not unduly fetter each other. This amounts to a dual responsibility on both wharf
owners/operators and occupiers/developers of adjoining land to employ the best practicable means
to minimise the potential for land use conflict. Appropriate measures include enabling continued
highway access to the wharf, and careful attention to the design, disposition and selection of uses,
particularly along site boundaries, as well as the use of buffers and other mitigation techniques (see
Policy E3).

Floating Vessels
W6 Proposals to moor temporary or permanent floating vessels on the Thames, including the use of
any additional areas to service or support activities on a moored vessel, must:
i. Sympathetically relate to historic waterfront and riverside areas;
ii. Positively contribute to the River’s life and scene;
iii. Not compromise existing or potential River transportation, nor adversely effect existing or
potential wharfage operations, industrial and employment-generating activities;
iv. Not unduly impact on the River, its foreshore and environs through ecological disruption,
pollution, noise and refuse generation; and
v. Not conflict with residential amenity, use of the River for tourism and recreation, nor with
other policies in the Plan and other Council strategies.

Reason
10.35 The main active River use is for passenger and freight transport, and the policy seeks to minimise
or avoid conflicts between moored vessels and river traffic. The Thames is also an important
recreational and amenity resource, a source of enjoyment for residents and visitors, and is integral
to the setting of historic areas including the World Heritage Site at Greenwich. Historical sections
of the river are not suitable for the mooring of vessels, unless they are of related historic character
and do not obscure important riverside settings and historic views. In addition, the River forms a
backdrop to significant areas of residential and employment activity, and proposals for moored
vessels should not conflict with these established patterns of land use. Detailed guidance for floating
vessels is set out in Advice Note 4 Planning Criteria for Floating Vessels.

Support facilities for water-based uses

W7 Support facilities and infrastructure required to enable the use of the River Thames, its tributaries
and other waterways for passenger, transport, recreation or other river-dependent uses, will be
protected and encouraged, subject to ecological considerations.

Reason
10.36 Maintaining waterway support facilities and infrastructure is vital to sustaining uses on and adjacent
to the Borough’s waterways. To promote activities such as angling and uses such as boat servicing
(yards exist at Badcock’s Wharf and Cory Barge Works), the provision of new facilities should be

WATERFRONT 191
 encouraged, subject to their impact upon flood-risk, navigation and biodiversity. The Borough’s
support infrastructure includes mooring and land storage facilities, dry docks, boat hoists and cranes,
piers and other landing stages, slipways, stairs and other waterway access points.Those relevant to
riverbus sites are shown on the proposals maps; facilities and infrastructure generally will also be
identified through the appraisals in the Thames Strategy East (final report expected 2007/8).

192 WATERFRONT
 11. IMPLEMENTATION
GENERAL POLICIES AND POLICY CONTEXT
11.1 The implementation of the plan can be carried out in number of ways, including monitoring and
reviewing, attracting resources, partnership working, corporate initiatives, consultation and
community liaison, and through enforcement.The general policies for Implementation are:

SIM1 To monitor and review the UDP regularly to ensure it remains up-to-date.

SIM2 To attract the necessary resources to implement the plan, continue to work in partnerships and
consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents.

SIM3 To use relevant planning powers in the implementation of the plan.

Borough Context and Reasons for Part One Policies

11.2 The successful implementation of the plan will depend on the commitment of the Council, its
Strategic Partners, other public sector agencies and the private, community and voluntary sectors
to improving the living and working environment.
11.3 For the policies in the plan to remain up-to-date and relevant to the changing circumstances of the
Borough, relevant trends, such as the rate of house building, will need to be monitored.This will be
carried out by, or on behalf of, the Council. On the basis of these trends the Council can reach a
judgement about the continuing usefulness of the Plan’s policies and when a further review or
replacement Plan is required.
11.4 The resources necessary to implement the Plan include the following:
i. Investment decisions by private developers, government, statutory agencies and householders
(supplemented as necessary by planning obligations)
ii. European and national government funds and grants
iii. The Council’s own resources
iv. Land owners, including the Council and public sector agencies
All of the above need to be mobilised through partnerships and co-operative working between the
Council and others.
11.5 In order to ensure that everybody has an opportunity to participate in the planning process, the
Council will consult widely on the UDP and other planning documents and planning applications.
Consultation is necessary to ensure that the requirements of Best Value in Local Government and
the Human Rights Act (2000) are met. Best Value requirements are a means by which local
authorities are held accountable by their communities for the quality and efficiency of their services.
11.6 The Council will use its planning powers, where relevant and appropriate, to aid the implementation
of the plan. In particular where development is carried out without planning permission or contrary
to conditions attached to a permission, the Council will use enforcement powers to ensure
compliance with planning policies.
11.7 Planning System reforms under the 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act, as set out in
Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004), include the introduction of
Local Development Frameworks. These would contain various Local Development Documents

IMPLEMENTATION 193
 (LDDs) that replace the Unitary Development Plan.These LDDs propose to involve the community
at an early stage of preparation. One of the Documents would be a Statement of Community
Involvement, setting the standards for community participation. The aim of the reforms, amongst
others, is to achieve greater local ownership and legitimacy for the Council’s land use policies.
11.8 The Annual Monitoring Report, another LDD, will report on a range of matters, not least the extent
to which policies are being successfully implemented, including progress assessment against the
indicators and targets in this Chapter, as well as those required by government. It will also report on
progress against the LDS production schedule for LDDs, and provide a projection for future housing
delivery.

Policies
Monitoring and Review
IM1 The Council will both monitor changes in the planning environment and review the effectiveness
of the policies and proposals of the Plan, and amend them where necessary.

Reason
11.9 Planning Policy Statement 12: Local Development Frameworks (2004) recommends the use of
objectives and targets to assist in monitoring whether the Plan is achieving its objectives. This can
help to identify where policies need to be strengthened, maintained or changed or where the policy
is serving no useful purpose. The Council is also required to keep under review matters that may
affect the development and use of land within the Borough over the Plan period. Accordingly, the
policies and proposals of the Plan will be monitored and reviewed on a regular basis. In addition, the
proposed changes to the planning system would require the Council to replace this UDP with a
Local Development Framework, usually within three years of its formal adoption.
11.10 To assist in this process and in accordance with Best Value Performance Indicators a comprehensive
set of key targets and indicators have been set out in Table IM1.These will be used to monitor the
effectiveness of the plan through an Annual Monitoring Report. Monitoring information will also feed
into, and in part derive from, the London Development Database - the London-wide mechanism
for data collection on planning permissions and completions. This approach to LDF/UDP
performance measurement is supported by the London Plan (2004).Targets and indicators derived
from the Greenwich Strategy (2003) are also included where appropriate. In addition, the
Sustainability Appraisal indicates the impact each policy in the plan is likely to have on the
environment.
11.11 The Council needs both to observe and analyse changes that are taking place in the planning
environment and to assess whether the Plan’s policies and proposals are being successfully
implemented.These changes are made up of a number of factors:
i. External influences such as demographic and economic trends e.g. shopping and recreational
behaviour, industrial restructuring; and national trends such as birth and death rates;
ii. Local trends and problems such as changes in traffic movement, vitality of shopping centres, local
employment and condition of dwellings;
iii. The availability and uptake of developable land in the Borough;
iv. The results of more detailed local studies such as planning briefs;
v. Continued public consultation;
vi. Changing national, regional and strategic planning guidance; and
vii. National and European legislative changes.

194 IMPLEMENTATION
 Resources
IM2 The Council will seek all available resources, public and private, for the implementation of the
policies and proposals in this Plan.

Reason
11.12 The 2004 Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act requires planning authorities to have regard to the
likely availability of resources when preparing their Plans. The availability of resources is one of the
main determinants of what the Plan can achieve. In addition to private investment by households
and businesses, the public sector contribution in Greenwich is likely to provide a substantial amount
of development investment over the Plan period.
11.13 The Council’s Economic Development Strategy 2002-07 identifies that over £180 million regeneration
funding has been secured along with an estimated £2 billion of public and private sector investment.
These funds will assist in addressing issues including skills and training, business support, access,
housing, community safety, environmental improvements and community capacity building. It is
Council policy to pursue all available funding for appropriate schemes. Financial resources include:
• European Social Fund and European Regional Development Fund grant funding;
• Spending by Government Departments and other public service providers including the
Housing Corporation and English Partnerships;
• Regional and sub-regional government spending including Transport for London and the London
Development Agency;
• Council Capital and Revenue Spending Strategies;
• Targeted regeneration funding sources including Neighbourhood Renewal, the Single
Programme (incorporating remaining Single Regeneration Budget, SRB) and the National
Lottery;
• Investment by infrastructure and utilities service providers;
• Investment by private land-owners and developers; and
• Community benefits secured via planning obligation (see Policy SC2).
11.14 The availability of developable land is an important resource to implement the UDP. Most land in
the borough is privately owned, although the Council and the London Development Agency are
two of a number of public sector agencies that own land which will become available for
development in the Borough.
11.15 Finally, the Sustainable Communities Plan in the Thames Gateway could make a significant contribution
to UDP implementation resources as it is likely to receive considerable Government funding.

Partnership
IM3 The Council will work in partnership with the community and voluntary sector as well as with
other bodies and private businesses.

Reason
11.16 The Council is committed to working in partnership, at all levels of implementation of this Plan, with
the community and voluntary sector as well as with other bodies and private businesses.
11.17 The Greenwich Partnership is the Local Strategic Partnership for Greenwich Borough, building on
the success of the former Greenwich Waterfront Development Partnership. It brings together the
Borough’s business, community and voluntary sectors with the Council and the public sector as a

IMPLEMENTATION 195
 whole. It will oversee implementation of the Greenwich Strategy (2003) (See Part 1 paragraph
5.26).The Partnership includes members from the Council, the Greenwich Public Services Forum,
the Bexley and Greenwich Chamber of Commerce, and the Greenwich Community Network
Steering Group, with specialist advice from the Greenwich Council for Racial Equality and the
Greenwich Association of Disabled People.
11.18 Town Centre Managers for the Greenwich area,Woolwich and Eltham work to improve their town
centres to better serve local communities and businesses.There is also a town centre manager for
Thamesmead who oversees the long term development of Thamesmead town centre.
11.19 A Woolwich Regeneration Agency was set up with support from the Department for Communities
and Local Government, London Development Agency and the Council.
11.20 The Council is also a member of a number of partnerships that cover areas larger than the Borough.
These include the Thames Gateway London Partnership and Thames Estuary Partnership covering
parts of the Thames Gateway. Thames Gateway London Partnership is a sub-regional alliance
comprising local authorities and Training and Enterprise Councils in east and southeast London, and
adjoining areas of Essex and Kent and English Partnerships.The Council participates in the activities
of the Partnership to bring about sustainable physical, economic, social and environmental
regeneration of Thames Gateway, London.The Thames Gateway London Partnership will play a key
role in the development of the East London Sub Regional Development Framework.The Council is also
a member of SELTRANS (The South East London Transport Strategy), a partnership between local
authorities, transport providers, operators, businesses and passenger interests to improve bus and
rail services, to reduce dependence on the car and increase accessibility to jobs.

Consultation and Community Liaison

IM4 The Council will:
i. Engage with the community, local businesses and other stakeholders in preparing Planning
briefs, Area strategies, other planning studies including Conservation Area designation and
on major transport infrastructure and traffic management schemes;
ii. Consult with adjoining occupiers, the public, community and environmental groups as
relevant on planning applications, and ensure that their views are taken into account in
making planning decisions; and
iii. Engage with statutory bodies and other agencies as appropriate.

Reason
11.21 An integral part of the planning system is regular public consultation and liaison. Government
legislation requires all planning authorities to consult local populations, statutory authorities and
other stakeholders when preparing a land use plan, and proposed legislative changes would further
strengthen consultation arrangements. This consultation is essential to ensure that everyone who
may be affected by a Plan has an opportunity to put their point of view and have an opportunity
to influence the process of change. It is particularly important to ensure that disadvantaged groups
such as women, people with disabilities, older people and minority ethnic groups are given an
opportunity to participate in planning decisions.
11.22 The Council will maintain its policy of consulting those affected on planning applications, ranging
from neighbour consultations for small residential extensions to widespread public consultations on
major applications. The Council will seek to provide planning information, advice and guidance to
those interested in or affected by development in Greenwich. In particular, the Council will seek to
improve the quality and quantity of planning material available online by the end of 2005.

196 IMPLEMENTATION
11.23 The Council will also carry out public consultations in the preparation of planning briefs for
individual development sites and on other proposals. On a wider level the Council will carry out
consultations and have regular liaison with various statutory bodies.

Corporate Initiatives
11.24 The implementation of the Plan can also be achieved through corporate initiatives within the
Council.There are a wide range of such initiatives that can be pursued, from Council wide strategies
on issues such as regeneration, through to more focused strategies on capital expenditure as
expressed in Housing Investment Programmes and the Local Implementation Plan (for transport).The
Greenwich Strategy is the overarching plan for all these strategies, plans and initiatives. The Council
and its partners will contribute to at many levels, jointly and through individual services (see Part
One paragraphs 2.1 and 5.26).
11.25 Policies in the UDP draw on a range of other Council strategies, and in turn the UDP assists in the
delivery of those strategies, in particular their spatial and land use dimensions. Strategies adopted or
being prepared by the Council are identified in Part One paragraph 5.28.

Enforcement
IM5 In circumstances where it is considered necessary in the public interest, the Council will take
enforcement action against those who undertake development or carry out works without the
appropriate consent or permission under the Planning and related Acts, or where conditions
attached to consents or permissions are not observed or where other breaches of planning
control have been committed.

Reason
11.26 The Council has powers granted under the Town and Country Planning Acts to take action when
development is started without planning permission, if conditions attached to a permission are not
complied with, or when other breaches of planning control have been committed.
11.27 The Council’s main enforcement powers are:
i. To serve an enforcement notice, stating the required steps to remedy an alleged breach within
a time limit;
ii. To serve a stop notice, a planning injunction, which can prohibit, almost immediately, any activity
to which the accompanying enforcement notice relates;
iii. To serve a breach of condition notice if there is a failure to comply with a condition imposed
on a grant of planning permission;
iv. To enter on privately-owned land for enforcement purposes;
v. Following the landowners default, to enter land and carry out the remedial work required by an
enforcement notice, and to charge the owner for the costs incurred; and
vi. To serve a listed building enforcement notice, specifying the alleged contravention and requiring
steps to be taken within a stated period to remedy it.
11.28 In the interests of the general implementation of this Plan, the Council will not hesitate to take
planning enforcement action where appropriate, and in compliance with government guidance.

IMPLEMENTATION 197
 Table IM1: Targets and Indicators for UDP Monitoring

UDP Objective ~ Target Indicator and Monitoring Information

1 Community Needs, Benefits & Services

1.1 To ensure adequate land use provision for Number of relevant planning applications granted/ refused
community, health care and education facilities which involve a change of use.
to serve areas experiencing significant new
development (Policy SC3).

2 Jobs & the Local Economy

2.1 To protect sites in designated employment
areas, and sites elsewhere in active
employment use, from change of use to
non-employment activity (‘employment uses’
as defined in para 2.1) (Policy SJ4).
2.2 To increase the quantity of modern business
floorspace in the borough (Policy SJ1).
Area of land designated or in use for employment
purposes (including employment Site Schedules) where
planning permission is granted for non-employment uses
(sites exceeding 0.25 hectares).
B1, B2, B8 floorspace (i) permitted (ii) completed (schemes
exceeding 1,000 m2 gross).

3 Housing

3.1 To make provision for at least 16,100 net
additional dwellings over the period 1997 to
2016 (target inclusive of vacant and non-self-
contained accommodation) (Policy SH1).
3.2 To exceed 90% of dwellings provided on
previously developed land (Policy H1).
Additional number of dwellings permitted and completed
annually, monitored from planning permissions and
completions.
The percentage of dwellings delivered on previously
developed land through planning permissions and
completions (Best Value Indicator BV106).

3.3 Provide at least 35% of total housing provision Additional number of affordable units provided annually,
as affordable housing between 1997 and monitored from planning permissions and completions.
2016 (Policy SH5).

3.4 To provide a mix of dwellings by size and type Number and percentage of dwellings by number of
(Policy H15). bedrooms and by dwelling type, monitored by permissions
and completion data.

3.5 To achieve a high standard of design quality
and environmental performance in new
housing development (Policy H7).
3.6 To ensure 10 per cent of new build dwellings
(including affordable housing) on
developments of 25 units or more are at full
wheelchair standard or capable of being so
adapted (Policy H19).
Number and percentage of dwellings completed annually
that achieve the Building Research Establishment’s
‘EcoHomes’ excellent rating. Source: the Building Research
Establishment.
Percentage of new build dwellings (including affordable
housing) on developments of 25 units or more at full
wheelchair standard or capable of being so adapted.

198 IMPLEMENTATION
 UDP Objective ~ Target Indicator and Monitoring Information
4 Open Spaces

4.1 To prevent inappropriate development on Designated open space lost to non-ancillary development.
identified open space (Policies SO2, SO4).

4.2 To protect viable existing and encourage new The percentage of the Borough designated as open space
provision for leisure and sports facilities and accessible to the public. Baseline data to be derived
(Policy SO1, Greenwich Strategy). from the forthcoming Borough Open Space Strategy.

4.3 To complete the riverside footpath and
cycleway as part of any development
proposal adjacent to the route (Policy O17,
Greenwich Strategy).
4.4 To protect the ‘Green Chain Walk’ and
riverside footpath (Policies O14 and O15).
4.5 To protect Sites of Nature Conservation
Importance from inappropriate development
(Policy O18).
Number of planning permissions implemented along the
route that make contributions towards the riverside
footpath and cycleway.
Number of relevant planning permissions granted where
they maintain the Green Chain Walk or riverside
walk/cycleway networks, and those refused that would
have caused severence. Monitor via the Green Chain
Working Party.
Area (hectares) of land designated as a Sites of Nature
Conservation Importance or Site of Special Scientific
Interest that is lost to non-ancillary development.

5 Environmental Protection

5.1 To prevent development within fluvial flood
risk areas or catchment areas where
inadequate flood defence or attenuation
measures are taken. (Policies E18 and E19)
5.2 To prevent development that would have an
unacceptably damaging impact on the
environment.This will be assessed by scrutiny
of Environmental Impact Assessments
(Policy SE2).
Number of planning permissions granted contrary to the
advice of the Environment Agency on either flood defence
or water quality grounds.
Number of applications where an Environmental Impact
Assessment concludes there would be an unacceptable
impact on the environment.

5.3 To improve energy efficiency and increase the On developments of at least 1,000 sqm and/or
proportion of energy generated from 10 residential units, the percentage and number that
renewable sources (Policies E8 and E9) incorporate renewable energy production equipment to
provide at least 10% of the predicted energy requirements.

IMPLEMENTATION 199
 UDP Objective ~ Target Indicator and Monitoring Information
6 Design & Conservation

6.1 To ensure high quality design of all
development particularly major schemes,
those located on key development sites and
those that contribute strongly to the image
of the Borough (Policies SD1, D1 and D2).
Number of Design Statements provided by applicants of
major schemes.
Number of schemes nominated for and/or awarded a
design award (e.g. Civic Trust).

6.2 To preserve all Listed Buildings from neglect
or inappropriate changes, and reduce the
number of listed buildings at risk (Policies
SD3, D18 - D22).
The number of buildings on the English Heritage Listed
Buildings at Risk Register
Success rate in defending appeals against refusal of consent
for inappropriate development requiring Listed Building or
Conservation Area Consent.

6.3 To preserve the archaeological heritage of the Number of approved Archaeological Assessment
Borough (Policies D30 & D31). Statements.

6.4 To preserve and enhance the character of Number of published Conservation Area Appraisals and
designated Conservation Areas (Policies SD3, Management Proposals.
D16 & D17).

7 Movement

7.1 To complete the Docklands Light Railway Progress of works on the Woolwich DLR extension and
(DLR) link to Woolwich Arsenal (Policy M8). station terminus.

7.2 To complete the Waterfront Transit from Financial or land contribution by Section 106 legal
Greenwich to Abbey Wood (Policy M12). agreement towards Waterfront Transit.

7.3 To implement car-parking provision in The proportion of planning permissions that exceed the
accordance with the maximum standards set maximum applicable parking standards.
out in Policies M23 to M27.

8 Town Centres

8.1 To maintain viable, vibrant and thriving Town
Centres (Major, District & Local Centres)
with a range of shops and services
(Policies STC1, STC2).
8.2 To increase the retail and leisure floorspace
in Woolwich, Eltham and Greenwich Town
Centres over the lifetime of the Plan (Policies
STC1, STC2,TC2,TC3,TC9 and TC14).
Percentage of A1, non-A1 and vacant units in defined
shopping frontages (Source: Experian GOAD and/or
bi-annual surveys).
New A1 retail and D2 indoor leisure floorspace
permitted/completed (i) within defined centres and
(ii) outside defined centres on sites not allocated for retail
use (proposals exceeding 1,000 m2 gross).

200 IMPLEMENTATION
 UDP Objective ~ Target
9 Tourism
9.1 To protect viable existing and encourage
new provision for tourism, arts, cultural and
entertainment facilities. (Policies ST1 and ST2) existing facilities).
9.2 To locate major new tourist facilities within
established Town Centres or on sites
identified in the Plan (Policy T1)
10 Waterfront
10.1 Protecting existing, and providing new
waterway support facilities and infrastructure
to enable use of the Thames and Deptford
Creek for river-dependent uses (Policy W7)
10.2 To reduce the amount of vacant and/or
derelict land in the Waterfront Area.
(Policy SW1)
Indicator and Monitoring Information
Number of Tourism-related planning applications
granted/refused that involve a change of use (i.e. loss of
Number of planning applications for major new tourist
facilities granted/refused within, or outside, designated Town
Centres and other sites designated in the UDP.
Number and type of water support facilities gained or lost
through planning application decisions. Monitor through
Planning and Building Control records.
Area of vacant and/or derelict land remaining. Use the
National Land Use Database and Council Geographic
Information System records to establish a baseline and
thereafter continue to monitor.
IMPLEMENTATION 201
202 IMPLEMENTATION
SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES
Proposals Map UDP
Annotation Page
Community Needs and Services cb 204
Jobs j 205-207
Housing h 208
Open Spaces o 209-211
Movement m 212-213
Mixed Uses mu 214-221

SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES 203

COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
cb1 Site on the corner of Adventure Community The long term aim is to provide
Horseferry Place & Thames Playground buildings community buildings on these sites to
Street (0.10) serve the Meridian Estate.The
existing adventure playground to
remain in the interim.

cb2 Thomas Tallis Secondary School playing Secondary school Replacement of the existing school
School (2.79) grounds / and ancillary uses with expanded capacity for Year 7
vacant and Post 16.
See the proposed Kidbrooke Area
Development SPD and Policy H4
(Kidbrooke Development Area). Part
of an area at risk of Fluvial Flooding,
development subject to a Flood Risk
assessment in line with Environment
Agency advice.

THAMESMEAD

cb3 Community/ Civic site, Vacant Significant The site is subject to a Community
Thamesmere Drive (0.61) Community Uses, Services Study as part of the Tripcock
and may involve Point Planning Application Section
Town Centre uses 106 Agreement. If the Study
to facilitate concludes that all or part of the site
community is not needed for Community
provision Facilities,Town Centre uses including
residential and B1 (office) uses will be
considered.

cb4 Tripcock Point school site Vacant Primary School See the Tripcock Point Development
(1.87) Framework, adopted September
2003. Outline planning permission
granted May 2006 for 2000
dwellings, a school, hotel and ancillary
retail, service and business uses (ref.
03/2618/O).That part of the site in
Metropolitan Open Land should be
used for open space activities
ancillary to the school.

204 SITE SCHEDULES: COMMUNITY NEEDS AND SERVICES

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
j1 White Hart Triangle, Construction Industry B1b/c, Under construction with Site j13 for
White Hart Lane (14.14) site. Was mostly B2, B8 up to 106,000sqm industrial uses
vacant with phased 2003-2010 (ref. 01/1071).
Commercial, Listed former Council depot building
Community to be retained and re-used. Adjoins
Crossrail works site to which it
provides safeguarded road access
(see Site m4a).

j2 Riverside between Lombard Industry Industry B1b/c, B2, Proposed uses should exploit the
Wall and Anchor and Hope including Cory’s B8 potential of the riverside wharves.
Lane (1.93) barge works/ Preference for the retention of
Warehousing/ Cory’s works.
Offices/part
vacant

j3 Angerstein Triangle, B8 vehicle Light industry/ Former railway sidings refurbished as

Bramshot Avenue (4.62) storage Warehousing a depot with open storage. Part of
B1b/c, B8 the site has planning permission for
light industry and associated offices.

j4 17-37 & 18-36 Bowater Part vacant, Industry B1b/c, B2, Multi-storey pre-war industrial /
Road, 1-3 Faraday Way offices, B8 plus ancillary commercial buildings - retention
(1.68) commercial services. If buildings preferred if practicable.
retained: Offices,
studio workshops
(B1), vocational
training.

j5 Thames Barrier Approach, Storage, B1 uses, studio Eastmoor Street is the main visitor
Eastmoor Street and industry, car workshops, small access to the Thames Barrier. Public
Westmoor Streets (2.31) breakers yards. scale ancillary realm improvements required. Scope
retailing and for higher density and multi-storey
services. business development.

j6 25-81 Greenwich High Road Greenwich Light Industry, See West Greenwich Development
(1.87) Business Centre Offices, Small Framework (2000). Development
(Skillions), Business Units (B1) must relate sympathetically with
Bookers adjoining listed warehouses and
warehouse and Mumford’s Mill, and not compromise
former petrol Deptford Creek ecology. Planning
station permission at Skillions for 26,711
sqm office and business
redevelopment. Greenwich Business
Centre should be retained if
redevelopment for the permitted or
an alternative business
redevelopment does not prove
viable.

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS 205

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
j7 Brookmarsh Industrial Estate 1960-1970’s Light Industry/ Small Longer term there may be scope for
& Phoenix Wharf, Lower small business / Business Units/ comprehensive redevelopment
Norman Road industrial units, Offices (B1). around Greenwich station,
(0.93) builders whereupon this site may have scope
merchant. for more intensive mixed business
and residential use. See
West Greenwich Development
Framework (2000).

j8 55-71 Norman Road &
railway arches (0.42)
Builders yard & Light Industry/ Small Longer term there may be scope for
railway arches Business Units (B1). comprehensive redevelopment
around Greenwich station,
whereupon this site may have scope
for more intensive mixed business
and residential use. See
West Greenwich Development
Framework (2000).

j9 Site to east of A102 (M), Various Employment Outline planning permission granted
west of Bugsby’s Way commercial (B class uses) for 18,600 sqm B1c use on the
(4.78) including lorry vacant “Gateway site” as part of the
depot and a Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula
vacant site (ref. 02/2903). See The Greenwich
Peninsula Development Framework
(Nov 2002, being updated).

j10 Horn Link Way / Pear Tree Vacant / open Employment / light Buffer strip between Aggregates zone
Way north of Bugsby’s Way storage industry (B1) and Millennium Urban Village.
(1.16) Outline planning permission for
employment use.

j11 J/o Warspite Road and Vacant Industry/ Small corner site west of Co-op
Rushton Road / employment funeral parlour on Woolwich Road
Woolwich Road (B1b/c, B8) roundabout, providing access to
(0.40) industrial uses in Warspite Road;
residential and industrial uses under
construction in Ruston Road.

j12 Harvey’s site, Ramac Way Vacant Industry (B1b/c, B8) May be affected by Waterfront Transit
(0.83) route. Scope to refurbish/redevelop
adjoining Ramac Industrial Estate.

THAMESMEAD

j13 Land at Central Way, Nathan Construction Industry (B1b/c, Under construction with Site j1 for
Way, Purland Road, east of site previously B2, B8). up to 106,000 sqm industrial uses
Belmarsh Prison (10.50) vacant phased 2003-2010 (ref. 01/1071).
Site provides safeguarded road access
to Crossrail works (see Site m5).

206 SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS

JOBS
NB: Employment uses form a significant part of the uses sought on a number of allocated Mixed Used sites.
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
j14 Site fronting Nathan Way Vacant Industry (B1b/c, Previously safeguarded site for road
(1.05) B2, B8) link to White Hart Triangle Land, now
released for industrial use.

j15 4-40 Nathan Way Vacant (0.52) Industry, offices Close to Plumstead rail station.
(B1, B2, B8) May be affected by proposed
Crossrail safeguarding.

j16 Site to the east of Vacant Hotel, light industry, Outline planning permission for a
Plumstead Bus Garage business (B1, B8), hotel and associated A3 use (ref.
(0.86) other non-retail 01/2523). Partly below level of A206.
commercial Close to Plumstead rail station.

SITE SCHEDULES: JOBS 207

HOUSING
NB: Housing will form a significant part of the uses sought on most allocated Mixed Use sites.
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
h1 Site west of Tilfen Offices, Open Land Residential Scope to develop in conjunction with
Harrow Manor Way Gallions Housing Association offices if
(1.12) these become operationally surplus.

h2 McMillan Street Various Housing See West Greenwich Development

(0.15) Framework (2000).

h3 Eltham pools Swimming pool Residential Subject to relocation of the pools as

(0.37) part of the leisure centre permitted
in Archery Road (see site mu2)

h4 National maritime Museum Residential Outline planning permission for

Museum storage site,
Nelson Mandela Road
(1.72)
storage residential use (2004). Development
will need to include completion of
the wildlife link between the two
parts of Nature Conservation
Site nc7.

h5 Thomas Tallis school site Secondary Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area
(2.40) school and housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4
grounds community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area)
retail

h6 West Ferrier precinct Housing and Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area
(21.88) open space housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4
community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area)
Wingfield Primary
School

h7 East Ferrier Estate Housing, open Predominately See the pending Kidbrooke Area
(19.58) space, leisure housing, ancillary Development SPD and Policy H4
community services, (Kidbrooke Development Area).
Holy Family School Re-alignment of Kidbrooke Park
Road in agreement with TfL. Part of
the area is at risk of Fluvial Flooding,
development subject to a Flood Risk
assessment in line with
Environment Agency advice.

THAMESMEAD

h8 Land adjacent Vacant Residential Planning permission for 70 flats

Broadwater Dock (2006). Proposals also include
(0.77) improvements to surrounding open
space, infilling and renovation of dock.

208 SITE SCHEDULES: HOUSING

OPEN SPACES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
o1 Woolwich Common Temporary Extension to The site was formerly part of
Temporary MoD building open space/ Common Woolwich Common and has been
site, Ha Ha Road vacant land occupied by temporary buildings
(3.47) used by the MoD since the 2nd
World War. It is intended that the
site should revert to open space use
when the temporary buildings are
vacated by the MoD, to reinstate the
continuity of the Common.

o2 Hervey Road Playing Field Education/ Local Park The Hervey Road playing field lies in
(4.80) Playing Field an area of local park deficiency.The
playing field was originally acquired
for a new secondary school
development. If the site is surplus to
educational requirements as a
playing field consideration should be
given to its reversion to the original
purpose for which it was agreed. If
the site is surplus to education needs
generally, the site should remain in
open space uses, consistent with
Policies O7 and O9.

o3 Sutcliffe Park extension Housing and Open space See the pending Kidbrooke Area
(6.50) open space extension from Development SPD and Policy H4
Sutcliffe Park (Kidbrooke Development Area)
to Kidbrooke
railway station

o4 University of Greenwich University University Major Developed Site in

Avery Hill Campus, accommodation expansion Metropolitan Open Land for
Mansion Site University expansion.
(7.49) See Policy O3.

o5 University of Greenwich University University Major Developed Site in

Avery Hill Campus, accommodation expansion Metropolitan Open Land. Planning
Southwood Site permission (2003) for 6,500m2 net
(7.09) increase in teaching floorspace.
See Policy O3.

FOOTPATH AND CYCLEWAY PROPOSALS

o6 Riverside Walk, Borough Industry Riverside Walkway It is the Council’s objective to create
boundary to Millennium a continuous riverside walkway
Quay (N/A) alongside the River Thames from
Deptford to Thamesmead. It is
proposed that the ‘missing links’ will
be completed as and when proposals
are brought forward for
redevelopment of riverside sites.
(Policy O16). See also
Site Proposal mu32.

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES 209

OPEN SPACES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
o7 Riverside Walk, Deptford Industry/ Riverside Walkway As proposal o6
Creek to Horseferry Place) vacant
(N/A)

o8 Riverside Walk, Riverside Walkway Environmental improvements will be

Anchor Wharf to footpath, improvement carried out to the existing riverside
Point Wharf industrial uses including riverside footpath. Opportunities will be taken
(N/A) amenity open to realign the footpath alongside the
spaces and viewing River whenever possible. Small
area. riverside open spaces and viewing
areas will be created where
opportunities arise. (Policy O16).

o9 Riverside Walk,Thames Industry Riverside Walkway As for proposal o6.

Barrier to Warspite Road
(N/A)

o10 Riverside Walk, Industry Riverside Walkway As for proposal o6.

Woolwich Dockyard to See site proposal mu6.
Woolwich Ferry (N/A)

o11 Riverside Walk, Ferry Depot Riverside Walkway As for proposal o6.
Approach Link (N/A) Link

o12 Green Chain Walk, Private Footpath The Council, in co-operation with the
Butterfly Lane to sportsground other constituent authorities of the
Footscray Road and playing GCJC, has way-marked a spinal
(N/A) fields network in the Green Chain (“Green
Chain Walk”). Most of the network
already exists in the form of public
footpaths or pathways through public
open space.These proposals cover
various ‘missing links’ which will
extend or improve the network and
create circular and continuous routes
through the Green Chain open land
within GC.The Council intends to
implement them as and when the
opportunity arises and subject to
reaching agreement with the
landowners. (Policy O15).

o13 Green Chain Walk, Private Footpath As for proposal o12.

Footscray Road to Golf Course
Court Road (N/A)

o14 Green Chain Walk, Community Footpath As for proposal o12.

Dothill Road to Oxleas farm, footpath
Wood and to Bexley at
Woodlands Farm (N/A)

210 SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES

OPEN SPACES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
THAMESMEAD

o15 Tripcock Park West Vacant District Park (part) This proposed District Park will serve
(c.6 ha.) the Western part of Thamesmead.
The proposal includes Thameside
Walk landscaping. Park includes site
of Nature Conservation Importance
where management arrangements,
level and type of public access are to
be determined (Policies W4, O9,
O18, O24). Layout of park must take
account of Thames Gateway Bridge
(Site m2).

o16 Tripcock Park East Vacant District Park (part) The proposed District Park with
(c.20 ha.) Tripcock Park West will serve
western part of Thamesmead.
Proposal forms part of Gallions
Reach Urban Village. It will include
Riverside Walk. Layout of park must
take account of Thames Gateway
Bridge (Site m2).

o17 Riverside Walk, Vacant Riverside Landscaping of river walk to include

Area 4 & 6 North Promenade footpaths
(N/A)

o18 Riverside Walk, adjacent to Vacant Riverside Footpath Landscaping to include footpath.
Tripcock Park Areas 6/7 Footpath
(N/A)

o19 Canal system, Area 6 Vacant Drainage canal The canal system in Area 6 will Link
(N/A) to Thamesmere Extension Lake in
Area 4 via the Twin Tumps.The
system also links through to the
Gallions Reach Urban village.
Canals provide a setting for footpath
and cycleway links adjacent
development.The canal will in parts
be provided with “wet margins” for
ecological reasons.

SITE SCHEDULES: OPEN SPACES 211

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
RIVER CROSSINGS

m1 Woolwich Rail Crossing Various Extension from the Options include heavy rail link.
(N/A) Royal Docks to Remains safeguarded but may be
Woolwich Arsenal reviewed as the DLR Woolwich
extension is being implemented
(see m4).

m2 Thames Gateway Bridge Various Multi-modal bridge Road crossing with fixed public
(N/A) crossing transport link - possibly DLR or
guided bus/tram. Public Inquiry closed
2006, decision awaited.

m3 Blackwall Crossing Various River Crossing A new crossing between

(N/A) North Greenwich and Silvertown
Way in L.B. Newham. Should the
crossing proceed the Council will
require tunnels not a bridge.

m4 Docklands Light Railway Various Extension from Tunnel under the River Thames,
Woolwich City Airport to terminus in Woolwich town centre
(N/A) Woolwich adjacent Woolwich Arsenal mainline
station (see site mu14). Scheduled
to open 2009.

m5 Crossrail Various New cross-London Tunnel under the Thames emerging

(N/A) rail link at Plumstead where it joins existing
surface line. Station at Abbey Wood.
Potential for a station at Woolwich
Arsenal. Note the Safeguarding
direction also secures access to
works sites through the Woolwich
Arsenal (Arsenal Way and Wallis
Road via Duke of Wellington
Avenue) and the White Hart Triangle
(White Hart Avenue and
North Road).

ROAD SCHEMES

m6 Deptford Church Street Road Junction Junction realignment to promote use

(N/A) Realignment of Deptford Church Street/A2, and
assist in relieving Greenwich of
through traffic. See Policy M15.

m7 Shooters Hill Road / Road Filter lane Filter lane provision from Well Hall
Well Hall Road Road into Shooters Hill Road to
(N/A) enable better bus movement.
Subject to TfL approval.

212 SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT

MOVEMENT
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
RIVERBUS

m8 Thamesmead Vacant Pier / shore facilities To serve Thamesmead town centre

(N/A) and Tripcock Point (see Site mu40).

m9 Greenwich Pier Pier Enhancement of Planning Permission granted subject

(N/A) pier/shore facilities to a legal agreement.

RAIL FREIGHT

m10 Land at Angerstein Wharf Aggregates Site to continue to Grant aid available under Section 8
(4.62) be used for rail of the Railways act 1974.
freight See Policy M37.

m11 Former Plumstead Coal Yard Storage and Site with rail sidings Temporary planning permission for
(3.21) builders yard with potential for storage and aggregates use.
rail freight use Adjacent White Hart Triangle
industrial development (see Site j1).
Safeguarded works and tunnel portal
site for the Crossrail project (see Site
m5). Also a Strategic Rail Freight Site.

CYCLING

m12 Riverside Walk River Frontage Thames Cycle Cycle route to be incorporated into
(N/A) Route the existing proposed riverside walk.
See also relevant open space
proposals. Detailed examination of
schemes required.

SITE SCHEDULES: MOVEMENT 213

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu1 Coronet Cinema & Tudor Vacant cinema, Community uses, See the Coronet Cinema Site Planning
Parade, Well Hall Road retail use and retail and housing Brief (2004). Development must
(0.43) residential units including a include retention of grade II listed
above the significant element cinema building. Residential will need
shops, petrol of affordable to form part of an integrated and
filling station housing comprehensive regeneration of
the site.

mu2 Former depot, Council Depot Leisure centre with Planning permission for a leisure
Archery Road swimming pool centre and Council local service
(0.63) centre (2005, ref.05/2105).
Under construction.

mu3 Stockwell Street Site Offices, indoor Mix of town Site located with the Maritime
(0.81) market, centre uses Greenwich World Heritage Site and in
outdoor a Conservation Area. See the
weekend Stockwell Street Development Brief
market (2000).

mu4 Deals Gateway, 6-42 Vacant Commercial use Planning permission for offices,
Blackheath Road including B1 on industrial, work/live units, residential
(0.51) road frontage, and A1/A3 retail (ref. 02/2786).
elsewhere
residential,
educational or
commercial

mu5 Greenwich Reach East Vacant industry/ Residential-led Creekmouth offers a deep water
(3.14) scrap/ mixed use mooring suitable for cruise liners.
aggregates development, Strategic view needs to be
depot supporting amenity safeguarded. Riverwall improvements
space including a required. Resolution to grant planning
continuous public permission (ref. 05/1386) for 980
walk and cycleway flats, retail including supermarket and
along the Thames, food & drink uses, subject to a legal
and activity- agreement. Scheme includes a
generating service, Creekmouth pedestrian bridge.
leisure and
community uses
especially on the
riverfront. Potential
for a hotel and
cruise liner terminal.

mu6 St Mary’s and Vacant Flats, hotel or other Planning permission for 4 storey
Mastpond Wharves, water-front- hotel (99/0136) and 181 flats
Woolwich Church Street animating uses and (99/0959). Development to retain
(1.50) riverside walk slipways and safeguard river views
from St. Mary’s church. Flood defence
improvements required. Flats
completed 2006.

214 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu7 Blackwall Lane / Various, vacant Commercial uses, Development should enhance and
Pelton Street school residential including support East Greenwich District
(0.28) affordable housing Centre. See Greenwich Peninsula
Development Framework
(2002, being updated).

mu8 Callis Yard Council depot Town centre See Woolwich Town Centre
(0.28) commercial/ Development Framework
business use(s) (2002 update, being updated) and
Town Centre Policies. Scope for site
assembly including Riverside House.

mu9 Macbean Centre and former Temporary Mixed development Development should complement
Woolwich Polytechnic school, market of town centre uses and form an activity link between
(1.06) pound and including retail, Powis Street and the leisure/tourism
community possible covered uses in Warren Lane and the
uses shopping mall Royal Arsenal. See Woolwich Town
Centre Development Framework
(2002 draft, being updated) and
Town Centre Policies.

mu10 Land enclosing Various Mixed retail and Active uses including retail and leisure
Mortgramit Square commercial, town centre uses, at ground floor level on Hare Street
(Hare & Powis Street) retail and residential above and Powis Street. Former Co-op
(1.27) residential uses including affordable store is locally listed. Development of
& vacant housing sub-areas should not compromise a
premises. more comprehensive development
approach. See Woolwich Town Centre
Development Framework (2002 draft,
being updated).

mu11 Goldie Leigh Hospital Hospital Continued health Site is in Metropolitan Open Land
(7.32) provision, surplus and a Conservation Area. No
footprint potentially proposals to exceed existing
residential footprint of buildings. Presumption in
favour of conversion where
practicable rather than demolition
and new build. See Goldie Leigh
Hospital Planning Brief (2000).

mu12 Land to north of Various Town Centre uses See Eltham Town Centre Development
Eltham High Street including residential, Framework (1997, being updated).
(1.85) principally retail at
ground level

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 215

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu13 Warren Lane ‘teardrop’ site Various Mixed use Development should complement
(1.54) commercial, development and form an activity link between
part vacant including leisure A3, Powis Street and the Royal Arsenal,
hotel/tourist and must respect the setting of the
facilities, residential. adjacent Royal Arsenal listed buildings
Ancillary A1 only. and conservation area. See Woolwich
Town Centre Development Framework
(2002 draft, being updated).
Resolution to grant outline planning
permission for 2,517 flats, hotel,
leisure including 10-screen cinema
and ancillary retail/food& drink uses
(ref. 05/2363/O, also covers part of
Site mu24).

mu14 Woolwich Arsenal
mainline station and land
south of Spray Street,
Woolwich town centre
(3.14)
Various DLR interchange The Secretary of State granted
with North Kent powers for the construction of the
line, Waterfront DLR Woolwich extension in
Transit and bus February 2004. Listed buildings
routes.To include including the former Woolwich
retail, commercial Building Society boardrooms to be
and residential retained. Scheduled to open in 2009.
development as See the Woolwich Interchange Planning
part of a Brief (2002).
comprehensive
station
redevelopment.

mu15 Grove Market Place Shopping Retail with housing Planning permission to amalgamate
(0.51) parade with above, including a and enclose an underused 1960's
residential significant element open shopping arcade to provide a
above of affordable large retail unit, re-providing flats
housing above (2003, ref. 00/1091).

mu16 Hilton’s, Lion &
Saxon Wharves,
Upper Norman Road
(0.90)
Part offices/ Light Industry, Small Site must include a significant
commercial, business Units, proportion of non-residential uses
part vacant Cultural Industries, and public access to the Creek.
residential within a Adjoining Brewery Wharf is
mix. safeguarded by the Secretary of State
for river-based freight use.
See West Greenwich Development
Framework (2000).

mu17 Creek Road / Bardsley Lane Part open Retail, A3 and Development to be linked to
(0.64) space, some community uses, improvements to openness and
commercial civic open space landscaping of St. Alfege’s Park, which
premises with residential could include limited reconfiguration
including and/or small offices of open space. Gateway site into the
former above. World Heritage Site requiring
woodyard sensitive design solutions. See West
Greenwich Development Framework
(2000).

216 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal
mu18 Creek Road, south side, Vacant former Mixed use
west of Deptford Creek commercial/ development to
(Meridian Gateway, 1.37) industrial include residential
buildings. and a substantial
mix of Commercial
or educational uses,
Cultural Industries
mu19 Millennium Dome and the Millennium Sports arena,
tip of Greenwich Peninsula Dome, riverside conference, event
(16.54) park and leisure centre
within the Dome,
hotel, open space
accessible to the
public and
ecological area
along the Dome
waterfront
mu20 Site south of Dome adjacent Ancillary Central Business
North Greenwich Station facilities and District business/
(19.72) parking for the commercial uses
Dome and balanced and
appropriately scaled
mix of retail, leisure
and other uses,
including residential
predominately on
the eastern
waterfront and
Dome car-parking.
mu21 Delta/Blackwall Wharf Industrial uses, Residential-led
and land west of aggregates, part mixed use
North Greenwich Station vacant development with
(9.86) ancillary local
services.
mu22 Site between A102M and Ancillary Residential led
West parkside, north of storage facilities mixed use
Millennium Village for Millennium development
(9.41) Dome including secondary
school with ancillary
local services.
Central Park
retained.
SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES
Description
Non-residential elements must
comprise a significant proportion of
the total floorspace. See West
Greenwich Development Framework
(2000). Resolution to grant planning
permission for 600 flats, 30,000 sqm
offices, 5,000 sqm retail & leisure
(Meridian Gateway). Revised scheme
being prepared.
Uses as permitted for the Dome
Waterfront district in the Meridian
Delta Masterplan for Greenwich
Peninsula (ref. 02/2903). See The
Greenwich Peninsula Development
Framework (2002, being updated).
Uses as permitted for the Dome
Central, Millennium Square and East
Riverside districts in the Meridian
Delta Masterplan for Greenwich
Peninsula (ref. 02/2903): up to
325,000 sqm offices over and around
a retail and leisure focal point and
public transport interchange. See
The Greenwich Peninsula Development
Framework (2002, being updated).
Uses as permitted for the Meridian
Gardens district in the Meridian
Delta Masterplan for Greenwich
Peninsula (ref. 02/2903) See The
Greenwich Peninsula Development
Framework (2002, being updated).
Uses as permitted for the Parkside
districts in the Meridian Delta
Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula
(ref. 02/2903) See The Greenwich
Peninsula Development Framework
(2002 being updated.
217
MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu23 East Parkside/ Ancillary Residential led Uses as permitted for the Bugsby’s
Bugsby’s Reach facilities for mixed use Reach districts in the Meridian Delta
(8.44) Millennium development with Masterplan for Greenwich Peninsula
Dome ancillary local (ref. 02/2903). Northern part of site
services. Central affected by safeguarding for the
Park too be proposed third Blackwall river
retained. crossing (see site proposal m3). See
The Greenwich Peninsula Development
Framework (2002, being updated).

mu24 Woolwich Royal Arsenal Vacant Commercial leisure Part of mixed-use development of
(7.17) including ancillary the Royal Arsenal.The site is within a
retail; residential conservation area, and includes a
number of important listed buildings,
which must be preserved and
enhanced, and their setting protected.
Building 10 has planning permission
for residential use.The remainder is
being developed with Site mu13
(The Warren).

mu25 Royal Hill Court, off
Greenwich High Road
(0.39)
Retail with Retail at ground To include convenience and other
commercial and level with customer retail facilities for local residents.
residential parking. Above - Design commensurate with a World
above and car Commercial and heritage Site buffer zone location
parking some residential required.

mu26 Former Greenwich
District Hospital
(2.85)
Vacant hospital Mixed use including Vanburgh health clinic to be retained.
residential and Prominent gateway site where uses
activity and should complement and reinforce
employment East Greenwich District Centre,
generating town including retail and/or leisure along
centre uses Woolwich Road and Vanburgh Hill
frontages. Residential acceptable to
the rear, to include a significant
proportion of affordable housing.

mu27 Woolwich Campus “island”
site, Calderwood Street
(1.13)
Former Suitable for a mix of Woolwich Campus closed 2002. Part
Greenwich employment and of the western end of the block is
University activity generating Grade II listed. Site identified as
campus. town centre uses, capable of accommodating retail,
and residential office, residential, leisure,
within a mix. entertainment and education
functions (See Policy TC4).

218 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu28 Former public baths building, Vacant Suitable for re-use Locally listed building former
Bathway Greenwich for appropriate Greenwich University Student Union.
(0.2) University Town Centre The site is located adjacent to
Student Union activity statutorily listed buildings which must
be preserved and enhanced and their
setting protected through any
development. Substantial weight will
be given to the retention of the
building in accordance with
Policy D23.

mu29 Maritime Industrial Estate, Retail Bulky goods 1980's retail premises reaching the
Bugsby’s Way warehousing retailing and end of their economic life.
(2.33) and small B1b,c/B8 industrial / Reconfiguration without increase of
industrial / Business units existing net retail area. Main
business units customer and servicing access to be
provided off Bugsby’s Way

mu30 Lovell’s, Granite, Lovell’s, Granite Mixed use See The Greenwich Peninsula
Piper’s & Badcock’s Wharves & Piper’s mainly development Development Framework
(4.14) vacant, parts of incorporating a (Nov 2002, under review)
Badcock Wharf significant Single Masterplan required for the
and its proportion of whole site to incorporate riverside
foreshore employment uses, walk and riverside public open space
occupied by a including the (Local Park Deficiency Area).
boat repair retention of Commercial use required to buffer
works. boatyard operations adjoining Defined Industrial Area.
on Badcock’s Wharf Activities and layout must be
and foreshore, compatible with the ongoing use of
residential within a parts of Badcocks’ Wharf and
wider mix, with foreshore for boat repairs and
active commercial/ associated operations, unless a
community uses at relocation package securing the use
ground level, plus of a financially and operationally
riverside public viable alternative site is implemented
open space and before Badcock’s Wharf is cleared for
walk. redevelopment. Scale and nature of
development to be commensurate
with the site’s public transport
accessibility, road access constraints
and residential context.

mu31 Deptford Bridge, north side Various B1, creative Site close to DLR station south of
(0.24) commercial industries, other Lewisham College on a busy junction
employment environmentally unsuitable for
generating, residential use on the street frontage.
educational or Residential element may be
vocational uses. appropriate on the northern
elevations if suitably buffered and
designed. Potential for links with
Lewisham College

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 219

MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares)
mu32 Payne & Borthwick Wharves Document
(0.87) storage.
mu33 131-161 Greenwich High
Road (j/o Norman Road)
(1.57)
mu34 Davy’s site, 161-171
Greenwich High Road
(0.52)
mu35 Peggy Middleton House,
and former student
accommodation, Crown
building & Post Office
(2.81)
220 SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES
Existing Use Proposal Description
Mixed use Uses must not prejudice the
development of potential for river freight operations
residential with a on the adjoining, safeguarded
significant Convoys Wharf (LB Lewisham).
proportion of Riverfront public access required.
commercial Payne’s Wharf is Grade 2 listed and
floorspace e.g. should be sensitively incorporated in
studios, workshops, any redevelopment. Planning
offices application for mixed use including
247 flats.
Various Mixed use Gateway location to World Heritage
commercial development and Site requiring sensitive design
interchange solutions. See West Greenwich
enhancement Development Framework (2000).
including a
significant
proportion of B1
office/ business
space, active uses
including retail at
street level, and
residential as part
of a mix
Various uses Mixed use Gateway location to World Heritage
including Davy’s development of Site requiring sensitive design
wine bar and residential with a solutions. Refurbishment/
cellar significant development is likely to include
proportion of re-provision of premises for Davy’s
commercial Wine Bar. Site layout and access
floorspace (e.g. arrangements should prioritise
studio/office space pedestrian access along Waller Way
above A1, A2 & A3 (the western site boundary) to
at street level). Greenwich mainline and DLR station.
The Greenwich High Road frontage
buildings are a mix of statutorily and
locally listed. See West Greenwich
Development Framework (2000,
update pending).
Council and A mix of residential, Retail and other town centres uses
government retail and/or would also be appropriate on the
offices, halls of business/ lower Woolwich New Road frontage.
residence, employment uses Post office is locally listed and its
multi-storey car retention is encouraged. Large scale
park retailing proposals would need
frontage on General Gordon Square.
See Woolwich Town Centre
Development Framework (2002 Draft,
being updated).
MIXED USES
No. Site (hectares) Existing Use Proposal Description
mu36 Co-op site, 125-151 Powis Council offices Major non-food Possible department store site.
Street (south side) and car park retail use with Parking would need to be provided
(0.87) possible mixed use within the scheme if the parking area
including residential were utilised. See Woolwich Town
on upper floors Centre Development Framework
(2002 Draft, being updated).

mu37 Waterfront Leisure Centre Car Park Mixed use with See Woolwich Town Centre
Car Park active uses at street Development Framework (2002 Draft,
(0.74) and river level; being updated). Riverside walk to be
residential above, to maintained
include replacement
public car parking

mu38 Royal Military Academy, Military Conversion for Grade II Listed building built in 1804,
Woolwich Common SE18 academy, residential-led mix to be preserved and its setting
(8.49) parade ground of uses and/or enhanced. Parade ground and
and open space institutional/ Metropolitan Open Land to be
community use, retained without built encroachment
open space nor use for car parking. Potential for
limited infill development elsewhere.

mu39 Kidbrooke station area
(4.46)
Railway station, Kidbrooke station
retail, residential transport
and part vacant interchange, local
centre, housing
See the pending Kidbrooke
Development Area SPD and Policy H4
(Kibrooke Development Area). Local
centre to include medium to large
supermarket and a range of smaller
shops and services

THAMESMEAD

mu40 Tripcock Point, Vacant land and Residential led See the Tripcock Point Development
Thamesmead SE28 temporary mixed use Framework, SPG adopted September
(27.51 ha.) aggregates development with 2003. Outline planning permission for
processing ancillary local mixed use including 2,000 dwellings
retailing and (03/2618/O).
services, community
and commercial
uses.

SITE SCHEDULES: MIXED USES 221

222 SITE PROPOSAL SCHEDULES
APPENDICES
A P P E N D I X 1 : L E G I S L AT I V E B AC K G R O U N D
Preparation of the Unitary Development Plan (UDP) was commenced by the Council under the provisions
of the Town and Country Planning Act (1990). It follows the requirements set out in the Act and in The Town
and Country Planning (Development Plan) (England) Regulations 1999.
Part Two of the Town and Country Planning Act sets out the following requirements for a UDP:
“2 A Unitary Development Plan shall comprise two parts.
3 Part I of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of a written statement formulating the
authority’s general policies in respect of the development and other use of land in their area
(including measures for the improvement of the physical environment and the management of
traffic).
4 Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall consist of:-
a. a written statement formulating in such detail as the authority think appropriate (and so as
to be readily distinguishable from the other contents of the Plan) their proposals for the
development and other use of land in their area or for any description of development or
other use of such land;
b. a map showing those proposals on a geographical basis;
c. a reasoned justification of the general policies in Part I of the Plan and of proposals in Part
II; and
d. such diagrams, illustrations or other descriptive or explanatory matter in respect of the
general Policies in Part I of the Plan or the Proposals in Part II as the authority think
appropriate or as may be prescribed.
5 A Unitary Development Plan shall also contain such other matters as may be prescribed or as
the Secretary of State may in any other case direct.
6 In formulating the general Policies in Part 1of a Unitary Development Plan the authority shall
have regard:-
a. to any strategic guidance given by the Secretary of State to assist them in the preparation
of the Plan;
b. to current national and regional policies;
c. to the resources likely to be available;
d. to such other matters as the Secretary of State may direct the authority to take into
account.
7 The Proposals in Part II of a Unitary Development Plan shall be in general conformity with
Part I.”
In addition, the UDP takes account of Planning Policy Guidance Note 12: Development Plans (1999), which
sets out guidance on the procedure and content of the UDP. PPG12 sets out a UDP’s function and format
as follows:
“[The UDP] should contain the local planning authority’s policies and proposals for the development and
use of land.The 1990 Act also requires structure, local and unitary development plans to include policies in
respect of:

APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND 223

 • The conservation of the natural beauty and amenity of the land;
• The improvement of the physical environment; and
• The management of traffic.” (Paragraph 3.2)
“Part 1 of UDP’s … should concentrate of providing a strategic framework within which detailed policies
can then be framed in Part II of the UDP.” (Paragraph 3.7)
“UDP part II sets out the local planning authority’s detailed policies and specific proposals for the
development and use of land which will guide its day-to-day planning decisions.” (Paragraph 3.11)
“Part II of a plan must be in general conformity with policies in Part I.” (Appendix A, paragraph 7)
“The written statement should also include a reasoned justification of the plan’s policies and proposals.The
reasoned justification should only contain an explanation behind the policies and proposals in the plan. It
should not contain policies and proposals which will be used in themselves for taking decisions on planning
applications.” (Appendix A, paragraph 24)
Under the Greater London Authority Act 1999 and the Town and Country Planning (London Spatial Development
Strategy) Regulations 2000, the Mayor has responsibility for, and has prepared, a spatial development strategy
for London (SDS). It has replaced strategic planning guidance for London Planning Authorities (RPG3) and
the London Parts of RPG3b/9b (strategic planning guidance for the River Thames).The SDS, known as the
London Plan, was published in February 2004. UDPs are required to be in general conformity with the Plan.
The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004 gave the London Plan ‘development plan’ status.The London
Plan (2004), together with the UDP (2006), forms the Development Plan for the Borough.

224 APPENDIX 1: LEGISLATIVE BACKGROUND

A P P E N D I X 2 : G L O S S A RY A N D A B B R E V I AT I O N S
Affordable Housing
Housing to meet the needs of households whose incomes are not sufficient to allow them to access
appropriate housing in the Borough housing market, comprising both Social Rented housing and
Intermediate housing including Key Worker housing.
AOD
Above Ordinance Datum. Height above sea level.
Article 4 Direction
The Local Planning Authority may make a direction under Article 4 of the Town and Country Planning
General Permitted Development Order 1995 (GPDO).This removes specified Permitted Development Rights,
granted under the Order, from a defined area.
Backland development
Development of land surrounded by existing properties, often using back gardens and creating a new
vehicular access.
Biodiversity
The variety of plants, animals and other living things in a particular area or region. It includes species, the
differences found within a species and the ecosystems and habitats within which species occur.
Bulky goods
A retail product subcategory of Comparison or durable goods referring to items that are bulky and/or heavy,
either as an individual item or in the quantity typically purchased, to the extent that the average shopper
could not reasonably be expected to carry the purchase. Bulky goods are generally considered to comprise
furniture; major electrical items and appliances; flooring and DIY goods.
Comparison Goods
Items such as clothing, jewellery, cosmetics, footwear and electrical goods, where shoppers typically prefer
to have a choice of retail outlets in order to compare an article with others of the same type. Also referred
to as ‘durable goods’.
Conservation Area
An area of special architectural or historic interest, the character or appearance of which is desirable to
preserve or enhance.
Controlled Parking Zone (CPZ)
An area in which on-street parking restrictions apply, typified by parking meters, resident only parking
bays/permits etc.
Convenience Goods
Goods bought frequently or out of necessity e.g. food, tobacco, and newspapers.
DCLG
Department for Communities & Local Government. Government Department responsible for national
policy on housing, planning, regional and local government, also including the Social Exclusion Unit and the
Neighbourhood Renewal Unit.
Density (residential)
The amount of residential accommodation in any given area, measured in habitable rooms per hectare
(HRH) of residential site area.
Development Plan
A plan for the use of land for a specified area, which Local Planning Authorities have a statutory duty to
produce.The Greenwich UDP is the statutory Development Plan for the London Borough of Greenwich.

APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 225

Development Plan Document
Once prepared Development Plan Documents (DPD) will replace the adopted UDP as the heart of the
Local Development Framework (see LDF entry below). DPDs have legal status under the Town and Country
Planning (Local Development) (England) Regulations 2004, and will be subject to independent examination.
They will be the main basis upon which planning decisions are made.There are five types of DPD:The Core
(Spatial) Strategy, Development Control Policies, Site Allocations, the Proposals Map and Area Action Plans.
The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www.greenwich.gov.uk) provides a fuller description.
DLR
Docklands Light Railway
DoT
Department of Transport. Government Department responsible for national transport policy.
Durable Goods
See Comparison Goods.
Environment Agency
Set up by the 1995 Environment Act, the Environment Agency are a non-departmental public body with
responsibility as environmental advisors and regulators.
EU
European Union
Floorspace (gross)
All floorspace enclosed within the building envelope.
Floorspace (net retail)
Area of a shop that is accessible to the public - sales floor, sales counters, checkouts / circulation / lobby
areas, and ancillary facilities such as public seating, in-store cafes or concessions. Excludes goods storage /
delivery / preparation areas, staff offices, staff amenity facilities, plant rooms, public toilets and enclosed public
stairwells / lifts between shop floors.
Footprint (of building)
Ground area on a given site occupied by permanent buildings, not including areas of hardstanding (e.g.
tarmac carparking) or temporary structures / outbuildings.
GAD
Greenwich Association for the Disabled
General Permitted Development Order (GPDO)
The GPDO lists a number of operations to which planning permission is given automatically and where no
application to the Local Planning Authority is required.
Government Circulars
Periodic Guidance on specific topics relevant to planning which sets out Government policy and guidance
on planning matters.
Greater London Authority (GLA)
Established in 2000, the GLA is made up of a Mayor and a separately elected Assembly. The Mayor has
responsibility for producing strategic planning guidance for London, published as the London Plan (See
Spatial Development Strategy).
Green Belt
A stretch of open land encircling Greater London in which development is strictly controlled, giving
definition to the built up area and limiting urban sprawl.

226 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY

Green Chain
A chain of open spaces through South-East London extending in a virtually continuous arc through
Lewisham, Greenwich, Bexley and Bromley.
Green Travel Plan
Where an employer has produced a plan of practical measures to reduce car-use for travel to, from and
for work. This is a Central Government initiative implemented through local authorities by a travel plan
advisor.
Habitable Room
Habitable Rooms will include all separate living rooms, including bedrooms, but excluding bathrooms, toilets,
landings, halls and lobbies. Kitchens will be counted as habitable where they have an overall floor area
greater than 13 sq. m. (140sq. ft.).
High Building
A building, including all types of structures such as masts, pylons, chimneys etc, which significantly exceeds
the height of its surroundings.
HMO
Houses in Multiple Occupation. Occupation of a dwelling by more than one household.
Household
One person living alone or a group of people (who may or may not be related) living or staying temporarily
at the same address with common housekeeping (definition derived from The Census 2001 definitions,
ONS 2001).
Housing Strategy and Investment Programme (HIP)
The rolling programme of expenditure that the Local Authority submits annually for Central Government
funding. Statements accompany the programmes on local housing need, policies and priorities.
HRA
Habitable Rooms per Acre. Used as a measure of housing density.
HRH
Habitable Rooms per Hectare. Used as a measure of housing density.
ILIP (Interim Local Implementation Plan) and LIP (Local Implementation Plan)
A document of Greenwich Council’s transport policies and schemes for the Borough reviewed on a regular
basis. It is accompanied by a Borough Spending Plan that details the Borough’s annual transport spending
bid.
Interchange
A point/location where a traveller can switch from one form of transport (e.g. bus) to another (e.g. rail).
Intermediate housing
Subsidised rented or shared ownership (part owned, part rented) housing costing more than social rent
levels, but less than the private cost of purchasing / renting; also houses sold at a discount. Provided for those
on moderate incomes (such as key workers) who cannot afford to rent or buy at London prices, but who
also are unlikely to qualify for social rented housing.
Key Worker
Workers such nurses, teachers, and emergency services providers that have clearly identified recruitment
and retention problems which are undermining service delivery and the economic well-being of the city.
Workers in these groups are typically on relatively low pay, and whilst not in any ordinary sense in housing
need, are unable to buy or rent in the private market.
Kiss and Ride
Where one is driven to the station, for example and the journey is continued by another means of
transport (e.g. train).

APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 227

Listed Building (Local)
A building or structure of architectural or historic interest which does not qualify for inclusion in the
statutory list but which in the opinion of the Local Authority make a valuable contribution to the character
of the area.
Listed Building (Statutory)
A building (and any other fixed object within its curtilage of special architectural or historical interest which
is on a list prepared by the Secretary of State for Culture, Media and Sport.These buildings are protected
under the Town and Country Planning (Listed Buildings and Conservation Areas) Act 1990. Listed Building
Consent is required for any proposal to alter, extend or demolish the whole or part of the interior or
exterior of any structure within the curtilage of that building.
LNR
Local Nature Reserve. An area of local interest to which there is a commitment for conservation declared
under the National Parks and Access to Countryside Act 1949.
Local Development Framework (LDF)
A Local Development Framework (LDF) is a portfolio of more specific documents that will replace
traditional and wider-ranging old-style ‘development plans’ such as the Greenwich UDP. It principally
comprises Development Plan Documents with legal/statutory status, and non-statutory Supplementary
Planning Documents. The Greenwich Local Development Scheme (www.greenwich.gov.uk) provides a fuller
description.
London Plan
See Spatial Development Strategy
Low Emissions Zone (LEZ)
A defined area from which polluting vehicles that do not comply with set emissions standards are barred
from entering.
LWT
London Wildlife Trust
Metropolitan Open Land (MOL)
Land of predominantly open character, recognised has having more than Borough significance.The level of
protection afforded to MOL is the same as that afforded to Green Belt land.
Mixed Use
A development that includes more than one land use, and the second or additional uses comprise a
significant proportion of the total floorspace. The mix can be vertical (a mix of uses within one building)
and/or horizontal (a range of uses across a site, each occupying a single-use building)
ODPM
Following reorganisation in 2006, now known as the Department for Communities & Local Government
(see DCLG).
ONS
The Office of National Statistics
Permitted Development Rights
Small-scale developments which do not require planning permission in accordance with the General
Permitted Development Order 1995.
Pinch Points
Narrowing of the road carriageway to prevent passage by certain large/wide vehicles.
Planning Brief
A statement of the land use opportunities and constraints presented by a particular site, prepared for the
guidance of potential developers. It will generally give details of the favoured land uses for the site and the

228 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY

standards that any development should reach. Planning Briefs are usually adopted as Supplementary Planning
Guidance.
Planning Obligations
A legal undertaking entered into in connection with a planning permission under Section 106 of the Town
and Country Planning Act 1990.
Planning Policy Guidance Notes (PPG's)
Government advice on various planning policy matters issued from time to time to guide Local Planning
Authorities in their operation of the planning system. Being replaced by Planning Policy Statements (PPS’s),
which serve the same purpose.
Registered Social Landlord
A non-profit making organisation who allocate housing on the basis of need and are registered with the
Housing Corporation (a Government organisation who provide funding to deliver affordable housing).They
are responsible for housing provision, construction, improvement and management, for rent and sale.
Residential Site Area
Area wholly within the Curtilage (boundary) of the site including internal access roads and incidental open
space (see also Annex C of PPG3 Housing). For mixed use schemes residential density can be estimated by
apportioning the site area between different uses.
Safeguarding
Generally, the reserving of land for a particular purpose.
Sequential Approach
Approach to selecting suitable sites for activity generating uses that attract the visiting public, and in
particular retail and indoor leisure developments, to concentrate these uses within town centres wherever
possible. Developers are required to give first preference to locations within town centres. Edge-of-centre
sites, and in the last instance out of centre sites, can only considered if there are no more central alternatives
available, and are subject to a range of additional policy tests.
Single Programme (formerly Single Regeneration Budget, SRB)
National government funding programme administered by Regional Development Agencies with the aim
of supporting regeneration initiatives carried out by local regeneration partnerships.
Site of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI)
Sites notified to the Local Planning Authority by the Nature Conservancy Council under section 28 of the
Wildlife and Countryside Act 1981 as being of national importance by reason of any of their flora, fauna,
geology or physiographical features.
SNCI
Sites of Nature Conservation Importance. Sites identified as being of importance for nature conservation
purposes.
Social rented housing
Housing typically owned and/or managed by a registered Social Landlord for subsidised rent to households
on low incomes who would otherwise be unable to access suitable housing.
Spatial Development Strategy (SDS)
Spatial Development Strategy –known as The London Plan. Planning Guidance for London, issued by the
London Mayor, to which Greenwich UDP will have to be in general conformity with. Published February
2004.
Strategic Guidance
Planning Guidance for London that provides a framework for the preparation of Unitary Development
Plans. Previous guidance RPG3 (1996) was replaced by the London Mayor’s Spatial Development Strategy
(SDS) in February 2004.

APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 229

Supplementary Planning Document (SPD)
A non-statutory Local Development Document forming part of the Borough’s Local Development Framework
(LDF - see above).They provide further detail on the implementation of particular policies and proposals
contained in the UDP (or successor Development Plan Document). Examples include area- or issue-specific
planning guidance (such as a planning brief). Prepared by a process incorporating public consultation and
formal adoption by Council. One adopted, SPD is a material consideration in the determination of planning
applications, although the UDP will remain the primary policy basis for decision-making.The Greenwich Local
Development Scheme (www.greenwich.gov.uk) provides a fuller description.
Supplementary Planning Guidance (SPG)
Predecessor to SPD, very similar in scope, purpose and status, but adopted prior to the 2004 Planning &
Compensation Act. All SPG that remains relevant will be updated and re-adopted as SPD.
Traffic calming
Traffic management geared to reducing the environmental impact and speeds of vehicles.
Traffic Management
Physical or other changes to roads in order to slow traffic, reduce traffic volumes, give preferential treatment
to certain users, improve the environment, etc.
Tree Preservation Order (TPO)
Individual or groups of trees which the Local Planning Authority consider make a positive contribution to
the amenity of the area and which are worthy of preservation. Orders are served in accordance with the
Town and Country Planning Act of 1990.
Written Statement
The document setting out a Local Planning Authority's policies and proposals for development within its
area, which, together with the Proposals Map, comprises the UDP.

230 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY

Use Classes Order (UCO)
Town and Country Planning (Use Classes) Order 1987 and subsequent updates.This order groups
buildings of similar uses (e.g. shops, offices) within which certain changes of use may take place which
will not require planning permission. Some of the more frequently used use classes are:
A1 Shops
A2 Financial or Professional Services
A3 Restaurants and Cafés
A4 Drinking Establishments
A5 Hot Food Take-away’s
B1 Business Use. Uses for the purposes of offices (other than A2 use), research and development
or light industry, providing that such a use can be carried out in a residential area without
detriment to the amenity of that area.
B2 General Industrial Use. An industrial use which cannot be carried out in any residential area
without detriment to the amenity of that area
B8 A building or land primarily for the purpose of storage / distribution of goods.
C1 Hotel, boarding, guest house or hostel where, in each case, no significant element of care is
provided.
C2 Residential Institutions. Use for provision of residential accommodation and care to people in
need, or use as a hospital or nursing home, residential school or training centre
C3 Self contained residential dwelling
D1 Non-residential institution. Uses for places of worship, day nurseries, medical services museums
etc.
D2 Assembly and Leisure. Uses such as cinemas, theatres, bingo halls and indoor sport complexes.
Government is examining proposals to designate nightclubs as a separate use (Class D3).
Sui generis Other uses that do not fall within the categories specified above (including some
hybrid uses), and potentially sensitive uses that are excluded from any category of
the Use Classes Order (1987) and subsequent updates specifically to ensure that
proposals for that use will in all instances require planning permission.

APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY 231

232 APPENDIX 2: GLOSSARY